Volvo 2013 XC60 Owner's Manual Owners

User Manual: Volvo 2013 XC60 Owner's Manual 2013 Volvo XC60 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 382 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Owner's Manual L:7:9>I>DC

XC60

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you

will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile

designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you

to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating

instructions in this manual.

We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times

in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a

vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impair-

ment that could hinder your ability to drive.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and

emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle,

please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Contacting

Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction" chapter for information on get-

ting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.

Contents

00 Introduction

Important information................................. 6

Environment.............................................. 12

Important warnings................................... 13

01 Safety

Occupant safety........................................ 16

Reporting safety defects........................... 17

Seat belts ................................................. 18

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .... 21

Occupant Weight Sensor ......................... 26

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ..... 30

Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 32

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS..... 33

Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ......... 35

Crash mode.............................................. 36

Child safety............................................... 37

Child restraint systems............................. 40

Infant seats............................................... 42

Convertible seats...................................... 44

Booster cushions...................................... 46

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................. 47

Top tether anchors.................................... 48

Integrated booster cushion....................... 49

Child safety locks...................................... 52

02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade....................... 56

Keyless drive............................................. 64

Locks........................................................ 67

Alarm......................................................... 70

Contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls.......................... 76

Ignition modes.......................................... 84

Seats......................................................... 86

Steering wheel.......................................... 93

Lighting..................................................... 94

Wipers and washers............................... 102

Power windows....................................... 105

Mirrors..................................................... 107

Compass*............................................... 109

Laminated panoramic roof*.................... 110

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*.... 113

Starting the engine.................................. 116

Transmission........................................... 121

Brakes..................................................... 124

Parking brake.......................................... 127

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*.................... 130

04 Driver support

Stability system....................................... 134

Road sign information (RSI) ................... 136

Cruise control.......................................... 138

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*.............. 140

Distance Alert* ....................................... 151

City Safety™ .......................................... 154

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and

Pedestrian Detection*............................. 160

Driver Alert System* ............................... 168

Park assist*............................................. 174

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ............ 178

Blind Spot Information System*.............. 182

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Volvo Sensus.......................................... 188

Menus and messages............................. 189

The MY CAR menus............................... 191

Climate system....................................... 197

Trip computer......................................... 205

Active chassis system–Four C*............... 207

Passenger compartment convenience... 208

Contents

4* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Infotainment

Introduction............................................. 214

Radio....................................................... 225

Media player........................................... 234

AUX/USB sockets................................... 238

Bluetooth media ................................... 241

Bluetooth® hands-free connection ........ 243

Cell phone voice control......................... 251

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* ............. 255

Remote control*...................................... 264

07 During your trip

Driving recommendations....................... 268

Refueling................................................. 271

Loading................................................... 276

Cargo area ............................................. 280

Towing a trailer....................................... 283

Emergency towing.................................. 286

08 Wheels and tires

General information ............................... 292

Tire inflation............................................. 295

Inflation pressure ................................... 297

Tire designations .................................... 298

Glossary of tire terminology ................... 300

Vehicle loading ....................................... 301

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ................. 303

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires . 304

Temporary Spare ................................... 305

Tire Sealing System................................ 306

Changing a wheel .................................. 312

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 316

Contents

09 Maintenance and

specifications

Volvo maintenance.................................. 322

Maintaining your car............................... 323

Hood and engine compartment.............. 325

Engine oil................................................ 326

Fluids...................................................... 328

Replacing bulbs...................................... 330

Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 337

Battery..................................................... 339

Fuses...................................................... 342

Vehicle care............................................. 350

10 Specifications

Label information.................................... 358

Specifications......................................... 360

Overview of information and warning sym-

bols......................................................... 366

Volvo programs....................................... 369

11 Index

Index....................................................... 370

Introduction

Important information

Contacting Volvo

In the USA:

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive,

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada:

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.ca

About this manual

•Before you operate your vehicle for the first

time, please familiarize yourself with the

information found in the chapters "Your

Driving Environment" and "During Your

Trip."

•Information contained in the balance of the

manual is extremely useful and should be

read after operating the vehicle for the first

time.

•The manual is structured so that it can be

used for reference. For this reason, it

should be kept in the vehicle for ready

access.

Footnotes

Certain pages of this manual contain informa-

tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of

the page. This information supplements the

text that the footnote number refers to (a letter

is used if the footnote refers to text in a table).

Display texts

There are several displays in the driver’s field

of vision that show messages generated by

various systems and functions in the vehicle.

These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Man-

ual by being in slightly larger type than the sur-

rounding text and are printed in gray, (for

example: Change doors unlock setting).

Decals

There are various types of decals in the vehicle

whose purpose is to provide important infor-

mation in a clear and concise way. The impor-

tance of these decals is explained as follows,

in descending order of importance.

Risk of injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back-

ground, white text/image on a black back-

ground. Decals of this type are used to indicate

potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this

type could result in serious injury or death.

Introduction

Important information

Risk of damage to the vehicle

G031592

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black or blue warning background and space

for a message. If the information on decals of

this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle

could result.

Information

G031593

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black background. These decals provide gen-

eral information.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual

are examples only and are not intended to

be reproductions of the decals actually used

in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indi-

cation of how they look and their approxi-

mate location in the vehicle. The applicable

information for your particular vehicle can

be found on the respective decals in the

vehicle.

Types of lists used in the manual

Procedures

Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or

actions that must be carried out in a certain

order, are arranged in numbered lists in this

manual.

If there is a series of illustrations associated

with step-by-step instructions, each step

in the procedure is numbered in the same

way as the corresponding illustration.

Lists in which letters are used can be found

with series of illustrations in cases where

the order in which the instructions are car-

ried out is not important.

Arrows with or without numbers are used

to indicate the direction of a movement.

Arrows containing letters are used to indi-

cate movement.

If there are no illustrations associated with a

step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure

are indicated by ordinary numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are used

in general overview illustrations in which

certain components are pointed out. The

corresponding number is also used in the

position list's description of the various

components.

Introduction

Important information

Bullet lists

Bullets are used to differentiate a number of

components/functions/points of information

that can be listed in random order.

For example:

•Coolant

•Engine oil

Continued

This symbol can be found at the lower right

corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page

to indicate that the current topic is continued

on the following page.

Options and accessories

Optional or accessory equipment described in

this manual is indicated by an asterisk.

Optional or accessory equipment may not be

available in all countries or markets. Please

note that some vehicles may be equipped dif-

ferently, depending on special legal require-

ments.

Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor-

mation.

NOTE

•All information, illustrations and specifi-

cations contained in this manual are

based on the latest product information

available at the time of publication.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

changes at any time, or to change spec-

ifications or design without notice and

without incurring obligation.

•Do not export your Volvo to another

country before investigating that coun-

try's applicable safety and emission

control requirements. In some cases it

may be difficult or impossible to comply

with these requirements. Modifications

to the emission control system(s) may

render your Volvo not certifiable for

legal operation in the U.S., Canada and

other countries.

WARNING

If your vehicle is involved in an accident,

unseen damage may affect its drivability

and safety.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA proposition 65

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the state of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addition, certain

fluids contained in vehicles and certain

products of component wear contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such as

air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,

adaptive steering columns, and button cell

batteries may contain Perchlorate material.

Special handling may apply for service or

vehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.

Introduction

Important information

Shiftlock

When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector

is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the

selector from this position, the ignition must be

in mode II (see page 84) or the engine must

be running. Depress the brake pedal, press the

button on the front side of the gear selector and

move the selector from P (Park).

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnos-

tic test when the engine has been started and

driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto-

matic test may be performed when the vehicle

first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several

times and a sound may be audible from the

ABS control module. This is normal.

Fuel filler door

Press the button on the light switch panel (see

the illustration on page 273) when the vehicle

is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door.

Please note that the fuel filler door will remain

unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for-

ward. An audible click will be heard when the

fuel filler door relocks.

Points to keep in mind

•Do not export your Volvo to another coun-

try before investigating that country's

applicable safety and exhaust emission

requirements. In some cases it may be dif-

ficult or impossible to comply with these

requirements. Modifications to the emis-

sion control system(s) may render your

Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in

the U.S., Canada and other countries.

•All information, illustrations and specifica-

tions contained in this manual are based on

the latest product information available at

the time of publication. Please note that

some vehicles may be equipped differ-

ently, depending on special legal require-

ments. Optional equipment described in

this manual may not be available in all mar-

kets.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

changes at any time, or to change specifi-

cations or design without notice and with-

out incurring obligation.

Crash event data

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is

to record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle's systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems

for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

•How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

•Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

•How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only

if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no

data are recorded by the EDR under normal

driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash loca-

tion) are recorded. However, other parties,

such as law enforcement, could combine

the EDR data with the type of personally

identifying data routinely acquired during a

crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the vehi-

cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as

law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Introduction

Important information

Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a

number of computers whose task is to contin-

uously control and monitor the vehicle’s oper-

ation. They can also register information during

normal driving conditions if they detect a fault

relating to the vehicle’s operation and func-

tionality. Some of the stored information is

required by technicians when carrying out

service and maintenance to enable them to

diagnose and rectify any faults that have

occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to

fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements.

This information may be stored in the vehicle’s

computers for a certain period of time.

Volvo will not contribute to spreading the

above-mentioned information to third parties

without the consent of the vehicle’s owner.

However, due to national legal requirements

and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to

provide information of this type to authorities

such as law enforcement agencies or others

who may assert a legal right to obtain such

information.

Volvo and service and repair facilities with

agreements with Volvo have access to the spe-

cial technical equipment required in order to

read and interpret the information stored by the

vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsible for

ensuring that the information transmitted to

Volvo during service and maintenance is

stored and handled in a secure manner and

that this handling is done in accordance with

applicable legal requirements. For additional

information, contact:

For additional information, contact:

In the United States

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.ca

Volvo Structural Parts Statement

Volvo has always been and continues to be a

leader in automotive safety. Volvo engineers

and manufactures vehicles designed to help

protect vehicle occupants in the event of a col-

lision.

Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a

collision. This energy absorption system

including, but not limited to, structural compo-

nents such as bumper reinforcement bars,

bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fender

aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panels

must work together to maintain cabin integrity

and protect the vehicle occupants.

The supplemental restraint system including

but not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags,

and deployment sensors work together with

the above components to provide proper tim-

ing for air bag deployment.

Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North America

does not support the use of aftermarket, alter-

native or anything other than original Volvo

parts for collision repair.

In addition Volvo does not support the use or

re-use of structural components from an exist-

ing vehicle that has been previously damaged.

Although these parts may appear equivalent, it

is difficult to tell if the parts have been previ-

ously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part

has been damaged as a result of a prior colli-

Introduction

Important information

sion. The quality of these used parts may also

have been affected due to environmental

exposure.

Information on the Internet

Additional information about your vehicle is

available at www.volvocars.com.

In order to read a QR code, a QR reader is nec-

essary, which is available as an app for a num-

ber of different cell phone and can be down-

loaded from the App Store or Android Market.

QR code

Introduction

Environment

Volvo and the environment

Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus-

tomers. As a natural part of this commitment,

we care about the environment in which we all

live. Caring for the environment means an

everyday involvement in reducing our environ-

mental impact. Volvo's environmental activities

are based on a holistic view, which means we

consider the overall environmental impact of a

product throughout its complete life cycle. In

this context, design, production, product use,

and recycling are all important considerations.

In production, Volvo has partly or completely

phased out several chemicals including CFCs,

lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and

reduced the number of chemicals used in our

plants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into

production a three-way catalytic converter with

a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen

sensor, in 1976. The current version of this

highly efficient system reduces emissions of

harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the

exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and

the search to eliminate the remaining emis-

sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile

manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for

the air conditioning system of all models as far

back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec-

tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are

bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

continuous environmental refinement of con-

ventional gasoline-powered internal combus-

tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at

advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become our part-

ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on

the environment. To reduce your vehicle's

environmental impact, you can:

•Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.

Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-

omy with improperly inflated tires.

•Follow the recommended maintenance

schedule in your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet.

•Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-

sible.

•See a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician as soon as possible for inspec-

tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-

cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the

vehicle has started.

•Properly dispose of any vehicle-related

waste such as used motor oil, used batter-

ies, brake pads, etc.

•When cleaning your vehicle, please use

genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo

car care products are formulated to be

environmentally friendly.

Recycling

As part of Volvo’s commitment to the environ-

ment, it is essential for the vehicle to be recy-

cled in an environmentally sound way. Almost

the entire vehicle can be recycled and for that

reason, the vehicle’s final owner is requested

to contact a Volvo retailer for information about

approved and certified recycling facilities.

FSC



The FSC (Forest Stewardship Council) sym-

bol indicates that the wood pulp used in this

publication comes from FSC certified forests

and other responsible sources.

Introduction

Important warnings

Driver distraction

A driver has a responsibility to do everything

possible to ensure his or her own safety and

the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth-

ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions

is part of that responsibility.

Driver distraction results from driver activities

that are not directly related to controlling the

vehicle in the driving environment. Your new

Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea-

ture-rich entertainment and communication

systems. These include hands-free cellular tel-

ephones, navigation systems, and multipur-

pose audio systems. You may also own other

portable electronic devices for your own con-

venience. When used properly and safely, they

enrich the driving experience. Improperly used,

any of these could cause a distraction.

For all of these systems, we want to provide the

following warning that reflects the strong Volvo

concern for your safety. Never use these devi-

ces or any feature of your vehicle in a way that

distracts you from the task of driving safely.

Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In

addition to this general warning, we offer the

following guidance regarding specific newer

features that may be found in your vehicle:

•Never use a hand-held cellular telephone

while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

cellular telephone use by a driver while the

vehicle is moving.

•If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-

tion system, set and make changes to your

travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.

•Never program your audio system while

the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-

sets with the vehicle parked, and use your

programmed presets to make radio use

quicker and simpler.

•Never use portable computers or personal

digital assistants while the vehicle is mov-

ing.

Accessory installation

•We strongly recommend that Volvo owners

install only genuine, Volvo-approved

accessories, and that accessory installa-

tions be performed only by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to

ensure compatibility with the performance,

safety, and emission systems in your vehi-

cle. Additionally, a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician knows where

accessories may and may not be safely

installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please

consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician before installing any acces-

sory in or on your vehicle.

•Accessories that have not been approved

by Volvo may or may not be specifically

tested for compatibility with your vehicle.

Additionally, an inexperienced installer

may not be familiar with some of your car's

systems.

•Any of your car's performance and safety

systems could be adversely affected if you

install accessories that Volvo has not tes-

ted, or if you allow accessories to be instal-

led by someone unfamiliar with your vehi-

cle.

•Damage caused by unapproved or

improperly installed accessories may not

be covered by your new vehicle warranty.

See your Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet for more warranty

information. Volvo assumes no responsi-

bility for death, injury, or expenses that

may result from the installation of non-gen-

uine accessories.

Occupant safety...................................................................................... 16

Reporting safety defects......................................................................... 17

Seat belts ............................................................................................... 18

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ................................................... 21

Occupant Weight Sensor ....................................................................... 26

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ................................................... 30

Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. 32

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS................................................... 33

Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ....................................................... 35

Crash mode............................................................................................ 36

Child safety............................................................................................. 37

Child restraint systems........................................................................... 40

Infant seats.............................................................................................. 42

Convertible seats.................................................................................... 44

Booster cushions.................................................................................... 46

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors................................................................. 47

Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 48

Integrated booster cushion..................................................................... 49

Child safety locks.................................................................................... 52

SAFETY

01 Safety

Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety

Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern

dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled

off the production line. Three-point seat belts

(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy-

absorbing impact zones were designed into

Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable

or required by government regulation.

We will not compromise our commitment to

safety. We continue to seek out new safety

features and to refine those already in our vehi-

cles. You can help. We would appreciate hear-

ing your suggestions about improving automo-

bile safety. We also want to know if you ever

have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us

in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:

1-800-663-8255.

Occupant safety reminders

How safely you drive doesn't depend on how

old you are but rather on:

•How well you see.

•Your ability to concentrate.

•How quickly you make decisions under

stress to avoid an accident.

The following suggestions are intended to help

you cope with the ever changing traffic envi-

ronment.

•Never drink and drive.

•If you are taking any medication, consult

your physician about its potential effects

on your driving abilities.

•Take a driver-retraining course.

•Have your eyes checked regularly.

•Keep your windshield and headlights

clean.

•Replace wiper blades when they start to

leave streaks.

•Take into account the traffic, road, and

weather conditions, particularly with

regard to stopping distance.

•Never send text messages while driving.

•Refrain from using or minimize the use of a

cell phone while driving.

Recall information

Information regarding recalls or other service

campaigns is available on our website at

www.volvocars.com/us/. Select the tab YOUR

VOLVO and the heading RECALL INFORMA-

TION will be displayed at the lower left side of

the screen.

01 Safety

Reporting safety defects

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer-

ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar

complaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become

involved in individual problems

between you, your retailer, or Volvo

Cars of North America, LLC. To con-

tact NHTSA, you may either call the

Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-

portation, Washington D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from:

http://www.safercar.gov

Volvo strongly recommends that if

your vehicle is covered under a serv-

ice campaign, safety or emission

recall or similar action, it should be

completed as soon as possible.

Please check with your local retailer

or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

if your vehicle is covered under these

conditions.

NHTSA can be reached at:

Internet:

http://www.nhtsa.gov

Telephone:

1-888-DASH-2-DOT

(1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada

If you believe your vehicle has a defect that

could cause a crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars

of Canada Corp.

Transport Canada can be contacted at:

1-800-333-0510

Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500

Fax: 1-819-994-3372

Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road

Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z

0A1

01 Safety

Seat belts

General information

Adjusting the seat belt

Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-

pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop-

erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster

seat determined by age, weight and height.

Volvo also believes no child should sit in the

front seat of a vehicle.

Most states and provinces make it mandatory

for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners

All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners

that reduce slack in the belts. These preten-

sioners are triggered in situations where the

front or side impact airbags deploy, and in cer-

tain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts

also include a tension reducing device which,

in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces

exerted by the seat belt on the occupant.

Fastening a seat belt

Buckling

Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch

plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is

heard. The seat belt retractor is normally

"unlocked" and you can move freely, provided

that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.

Seat belt retractor

The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol-

lowing situations:

•if the belt is pulled out rapidly

•during braking and acceleration

•if the vehicle is leaning excessively

•when driving in turns

•if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is acti-

vated

NOTE

Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt)

is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,

which is designed to help keep the seat belt

taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is

pulled out as far as possible. If this is done,

a sound from the seat belt retractor will be

audible, which is normal, and the seat belt

will be pulled taut and locked in place. This

function is automatically disabled when the

seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted.

See also page 38 for information about using

a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor a

child seat.

When wearing the seat belt remember:

•The belt should not be twisted or turned.

•The lap section of the belt must be posi-

tioned low on the hips (not pressing against

the abdomen).

•Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled

up into its retractor and that the shoulder

and lap belts are taut.

Unbuckling the seat belt

To remove the seat belt, press the red section

on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the

vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully

after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the

belt back into the retractor slot.

01 Safety

Seat belts

Seat belt maintenance

Check periodically that the seat belts are in

good condition. Use water and a mild deter-

gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism

function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull

rapidly on the strap.

WARNING

Never use a seat belt for more than one

occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion

of the belt under the arm, behind the back

or otherwise out of position. Such use could

cause injury in the event of an accident. As

seat belts lose much of their strength when

exposed to violent stretching, they should

be replaced after any collision, even if they

appear to be undamaged.

WARNING

•Never repair the belt yourself; have this

work done by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician only.

•Any device used to induce slack into the

shoulder belt portion of the three-point

belt system will have a detrimental

effect on the amount of protection avail-

able to you in the event of a collision.

•The seat back should not be tilted too

far back. The shoulder belt must be taut

in order to function properly.

•Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that children who have outgrown these

devices sit in the rear seat with the seat

belt properly fastened.

Seat belt reminder

G017726

Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console

The seat belt reminder consists of an audible

signal, an indicator light near the rearview mir-

ror and a symbol in the instrument panel that

alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their

seat belts. The audible signal and indicator

light will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the

time the ignition is switched on, regardless of

whether or not the seat belts are fastened.

If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the

vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and

warning light will be active for a total of 6 sec-

onds.

Rear seats

The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two

additional functions:

01 Safety

Seat belts

•It provides information about which seat

belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes-

sage will appear in the information display

when a belt is being used. This message

will disappear after approximately 6 sec-

onds or can be erased by pressing the

OK button on the left steering wheel lever.

•It also provides a reminder if one of the

occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled

his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in

motion. A visual and audible signal will be

given. These signals will stop when the

seat belt has been re-buckled or can be

stopped by pressing the OK button.

•The message Unbelted in rear seat will

appear in the information display if one of

the rear doors has been opened.

The message in the information display can

always be accessed, even if it has been erased,

by pressing the OK button to display stored

messages.

Seat belt use during pregnancy

G020998

The seat belt should always be worn during

pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the

correct way. The diagonal section should wrap

over the shoulder then be routed between the

breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap

section should lay flat over the thighs and as

low as possible under the belly. It must never

be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack

from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the

body without any twists.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers

should adjust their seats and steering wheel

such that they can easily maintain control of the

vehicle as they drive (which means they must

be able to easily operate the foot pedals and

steering wheel). Within this context, they

should strive to position the seat with as large

a distance as possible between their belly and

the steering wheel.

Child seats

Please refer to page 40 for information on

securing child seats with the seat belts.

01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

General information

Warning symbols in the instrument panel

As an enhancement to the three-point seat

belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple-

mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS

consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air-

bags, side impact airbags, a front passenger

occupant weight sensor, and inflatable cur-

tains. All of these systems are monitored by the

SRS control module. An SRS warning light in

the instrument panel (see the illustration) illu-

minates when the ignition is in modes I or II,

and will normally go out after approximately

6 seconds if no faults are detected in the sys-

tem.

Where applicable, a text message will also be

displayed when the SRS warning light illumi-

nates. If this warning symbol is not functioning

properly, the general warning symbol illumi-

nates and a text message will be displayed.

See also page 78 and page 80 for more

information about indicator and warning sym-

bols.

WARNING

•If the SRS warning light stays on after

the engine has started or if it illuminates

while you are driving, have the vehicle

inspected by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician as soon as

possible.

•Never try to repair any component or

part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer-

ence in the system could cause mal-

function and serious injury. All work on

these systems should be performed by

a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

WARNING

If your vehicle has become flood-damaged

in any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing

water on the floor of the vehicle), do not

attempt to start the vehicle or insert the

remote key into the ignition slot before dis-

connecting the battery (see below). This

may cause airbag deployment which could

result in serious injury. Have the vehicle

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician for repairs.

Before attempting to tow the vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition for at least

10 minutes and disconnect the battery.

2. Follow the instructions for manually

overriding the shiftlock system on page

123.

01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Front airbags

G018665

The front airbag system

The front airbags supplement the three-point

seat belts. For these airbags to provide the

protection intended, seat belts must be worn

at all times.

The front airbag system includes gas genera-

tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-

tion sensors that activate the gas generators,

causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen

gas.

Location of the passenger's side front airbag

As the movement of the seats' occupants com-

presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel-

led at a controlled rate to provide better cush-

ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also

deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire

process, including inflation and deflation of the

airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec-

ond.

The location of the front airbags is indicated by

SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel

pad and above the glove compartment, and by

decals on both sun visors and on the front and

far right side of the dash.

The driver's side front airbag is folded and

located in the steering wheel hub.

The passenger's side front airbag is folded

behind a panel located above the glove com-

partment.

WARNING

•The airbags in the vehicle are designed

to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replace-

ment for–the three-point seat belts. For

maximum protection, wear seat belts at

all times. Be aware that no system can

prevent all possible injuries that may

occur in an accident.

•Never drive with your hands on the

steering wheel pad/airbag housing.

•The front airbags are designed to help

prevent serious injury. Deployment

occurs very quickly and with consider-

able force. During normal deployment

and depending on variables such as

seating position, one may experience

abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other

injuries as a result from deployment of

one or both of the airbags.

•When installing any accessory equip-

ment, make sure that the front airbag

system is not damaged. Any interfer-

ence in the system could cause mal-

function.

01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Front airbag deployment

•The front airbags are designed to deploy

during certain frontal or front-angular col-

lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend-

ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and

object impacted. The airbags may also

deploy in certain non-frontal collisions

where rapid deceleration occurs.

•The SRS sensors, which trigger the front

airbags, are designed to react to both the

impact of the collision and the inertial

forces generated by it, and to determine if

the intensity of the collision is sufficient for

the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags

to be deployed.

However, not all frontal collisions activate the

front airbags.

•If the collision involves a nonrigid object

(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed

object at a low speed, the front airbags will

not necessarily deploy.

•Front airbags do not normally deploy in a

side impact collision, in a collision from the

rear or in a rollover situation.

•The amount of damage to the bodywork

does not reliably indicate if the airbags

should have deployed or not.

WARNING

•Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches

(140 cm) in height who have outgrown

these devices sit in the rear seat with the

seat belt fastened1.

•Never drive with the airbags deployed.

The fact that they hang out can impair

the steering of your vehicle. Other

safety systems can also be damaged.

•The smoke and dust formed when the

airbags are deployed can cause skin

and eye irritation in the event of pro-

longed exposure.

Should you have questions about any compo-

nent in the SRS system, please contact a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician

or Volvo customer support:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.ca

1See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 26.

01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

NOTE

•Deployment of front airbags occurs only

one time during an accident. In a colli-

sion where deployment occurs, the air-

bags and seat belt pretensioners acti-

vate. Some noise occurs and a small

amount of powder is released. The

release of the powder may appear as

smoke-like matter. This is a normal

characteristic and does not indicate fire.

•Volvo's front airbags use special sen-

sors that are integrated with the front

seat buckles. The point at which the air-

bag deploys is determined by whether

or not the seat belt is being used, as well

as the severity of the collision.

•Collisions can occur where only one of

the airbags deploys. If the impact is less

severe, but severe enough to present a

clear injury risk, the airbags are trig-

gered at partial capacity. If the impact is

more severe, the airbags are triggered

at full capacity.

Airbag decals

G008335

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

Passenger's side airbag decal

WARNING

•Children must never be allowed in the

front passenger's seat.

•Occupants in the front passenger's seat

must never sit on the edge of the seat,

sit leaning toward the instrument panel

or otherwise sit out of position.

•The occupant's back must be as upright

as comfort allows and be against the

seat back with the seat belt properly

fastened.

•Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on

the dash, seat or out of the window.

01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

WARNING

•No objects or accessory equipment,

e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed

on, attached to, or installed near the air

bag hatch (the area above the glove

compartment) or the area affected by

airbag deployment (see the illustration

on page 22).

•There should be no loose articles, such

as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or

dashboard area.

•Never try to open the airbag cover on

the steering wheel or the passenger's

side dashboard. This should only be

done by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

•Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor

General information

G017724

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Disabling the passenger's side front

airbag

Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults

and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches

(140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any

vehicle with a front passenger side airbag, and

be properly restrained for their size and weight.

For child safety recommendations,see

page 38.

The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is

designed to meet the regulatory requirements

of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will

not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag

under certain conditions.

The OWS works with sensors that are part of

the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The

sensors are designed to detect the presence of

a properly seated occupant and determine if

the passenger's side front airbag should be

enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not

inflate).

The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-

senger's side front airbag when:

•the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,

or has small/medium objects in the front

seat,

•the system determines that an infant is

present in a rear-facing infant seat that is

installed according to the manufacturer's

instructions,

•the system determines that a small child is

present in a forward-facing child restraint

that is installed according to the manufac-

turer's instructions,

•the system determines that a small child is

present in a booster seat,

•a front passenger takes his/her weight off

of the seat for a period of time,

•a child or a small person occupies the front

passenger's seat.

The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on

to remind you that the passenger's side front

airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead

console, near the base of the rearview mirror.

NOTE

When the ignition is switched on, the OWS

indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds

while the system performs a self-diagnostic

test.

However, if a fault is detected in the system:

•The OWS indicator light will stay on

•The SRS warning light (see page 21) will

come on and stay on

•The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service

urgent will be displayed in the information

display.

WARNING

If a fault in the system is detected and indi-

cated as described, be aware that the pas-

senger's side front airbag will not deploy in

the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS

system and Occupant Weight Sensor

should be inspected by a trained and quali-

fied Volvo service technician as soon as

possible.

01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor

WARNING

•Never try to open, remove, or repair any

components in the OWS system. This

could result in system malfunction.

Maintenance or repairs should only be

carried out by an a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

•The front passenger's seat should not

be modified in any way. This could

reduce pressure on the seat cushion,

which might interfere with the OWS sys-

tem's function.

Passeng-

er's seat

occu-

pancy sta-

tus

OWS indi-

cator light

status

Passeng-

er's side

front air-

bag status

Seat unoc-

cupied

OWS indica-

tor light

lights up.

Passenger's

side front

airbag disa-

bled

Seat occu-

pied by low

weight

occupant/

objectA

OWS indica-

tor light

lights up

Passenger's

side front

airbag disa-

bled

Seat occu-

pied by

heavy occu-

pant/object

OWS indica-

tor light is

not lit

Passenger's

side front

airbag ena-

bled

AVolvo recommends that children always be properly

restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do

not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled

unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.

Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is

any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front air-

bag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)

the passenger's side front airbag in the event

of a collision anytime the system senses that a

person of adult size is sitting properly in the

front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIR-

BAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain

off.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front

passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR-

BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that

the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If

this happens:

•Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to

place the seatback in an upright position.

•Have the person sit upright in the seat,

centered on the seat cushion, with the per-

son's legs comfortably extended.

•Restart the vehicle and have the person

remain in this position for about two

minutes. This will allow the system to

detect that person and enable the pas-

senger's frontal airbag.

•If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator

lamp remains on even after this, the person

should be advised to ride in the rear seat.

This condition reflects limitations of the OWS

classification capability. It does not indicate

OWS malfunction.

Modifications

If you are considering modifying your vehicle in

any way to accommodate a disability, for

example by altering or adapting the driver's or

front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-

tems, please contact Volvo at:

01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario

M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

WARNING

•No objects that add to the total weight

on the seat should be placed on the

front passenger's seat. If a child is

seated in the front passenger's seat

with any additional weight, this extra

weight could cause the OWS system to

enable the airbag, which might cause it

to deploy in the event of a collision,

thereby injuring the child.

•The seat belt should never be wrapped

around an object on the front passeng-

er's seat. This could interfere with the

OWS system's function.

•The front passenger's seat belt should

never be used in a way that exerts more

pressure on the passenger than normal.

This could increase the pressure exer-

ted on the weight sensor by a child, and

could result in the airbag being enabled,

which might cause it to deploy in the

event of a collision, thereby injuring the

child.

WARNING

•Keep the following points in mind with

respect to the OWS system. Failure to

follow these instructions could

adversely affect the system's function

and result in serious injury to the occu-

pant of the front passenger's seat:

•The full weight of the front seat passen-

ger should always be on the seat cush-

ion. The passenger should never lift

him/herself off the seat cushion using

the armrest in the door or the center

console, by pressing the feet on the

floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat

cushion, or by pressing against the

backrest in a way that reduces pressure

on the seat cushion. This could cause

OWS to disable the front, passenger's

side airbag.

01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor

WARNING

•Do not place any type of object on the

front passenger's seat in such a way

that jamming, pressing, or squeezing

occurs between the object and the front

seat, other than as a direct result of the

correct use of the Automatic Locking

Retractor/Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 38).

•No objects should be placed under the

front passenger's seat. This could inter-

fere with the OWS system's function.

01 Safety

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

General information

G032949

Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front

seats only)

As an enhancement to the structural side

impact protection built into your vehicle, it is

also equipped with Side Impact Protection

System (SIPS) airbags.

The SIPS airbag system is designed to help

increase occupant protection in the event of

certain side impact collisions. The SIPS air-

bags are designed to deploy only during cer-

tain side-impact collisions, depending on the

crash severity, angle, speed and point of

impact.

G024377

Driver's side SIPS airbag

G024378

Passenger's side SIPS airbag

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs

only on the side of the vehicle affected by the

impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy

in all side impact situations.

NOTE

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs

only on the side of the vehicle affected by

the impact. The airbags are not designed to

deploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system

This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas gen-

erator, the side airbag modules built into the

outboard sides of both front seat backrests,

and electronic sensors/wiring.

01 Safety

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

WARNING

•The SIPS airbag system is a supple-

ment to the structural Side Impact Pro-

tection System and the three-point seat

belt system. It is not designed to deploy

during collisions from the front or rear of

the vehicle or in rollover situations.

•The use of seat covers on the front seats

may impede SIPS airbag deployment.

•No objects, accessory equipment or

stickers may be placed on, attached to

or installed near the SIPS airbag system

or in the area affected by SIPS airbag

deployment.

•Never try to open or repair any compo-

nents of the SIPS airbag system. This

should be done only by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•In order for the SIPS airbag to provide

its best protection, both front seat

occupants should sit in an upright posi-

tion with the seat belt properly fastened.

•Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury to the occupants of the

vehicle in the event of an accident.

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC)

General information

This system consists of inflatable curtains

located along the sides of the roof liners,

stretching from the center of both front side

windows to the rear edge of the rear side door

windows. It is designed to help protect the

heads of the occupants of the front seats and

the occupant of the outboard rear seating posi-

tions in certain side impact collisions.

In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur-

tain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag System

(SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS

airbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE

If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains

inflated for approximately 3 seconds.

WARNING

•The IC system is a supplement to the

Side Impact Protection System. It is not

designed to deploy during collisions

from the rear of the vehicle.

•Never try to open or repair any compo-

nents of the IC system. This should be

done only by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

•Never hang heavy items from the ceiling

handles. This could impede deployment

of the Inflatable Curtain.

•The cargo area and rear seat should not

be loaded to a level higher than 2 in.

(5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear

side windows. Objects placed higher

than this level could impede the func-

tion of the Inflatable Curtain.

WARNING

In order for the IC to provide its best pro-

tection, both front seat occupants and both

outboard rear seat occupants should sit in

an upright position with the seat belt prop-

erly fastened; adults using the seat belt and

children using the proper child restraint sys-

tem. Only adults should sit in the front seats.

Children must never be allowed in the front

passenger seat, see page 38 for guide-

lines. Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an

accident.

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS

General information

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) –

front seats only

The WHIPS system consists of specially

designed hinges and brackets on the front seat

backrests designed to help absorb some of the

energy generated in a collision from the rear

(when the vehicle is rear-ended).

In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges

and brackets of the front seat backrests are

designed to change position slightly to allow

the backrest/head restraint to help support the

occupant's head before moving slightly rear-

ward. This movement helps absorb some of

the forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING

•The WHIPS system is designed to sup-

plement the other safety systems in

your vehicle. For this system to function

properly, the three-point seat belt must

be worn. Please be aware that no sys-

tem can prevent all possible injuries that

may occur in an accident.

•The WHIPS system is designed to func-

tion in certain collisions from the rear,

depending on the crash severity, angle

and speed.

WARNING

•Occupants in the front seats must never

sit out of position. The occupant's back

must be as upright as comfort allows

and be against the seat back with the

seat belt properly fastened.

•If your vehicle has been involved in a

rear-end collision, the front seat back-

rests must be inspected by a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician,

even if the seats appear to be undam-

aged. Certain components in the

WHIPS system may need to be

replaced.

•Do not attempt to service any compo-

nent in the WHIPS system yourself.

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS

WARNING

•Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind

the front seats could impede the func-

tion of the WHIPS system.

•If the rear seat backrests are folded

down, cargo must be secured to pre-

vent it from sliding forward against the

front seat backrests in the event of a

collision from the rear. This could inter-

fere with the action of the WHIPS sys-

tem.

WARNING

Any contact between the front seat back-

rests and the folded rear seat or a rear-fac-

ing child seat could impede the function of

the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded

down, the occupied front seats must be

adjusted forward so that they do not touch

the folded rear seat.

01 Safety

Rollover Protection System (ROPS)

Volvo’s Rollover Protection System utilizes the

Roll Stability Control (RSC) function, which is

designed to help minimize the risk of a rollover

in emergency maneuvers or if a skid should

occur.

RSC uses a gyroscopic sensor that registers

the amount of change in the lateral angle at

which the vehicle is leaning. Using this infor-

mation, RSC calculates the likelihood of a roll-

over. If there is an imminent risk of a rollover,

the Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys-

tem (DSTC) is activated, power to the engine is

cut and the brakes are applied to one or more

of the wheels until the vehicle regains stability.

For additional information on DSTC, see

page 134.

WARNING

The vehicle’s stability systems, including

ROPS and RSC, do not replace the driver’s

responsibility for operating the vehicle in a

safe manner. Speed and driving style

should always be adapted to the current

road, traffic and weather conditions. Posted

speed limits should always be respected.

01 Safety

Crash mode

Driving after a collision

If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,

the text Safety mode See manual may

appear in the information display. This indi-

cates that the vehicle's functionality has been

reduced.

NOTE

This text can only be shown if the display is

undamaged and the vehicle's electrical sys-

tem is intact.

Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one

or more of the safety systems (e.g. front or side

airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of

the seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. The

collision may have damaged an important

function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines,

sensors for one of the safety systems, the

brake system, etc.

WARNING

•Never attempt to repair the vehicle

yourself or to reset the electrical system

after the vehicle has displayed Safety

mode See manual. This could result in

injury or improper system function.

•Restoring the vehicle to normal operat-

ing status should only be done by a

trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

•After Safety mode See manual has

been displayed, if you detect the odor

of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel

leakage, do not attempt to start the

vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.

Attempting to start the vehicle

If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is

no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the

vehicle. To do so:

1. Remove the remote key from the ignition

slot and open the driver's door. If a mes-

sage is displayed that the ignition is on,

press the start button.

2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the

remote key in the ignition slot.

3. Try to start the vehicle.

If the message Safety mode See manual is

still displayed, the vehicle should not be driven

and must be towed. Concealed faults may

make the vehicle difficult to control.

Moving the vehicle

If the message Normal mode is displayed

when Safety mode See manual is no longer

displayed, the vehicle may be moved carefully

from its present position, if for example, it is

blocking traffic. It should, however, not be

moved farther than is absolutely necessary.

WARNING

Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable

after Safety mode has been set, it should

not be driven or towed (pulled by another

vehicle). There may be concealed damage

that could make it difficult or impossible to

control. The vehicle should be transported

on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali-

fied Volvo service technician for inspection/

repairs.

01 Safety

Child safety

Children should be seated safely

Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint

systems for all occupants including children.

Remember that, regardless of age and size, a

child should always be properly restrained in a

vehicle.

Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/

LATCH attachments, which make it more con-

venient to install child seats.

Some restraint systems for children are

designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap

belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.

Such child restraint systems can help protect

children in vehicles in the event of an accident

only if they are used properly. However, chil-

dren could be endangered in a crash if the child

restraints are not properly secured in the vehi-

cle. Failure to follow the installation instructions

for your child restraint can result in your child

striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.

Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable

substitute for a child restraint system. In an

accident, a child held in a person's arms can

be crushed between the vehicle's interior and

an unrestrained person. The child could also be

injured by striking the interior, or by being ejec-

ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver

or impact. The same can also happen if the

infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat.

Other occupants should also be properly

restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring

or increasing the injury of a child.

All states and provinces have legislation gov-

erning how and where children should be car-

ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist-

ing in your state or province. Recent accident

statistics have shown that children are safer in

rear seating positions than front seating posi-

tions when properly restrained. A child restraint

system can help protect a child in a vehicle.

Here's what to look for when selecting a child

restraint system:

It should have a label certifying that it meets

applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada,

CMVSS 213.

Make sure the child restraint system is

approved for the child's height, weight and

development – the label required by the stand-

ard or regulation, or instructions for infant

restraints, typically provide this information.

In using any child restraint system, we urge you

to carefully look over the instructions that are

provided with the restraint. Be sure you under-

stand them and can use the device properly

and safely in this vehicle. A misused child

restraint system can result in increased injuries

for both the infant or child and other occupants

in the vehicle.

When a child has outgrown the child safety

seat, you should use the rear seat with the

standard seat belt fastened. The best way to

help protect the child here is to place the child

on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly

located on the hips (see the illustration on page

46). Legislation in your state or province may

mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in

combination with the seat belt, depending on

the child's age and/or size. Please check local

regulations.

A specially designed and tested booster cush-

ion and backrest can be obtained from your

Volvo retailer.

USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs.

(15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm)

in height

Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.

(18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm)

in height

01 Safety

Child safety

WARNING

•Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that children under 4 feet 7 inches

(140 cm) in height who have outgrown

these devices sit in the rear seat with the

seat belt fastened.

•On hot days, the temperature in the

vehicle interior can rise very quickly.

Exposure to these high temperatures

for even a short period of time can

cause heat-related injury or death.

Small children are particularly at risk.

Child seat should always be registered. See

page 39 for more information.

Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/

ELR)

To make child seat installation easier, each

seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-

ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the

seat belt taut.

When attaching the seat belt to a child

seat:

1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat

according to the child seat manufacturer's

instructions.

2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.

3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the

buckle (lock) in the usual way.

4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around

the child seat.

A sound from the seat belt retractor will be

audible at this time and is normal. The belt will

now be locked in place. This function is auto-

matically disabled when the seat belt is

unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.

WARNING

Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend that

children who have outgrown these devices

sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly

fastened.

Volvo's recommendations

Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit

in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really.

A front airbag is a very powerful device

designed, by law, to help protect an adult.

Because of the size of the airbag and its speed

of inflation, a child should never be placed in

the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel-

ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo

has been an innovator in safety for over sev-

enty-five years, and we'll continue to do our

part. But we need your help. Please remember

to put your children in the back seat, and

buckle them up.

Volvo has some very specific

recommendations:

•Always wear your seat belt.

•Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety

device which, when used with a three-

point seat belt can help reduce serious

injuries during certain types of accidents.

Volvo recommends that you do not dis-

connect the airbag system in your vehicle.

•Volvo strongly recommends that everyone

in the vehicle be properly restrained.

•Volvo recommends that ALL occupants

(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet

7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back

01 Safety

Child safety

seat of any vehicle with a front passenger

side airbag.

•Drive safely!

Child restraint registration and recalls

Registering a child restraint

Child restraints could be recalled for safety

reasons. You must register your child restraint

to be reached in a recall. To stay informed

about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out

and return the registration card that comes

with new child restraints.

Child restraint recall information is readily avail-

able in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall

information in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern-

ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.

In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child

Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

01 Safety

Child restraint systems

Child restraints

G022840

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraint

systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and

booster cushions. They are classified accord-

ing to the child's age and size.

The following section provides general infor-

mation on securing a child restraint using a

three-point seat belt. Refer to page 47–48

for information on securing a child restraint

using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top

tether anchorages.

G022847

Convertible seat

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag – not even if the

"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the

rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles

equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If

the severity of an accident were to cause the

airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious

injury or death to a child seated in this posi-

tion.

G023269

Booster cushion

WARNING

Always refer to the child restraint manufac-

turer's instructions for detailed information

on securing the restraint.

01 Safety

Child restraint systems

WARNING

•When not in use, keep the child restraint

system secured or remove it from the

passenger compartment to help pre-

vent it from injuring passengers in the

event of a sudden stop or collision.

•A small child's head represents a con-

siderable part of its total weight and its

neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-

mends that children up to age 4 travel,

properly restrained, facing rearward. In

addition, Volvo recommends that chil-

dren should ride rearward facing, prop-

erly restrained, as long as possible.

01 Safety

Infant seats

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt

G022844

Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng-

er's seat

NOTE

Refer to page 47–48 for information on

securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/

LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether

anchorages.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the

vehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat

according to the manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

G023270

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat

WARNING

•An infant seat must be in the rear-facing

position only.

•The infant seat should not be positioned

behind the driver's seat unless there is

adequate space for safe installation.

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag – not even if the

"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the

rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles

equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If

the severity of an accident were to cause the

airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious

injury or death to a child seated in this posi-

tion.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

G023271

Fasten the seat belt

01 Safety

Infant seats

G022846

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt

out as far as possible to activate the belt's

automatic locking function.

NOTE

The locking retractor will automatically

release when the seat belt is unbuckled and

allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the

seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound

from the seat belt retractor's automatic

locking function will be audible at this time

and is normal. The seat belt should now be

locked in place.

G022850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat

belt path to ensure that it is held securely

in place by the seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the child

restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)

in any direction along the seat belt path.

The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling

the seat belt and letting it retract completely.

01 Safety

Convertible seats

Securing a convertible seat with a seat

belt

G018630

Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas-

senger's seat

NOTE

Refer to pages 47 and 48 for information

on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/

LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether

anchorages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for-

ward or rearward-facing position, depending

on the age and size of the child.

G022847

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

WARNING

Always use a convertible seat that is suita-

ble for the child's age and size. See the con-

vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda-

tions.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat

of the vehicle.

WARNING

•A small child's head represents a con-

siderable part of its total weight and its

neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-

mends that children up to age 4 travel,

properly restrained, facing rearward. In

addition, Volvo recommends that chil-

dren should ride rearward facing, prop-

erly restrained, as long as possible.

•Convertible child seats should be instal-

led in the rear seat only.

•A rear-facing convertible seat should not

be positioned behind the driver's seat

unless there is adequate space for safe

installation.

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat

according to the manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

01 Safety

Convertible seats

G022848

Fasten the seat belt

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt

out as far as possible to activate the belt's

automatic locking function.

NOTE

The locking retractor will automatically

release when the seat belt is unbuckled and

allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,

let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A

sound from the seat belt retractor's auto-

matic locking function will be audible at this

time and is normal. The seat belt should

now be locked in place.

G022849

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

6. Push and pull the convertible seat along

the seat belt path to ensure that it is held

securely in place by the seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the child

restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)

in any direction along the seat belt path.

The convertible seat can be removed by

unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract

completely.

G022850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag – not even if the

"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the

rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity

of an accident were to cause the airbag to

inflate, this could lead to serious injury or

death to a child seated in this position.

01 Safety

Booster cushions

Securing a booster cushion

G022851

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion

Booster cushions are recommended for chil-

dren who have outgrown convertible seats.

1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat

of the vehicle.

2. With the child properly seated on the

booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or

around the cushion according to the man-

ufacturer's instructions.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

G022852

Positioning the seat belt

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and

fits snugly around the child.

WARNING

•The hip section of the three-point seat

belt must fit snugly across the child's

hips, not across the stomach.

•The shoulder section of the three-point

seat belt should be positioned across

the chest and shoulder.

•The shoulder belt must never be placed

behind the child's back or under the

arm.

01 Safety

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child

seat anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped

child seats are located in the rear, outboard

seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.

Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the

anchor positions as shown. To access the

anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate

the anchors by feel. Always follow your child

seat manufacturer's installation instructions,

and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

and top tethers whenever possible.

To access the anchors

1. Put the child restraint in position.

2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down

the seat cushion and locate the anchors by

feel.

3. Fasten the attachment on the child

restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/

LATCH/LATCH lower anchors.

4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps

according to the manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

WARNING

Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to

FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to

the child restraint system's manual for

weight and size ratings.

NOTE

•The rear seat's center position is not

equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower

anchors. When installing a child

restraint in this position, attach the

restraint's top tether strap (if it is so

equipped) to the top tether anchorage

point and secure the restraint with the

vehicle's center seat belt.

•Always follow your child seat manufac-

turer's installation instructions, and use

both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and

top tethers whenever possible.

G018631

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/

LATCH lower anchors

WARNING

•Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-

rectly to the anchor (see the illustration).

If the attachment is not correctly fas-

tened, the child restraint may not be

properly secured in the event of a colli-

sion.

•The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint

anchors are only intended for use with

child seats positioned in the outboard

seating positions. These anchors are

not certified for use with any child

restraint that is positioned in the center

seating position. When securing a child

restraint in the center seating position,

use only the vehicle's center seat belt.

01 Safety

Top tether anchors

Child restraint anchorages

Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top

tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are

located on the rear side of the backrests.

Securing a child seat

1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.

2. Route the top tether strap under the head

restraint and attach it to the anchor.

3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISO-

FIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is

not equipped with lower tether straps, or

the restraint is used in the center seating

position, follow instructions for securing a

child restraint using the Automatic Locking

Retractor seat belt (see page 38).

4. Firmly tension all straps.

Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's

instructions for information on securing the

child seat.

NOTE

On models equipped with the optional

cargo area cover, this cover should be

removed before a child seat is attached to

the child restraint anchors.

WARNING

•Never route a top tether strap over the

top of the head restraint. The strap

should be routed beneath the head

restraint.

•Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly fitted child restraints. Under

no circumstances are they to be used

for adult seat belts or harnesses. The

anchorages are not able to withstand

excessive forces on them in the event of

collision if full harness seat belts or adult

seat belts are installed to them. An adult

who uses a belt anchored in a child

restraint anchorage runs a great risk of

suffering severe injuries should a colli-

sion occur.

•Do not install rear speakers that require

the removal of the top tether anchors or

interfere with the proper use of the top

tether strap.

01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49

Integrated two-stage booster

cushion*1

Volvo's optional integrated booster cushions

are located in the outboard seating positions.

These booster cushions have been specially

designed to help safeguard children in the rear

seat. They should be stowed (folded down into

the seat cushion) when not in use. When using

an integrated booster cushion, the child must

be secured with the vehicle's three-point seat

belt.

Use these booster cushions only with

children whose weight is between:

•Stage 1: 48 – 80 lbs (22 – 36 kg)

•Stage 2: 33 – 55 lbs (15 – 25 kg)

and whose height is between:

•Stage 1: 45 – 55 in. (115 – 140 cm)

•Stage 2: 37 – 47 in. (95 – 120 cm)

In Canada, Transport Canada's

weight recommendation is 40 – 80 lbs

(18 – 36 kg).

The booster cushions are designed to raise the

child higher, so that the shoulder strap crosses

over the child's collarbone, not over the child's

neck. If using a booster cushion does not result

in proper positioning of the shoulder strap,

then the child should be placed in a properly

secured child restraint (see page 40). The

shoulder belt must never be placed behind the

child's back or under the arm.

Correct seating position: child's head is below the

head restraint and the shoulder belt is across the

collarbone

Incorrect seating position: the child's head is

above the head restraint and the shoulder belt is

not across the collarbone

Before driving, check that:

•The integrated two-stage booster cushion

is set in the correct position according to

the child's height and weight (see the table

below) and is locked in position.

Stage 1 Stage 2

Weight 48 – 80 lbs

22 – 36 kg

33 – 55 lbs

15 – 25 kg

Height 45 – 55 in.

115 – 140 cm

37 – 47 in.

95 – 120 cm

1Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.

01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion

•That the seat belt is properly positioned

and is taut.

•The shoulder section of the seat belt is

across the child's collarbone, not over the

neck.

•The lap section of the seat belt is across

the child's hips and not the abdomen.

Using an integrated booster cushion

Stage 1

Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2)

to release the booster cushion.

Press the booster cushion rearward to lock

it in position.

Stage 2

With the booster cushion in the stage 1

position, press the button (see the arrow in

illustration 1).

Lift the front edge of the booster cushion

and press it rearward toward the backrest

to lock it in position.

01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion

Stowing the two-stage integrated

booster cushion

The booster cushion can be folded down com-

pletely (stowed) from either the stage 1 or stage

2 positions.

NOTE

The booster cushion cannot be moved from

the stage 2 (upper) position to the stage 1

(lower) position. It must first be folded down

completely to the stowed position, and then

adjusted to stage 1.

Pull the handle forward to release the

booster cushion.

Press down on the center of the booster

cushion to return it to the stowed position.

NOTE

The booster cushion must be in the stowed

position before the rear seat backrests are

folded down.

CAUTION

Be sure there are no loose objects under the

booster cushion before it is stowed.

WARNING

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can

occur

Follow all instructions on the

booster cushion and in the vehi-

cle's owner's manual.

MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER

CUSHION IS SECURELY

LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS

SEATED.

•Use this booster cushion only with chil-

dren whose height and weight are

within the permitted limits shown in the

table (see page 49).

•In the event of a collision while the inte-

grated booster cushion was occupied,

the entire booster cushion and seat belt

must be replaced. The booster cushion

should also be replaced if it is badly

worn or damaged in any way. This work

should be performed by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician only.

01 Safety

Child safety locks

G021077

Child safety locks – rear doors

The controls are located on the rear door

jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or a

screwdriver to adjust these controls.

The rear doors can only be opened from

the outside when the slot is in the horizon-

tal position.

The rear doors can be opened from the

inside when the slot is in the vertical posi-

tion.

01 Safety

Remote key and key blade..................................................................... 56

Keyless drive........................................................................................... 64

Locks....................................................................................................... 67

Alarm....................................................................................................... 70

LOCKS AND ALARM

02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Introduction

Two remote keys or optional Personal Car

Communicators (PCC) are provided with your

vehicle. They enable you to unlock the doors

and tailgate, and also function as ignition keys

to start the vehicle or operate electrical com-

ponents. The remote keys contain detachable

metal key blades for manually locking or

unlocking the driver's door and the glove com-

partment. The visible ends of these key blades

are unique to make it easier to identify "your"

remote key. Up to six remotes can be pro-

grammed for use on the same vehicle.

The PCCs have enhanced functionality com-

pared with the standard remote key.

NOTE

In the remainder of this chapter, all referen-

ces to the remote key also pertain to the

PCC unless otherwise stated.

WARNING

Never leave the remote key in the ignition

slot if children are to remain in the vehicle.

See page 84 for more information on the var-

ious ignition modes.

Detachable key blade

Each remote key or PCC contains a detachable

metal key blade for mechanically locking or

unlocking the driver's door and the glove com-

partment. See page 61 for more information

on the key blade. The key blades have a unique

code, which is used if new ones need to be

produced. This code is available at an author-

ized Volvo retailer.

The visible ends of these key blades are unique

to make it easier to identify "your" remote key.

Loss of a remote key

If either of the remote keys is lost, the other

should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer.

As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost

remote key must be erased from the system.

NOTE

Additional or duplicate remote control keys

can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo

Retailer.

You can also obtain additional or duplicate

remote control keys from certain independ-

ent repair facilities and locksmiths that are

qualified to make remote control keys. Each

key must be programmed to work with your

vehicle.

California Only:

A list of independent repair facilities and/or

locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and

code replacement keys can be found:

•on the Volvo website at

http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys

•by calling Volvo Customer Care at

1-800-458-1552

The number of registered keys for the vehicle

can be found by pressing MY CAR and going

into Information Number of keys. See

page 191 for a description of the menu sys-

tem.

USA-5WK49264

FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO

5WK49236

FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266

02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57

FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO

5WK49233

FCC ID:KR55WK49233

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the

following conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Canada-5WK49264

IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO

5WK49236

IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266

IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO

5WK49233

IC:267T-5WK49233

Operation is subject to the following condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

Key memory: door mirrors and driver's

seat

The position of the side door mirrors and power

driver's seat* are stored in the remote keys

when the vehicle is locked. The next time the

driver's door is unlocked with the same remote

key and the door is opened within 2 minutes,

the power driver's seat and side door mirrors

will automatically move to the position that they

were in when the doors were most recently

locked with the same remote key. If the seat/

mirrors have not been readjusted since the

vehicle was locked, they will already be in the

position stored in that particular remote key

and will not move. See page 87 for more

information. See also page 88 for more infor-

mation on this feature.

This feature can be activated or deactivated in

the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CAR and

going into Settings Car settings Car

key memory. See page 191 for a description

of the menu system.

See also page 64 for information regarding

vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

Confirmation when locking/unlocking

the vehicle

Settings can be made in the menu system for

audible and visual confirmation when the vehi-

cle has been locked or unlocked. With these

functions activated, the following will occur

when the vehicle is locked/unlocked:

Locking confirmation

•The turn signals flash once, an audible sig-

nal sounds and the door mirrors will fold*

in.

Confirmation will only be given when all doors

and the tailgate are properly closed and

locked.

NOTE

If you do not receive confirmation when

locking the vehicle, check whether a door or

the tailgate is ajar, or if this feature has been

turned off in the menu.

Unlocking confirmation

•The turn signals will flash twice and the

door mirrors will fold* out.

Making a setting

Different alternatives for locking/unlocking

confirmation can be selected in the menus by

pressing MY CAR on the center console con-

trol panel.

•To activate visual confirmation: go to

Settings Car settings Light

settings and select Door lock

confirmation light and/or Unlock

confirmation light by pressing OK/

MENU.

•To activate audible confirmation: go to

Settings Car settings Lock

settings and select Audible

confirmation by pressing OK/MENU.

See page 191 for a description of the menu

system.

02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)

Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle

contains a coded transponder. The code in the

key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition

slot where it is compared to the code stored in

the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start

only with a properly coded key. If you misplace

a key, take the other keys to a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician for reprog-

ramming as an anti-theft measure. The follow-

ing messages (which may appear in the instru-

ment panel display) are related to the immobil-

izer:

Message Meaning

Insert car key Remote key not rec-

ognized during start.

Try to start the vehi-

cle again.

Car key not found PCC with keyless

drive only. Remote

key not recognized

during start. Try to

start the vehicle

again.

If the problem con-

tinues, insert the

remote key into the

ignition slot and try

to start the vehicle

again.

Immobilizer Try

start again

Remote key fault

during start. Contact

an authorized Volvo

workshop.

CAUTION

Never use force when inserting the remote

key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot

be started if the transponder is damaged.

USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following con-

dition: (1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO

Operation is subject to the following condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

See page 116 for information on starting the

vehicle.

Replacing the battery in the remote key

The batteries should be replaced if:

•The information symbol illuminates and

Low battery in remote control. Please

change batteries. is shown in the display

and/or

•if the locks do not react after several

attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.

NOTE

The remote key's range is normally approx-

imately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle.

See page 62 for information about replacing

the battery.

02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59

Remote key/Personal Car

Communicator (PCC) - common

functions*

Standard remote key

Lock

Unlock

Approach lighting

Tailgate unlock

Panic alarm

Personal Car Communicator (PCC)*

Lock

Unlock

Approach lighting

Tailgate unlock

Panic alarm

Buttons on the remote

Lock – Press the Lock button on the

remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate.

The turn signals will flash once to confirm lock-

ing.

Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the

remote once to unlock the driver's door.

After a short pause, press the Unlock button a

second time within 10 seconds to unlock the

other doors and the tailgate.

This function can be changed so that all doors

unlock at the same time by pressing My Car

and going to Settings Car settings

Lock settings Change doors unlock

setting. See page 191 for a description of the

menu system.

Approach lighting – As you approach the

vehicle, press the button on the remote key to

light the interior lighting, parking lights, license

plate lighting and the lights in the door mir-

rors*.

These lights will switch off automatically after

30, 60 or 90 seconds. See page 191 for a

description of the menu system.

Unlock tailgate – Press the button twice

within several seconds to disarm the alarm

system and optional movement sensor (the

alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go

out), and unlock only the tailgate. Pressing this

button for several seconds also opens the tail-

gate on models equipped with the optional

power tailgate.

02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

As an added safety precaution, the parking

lights will come on automatically for a short

period when the tailgate has been opened.

After closing, the tailgate will not automatically

relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the

alarm.

See also the section "Unlocking the tailgate

from the passenger compartment."

Panic alarm – This button can be used to

attract attention during emergency situations.

To activate the panic alarm, press and hold this

button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice

within 3 seconds. The turn signals and horn will

be activated. The panic alarm will stop auto-

matically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.

To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds

and press the button again.

The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehi-

cle.

Range

The remote key has a range of approximately

60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.

NOTE

Buildings or other obstacles may interfere

with the function of the remote key. The

vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with

the key blade, see page 61.

If the remote key is removed from the vehicle

while the engine is running or if the ignition is

in mode I or II and all of the doors are closed,

a message will appear in the instrument panel

display and there will be an audible signal.

When the remote key is returned to the vehicle,

the message will be erased and the audible

signal will stop after one of the following has

been done:

•The remote key is inserted in the ignition

slot

•The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph

(30 km/h)

•The OK button on the left steering wheel

lever is pressed

Unique functions—PCC*

Information button

Indicator lights

Pressing the information button provides cer-

tain information about the vehicle with the help

of the indicator lights.

Using the information button

1. Press the information button .

2. All of the indicator lights will flash sequen-

tially for approximately 7 seconds to indi-

cate that the PCC is receiving information

from the vehicle. If any of the buttons are

pressed during this 7-second period,

transmission of information to the PCC will

be interrupted.

02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

NOTE

If none of the indicator lights flash when the

information button has been pressed sev-

eral times from different places in relation to

the vehicle, contact an authorized Volvo

service technician.

The indicator lights provide information

according to the illustration:

Steady green light: the vehicle is correctly

locked.

Steady yellow light: the vehicle is not

locked.

Steady red light: the alarm has been trig-

gered since the vehicle was most recently

locked.

Both red lights flash alternatively: the alarm

was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.

Range

The PCC's lock and unlock functions have a

range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the

vehicle.

NOTE

•The approach lighting, panic alarm, and

the functions controlled by the informa-

tion button have a range of approxi-

mately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle.

•Radio waves, buildings or other obsta-

cles may interfere with the function of

the PCC.

If the vehicle does not provide confirmation

when a button has been pressed, try moving

closer and pressing the button again.

Outside of the PCC´s range

If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft

(100 m) from the vehicle when the information

button is pressed, no new information will be

received. The PCC most recently used to lock

or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle's

most recently received status. The indicator

lights will not flash when the information button

is pressed while the PCC is out of range.

If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlock

the vehicle, only the one used most recently will

show the correct locking status.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lights illuminate when

the information button is pressed, this may

be because the most recent transmission

between the vehicle and the PCC was inter-

rupted or impeded by buildings or other

objects.

Keyless drive

Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal

Car Communicator have the keyless drive

function, see page 64 for detailed informa-

tion.

Detachable key blade

The key blade can be removed from the remote

key. When removed, the key blade can be used

to:

•Lock/unlock the driver's door if the remote

key is not functioning properly

•Lock/unlock the glove compartment (see

page 68)

•Override the transmission's shiftlock sys-

tem (see page 123)

•Block access to the glove compartment

02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Removing the key blade

Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.

Pull the key blade straight out of the remote

key.

Reinserting the key blade in the remote

key

1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the

key blade up.

2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.

3. Gently press the key blade in the groove

until it clicks into place.

Unlocking the doors with the detached

key blade

Insert the key blade as far as possible in the

driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clock-

wise approximately one-quarter turn to unlock

the driver's door only.

NOTE

After unlocking the driver's door with the

key blade, opening the door will trigger the

alarm.

To disable the alarm:

Insert the remote key in the ignition slot. This

also applies to vehicles equipped with the

optional keyless drive.

Replacing batteries in the remote key/

PCC

The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCC

should be replaced if:

•The information symbol lights up and a text

appears in the information display.

and/or

•the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not react

when a button on the remote key/PCC is

pressed within approximately 60 ft (20 m)

from the vehicle.

Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in the

remote key, two batteries in the PCC)

02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Opening the remote key/PCC

Slide the spring loaded catch to the

side.

Pull the key blade straight out of the

remote key.

Insert a small screwdriver in the hole

behind the spring loaded catch and care-

fully pry up the cover.

NOTE

Turn the remote key with the buttons

upward so that the batteries do not fall out

when the cover is removed.

Replacing the batteries

CAUTION

When handling batteries, avoid touching

their contact surfaces as this could result in

poor battery function in the remote key.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–)

sides.

Remote key (one battery)

1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat-

tery.

2. Insert a new one with the (+) side down-

ward.

PCC (two batteries)

1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat-

teries.

2. Insert the first new battery with the (+) side

upward.

3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery.

Insert the second new battery on top of the

plastic spacer, with the + side downward.

Re-assembling the remote key

1. Press the remote key's cover into place.

2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the

key blade up.

3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.

4. Gently press the key blade in the groove

until it clicks into place.

Old batteries should be properly recycled.

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless drive* (models with Personal

Car Communicator only)

Keyless locking and unlocking

Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft

(1.5 meters)

This system makes it possible to unlock and

lock the vehicle without having to press any

buttons on the Personal Car Communicators

(PCC). It is only necessary to have a keyless

drive remote key in your possession to operate

the central locking system.

NOTE

•The gear selector must in the P position

before the vehicle can be locked and

the alarm can be armed.

•The buttons on the keyless drive remote

key can also be used to lock and unlock

the vehicle, see page 59 for more infor-

mation.

Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle

have the keyless function, and additional ones

can be ordered. The system can accommo-

date up to six PCCs.

The red rings in the illustration indicate the area

around the vehicle that is within range of the

keyless drive antennas.

Unlocking the vehicle

•A keyless drive remote key must be on the

same side of the vehicle as the door to be

opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters)

of the door's lock or the tailgate (see the

shaded areas in the illustration).

•Pull a door handle to unlock and open the

door or pull the tailgate opening control.

The number of doors that are unlocked at the

same time can be set in the vehicle's menu

system. Press MY CAR and go to Car settings

Lock settings Keyless entry. See page

191 for a description of the menu system.

Unlocking the vehicle with the key blade

Keyless drive keyhole cover

If the PCC does not function normally (weak

battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked with

the detachable key blade. See page 62 for

instructions on detaching the key blade from

the PCC. To access the keyhole in the driver's

door:

1. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm)

straight up in the hole on the underside of

the keyhole cover.

> The cover will come off due to the pres-

sure exerted when the key blade is

pushed upward.

2. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the

driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to

unlock the driver's door only. This will trig-

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

ger the alarm. Press the remote key into the

ignition slot to turn off the alarm.

3. Press the cover back into place after the

door has been unlocked.

Locking the vehicle

Models with keyless drive have a button on the

outside door handles

The doors and the tailgate can be locked by

pressing the lock button in any of the outside

door handles.

NOTE

On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector

must be in the Park (P) position, all doors

and the tailgate must be closed and the igni-

tion must be switched off before the vehicle

can be locked.

Keyless drive remote key and driver's

seat/door mirror memory

•When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in

your possession and lock any door, the

position of the driver's seat and door mir-

rors will be stored in the seat's memory.

•The next time a door is opened by a person

with the same PCC in his/her possession,

the driver's seat and door mirrors will auto-

matically move to the position that they

were in when the door was most recently

locked.

NOTE

If several people carrying PCCs approach

the vehicle at the same time, the driver's

seat and door mirrors will assume the posi-

tions they were in for the person who opens

the driver's door.

See also page 87 for information on adjusting

and storing the seat's position in the seat mem-

ory.

Keyless drive information messages

If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehicle

while the engine is running or if the ignition is

in mode II (see page 84) and all of the doors

are closed, a message will appear in the instru-

ment panel display and an audible signal will

sound.

When at least one PCC has been returned to

the car, the message will be erased in the dis-

play and the audible signal will stop when:

•A door has been opened and closed

•The PCC has been inserted in the ignition

slot

•The OK button (see page 189 for the loca-

tion of this button) has been pressed.

CAUTION

•Keyless drive remote keys should never

be left in the vehicle. In the event of a

break-in, a remote found in the vehicle

could make it possible to start the

engine.

•Electromagnetic fields or metal

obstructions can interfere with the key-

less drive system. The remote key

should never be placed closer than

approximately 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) to cell

phones, metallic objects or e.g., stored

in a metal briefcase.

USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device must

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

accept interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer could void the

user's authority to operate the equipment.

Siemens VDO

5WK48891

Tested To Comply With FCC Standards

For Automobile Use

Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952,

267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891

NOTE

This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device must

accept interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer could void the

user's authority to operate the equipment.

Location of the keyless drive antennas

The keyless drive system has a number of

antennas located at various points in the vehi-

cle.

On the tailgate, near the wiper motor

Left rear door handle

Under the floor of the cargo area, near the

rear seat

Right rear door handle

Under the rear section of the center con-

sole

Under the front section of the center con-

sole

WARNING

People with implanted pacemakers should

not allow the pacemaker to come closer

than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless

drive system's antennas. This is to help pre-

vent interference between the pacemaker

and the keyless drive system.

02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

From outside the vehicle

The remote key locks and unlocks all of the

doors and the tailgate.

Before the vehicle can be locked from the out-

side with the remote key, the driver's door must

be closed. Any other door/tailgate that is open

will be locked and the alarm will be armed.

NOTE

Be sure the remote key is outside of the

vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are

closed to help avoid locking the remote

inside the vehicle.

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional key-

less drive system, all doors/tailgate must be

closed before the vehicle can be locked.

The first press on the unlock button unlocks the

driver's door and a second press unlocks the

other doors and the tailgate (see also page 59).

This setting can be changed in the menu sys-

tem. See page 191 for a description.

If the locks repeatedly do not react when the

unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary

to replace the batteries in the remote, see

page 58. In this case the vehicle can be

unlocked with the detachable key blade. See

page 62.

From inside the vehicle (central locking

button)

Central locking button

The lock buttons on the door panel can be used

to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at

the same time. Press to lock and to

unlock.

Unlocking

The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the

vehicle in two ways:

•By pressing the unlock button .

•The door can be unlocked by pulling the

door handle once and opened by pulling

the handle again.

Locking

•Press the lock button after the front

doors have been closed.

•Each door can be locked individually with

the lock button on the respective doors.

The door must be closed first.

Alternative locking when parking

The central locking button on the driver's door

can also be used to lock the vehicle when you

leave it. To do so:

1. Open the door.

2. Press the lock section of the button.

3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle

completely and arm the alarm.

NOTE

Please be aware that locking the vehicle in

this way makes it possible to lock the

remote key in the passenger compartment.

To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from the

outside by pressing the lock button on the

remote key.

If the vehicle is locked using the central

locking button, be sure that the remote key

is in your possession before closing the

door.

02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Automatic relocking

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-

matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will

rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tail-

gate has been opened.

Automatic locking

When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and

tailgate can be locked automatically. This fea-

ture can be turned on or off by pressing MY

CAR and going to Car settings Lock

settings Automatic door locking. See

page 191 for a description of the menu sys-

tem.

Glove compartment

The glove compartment can only be locked

and unlocked using the detachable key blade

in the remote key. See page 61 for information

on removing the key blade from the remote

key.

Insert the key blade in the glove compart-

ment lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key blade from the lock.

Locking/unlocking the tailgate

Tailgate unlock button on the remote key

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote

key

–Press the tailgate unlock button on the

remote key to unlock (but not open1) the

tailgate. See also page 59.

> The alarm indicator light on the dash-

board will go out to indicate that the

alarm is not monitoring the entire vehi-

cle. The accessory movement and incli-

nation sensors will be automatically dis-

connected.

NOTE

•If the doors are locked while the tailgate

is open, the tailgate will remain

unlocked until the vehicle is relocked by

pressing the Lock button on the remote

key.

•On keyless drive vehicles, the gear

selector must be in the Park (P) position,

all doors and the tailgate must be

closed and the ignition must be

switched off before the vehicle can be

locked.

1This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 276).

02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Unlocking the tailgate from the

passenger compartment

–Press the button on the lighting panel (1) to

unlock (but not open1) the tailgate.

NOTE

The taillights will illuminate automatically for

a short period when the tailgate has been

opened.

Locking the tailgate with the remote key

Press the lock button ( ) on the remote. See

also page 59

The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin

flashing to show that the vehicle is locked and

that the alarm has been armed.

Opening the tailgate manually

The tailgate is held closed by an electronic

locking mechanism. To open:

1. Press lightly on the rubberized plate under

the handle to release the lock.

2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate.

CAUTION

•When pressing the rubberized plate,

only light pressure is necessary to

release the tailgate's electronic locking

mechanism.

•When opening the tailgate, pull it up

using the handle. Too much pressure on

the rubberized plate can damage its

electrical connections.

1This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 276).

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

The alarm system

The alarm is automatically armed whenever the

vehicle is locked with the remote key or

optional Personal Car Communicator.

When armed, the alarm continuously monitors

a number of points on the vehicle. The follow-

ing conditions will trigger the alarm:

•The hood is forced open.

•The tailgate is forced open.

•A door is forced open.

•The ignition slot is tampered with.

•An attempt is made to start the vehicle with

a non-approved key (a key not coded to

the car's ignition).

•If there is movement in the passenger com-

partment (if the vehicle is equipped with

the accessory movement sensor).

•The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle

is equipped with the accessory inclination

sensor).

•The battery is disconnected (while the

alarm is armed).

•The siren is disconnected when the alarm

is disarmed.

A message will appear in the information dis-

play if a fault should occur in the alarm system.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair any of the compo-

nents in the alarm system yourself. This

could affect the insurance policy on the

vehicle.

The alarm indicator light

The status of the alarm system is indicated by

the red indicator light on the dashboard (see

illustration):

•Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed

•The indicator light flashes at one-second

intervals – the alarm is armed

•The indicator light flashes rapidly before

the remote key is inserted in the ignition

slot and the ignition is put in mode I—the

alarm has been triggered.

Arming the alarm

–Press the Lock button on the remote key.

One long flash of the turn signals will con-

firm that the alarm is armed.

Alarm confirmation settings can be changed in

MY CAR, under Car settings Lock

settings Keyless entry. See page 191 for

a description of the menu system.

USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following con-

ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)

Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation

is subject to the following conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

Disarming the alarm

–Press the Unlock button on the remote key.

> Two short flashes from the car's direc-

tion indicators confirm that the alarm

has been deactivated and that all doors

are unlocked.

Turning off (stopping) the alarm

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by

pressing the Unlock button on the remote key

or by inserting the remote key in the ignition

slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction

indicators confirm that the alarm has been

turned off.

Other alarm-related functions

Automatic re-arming

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-

matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will

re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tail-

gate has been opened.

Audible/visual alarm signal

•An audible alarm signal is given by a bat-

tery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts

for 30 seconds.

•The visual alarm signal is given by flashing

all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes

or until the alarm is turned off.

Remote key not functioning

If the remote key is not functioning properly,

the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can

be started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade

(see page 62 for information on detaching

the key blade).

> This will trigger the alarm.

2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot

(also on vehicles with the optional keyless

drive). This will turn off the alarm.

3. Start the engine (see page 116 for instruc-

tions).

Reduced alarm function

Turning off the accessory alarm sensors

In certain situations it may be desirable to turn

off the accessory inclination and movement

alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your

vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the

boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in

the vehicle with the doors locked.

The vehicle's menu system is used for turning

off these sensors (see page 191 for a descrip-

tion of the menu system).

1. Go into the menu under Car settings.

2. Select Reduced Guard (Press OK/

MENU to choose).

3. Two alternatives are now available:

•Activate once. If this alternative is

selected, Reduced guard See

manual will appear in the instrument

panel display and the accessory incli-

nation and movement alarm sensors will

be deactivated when the vehicle is

locked.

•Ask when exiting. If this alternative is

selected, a message will appear in the

center console display each time the

engine is turned off. Press OK/MENU to

accept and the accessory inclination

and movement alarm sensors will be

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

deactivated when the vehicle is locked.

Press EXIT to cancel.

4. Press OK/MENU and lock the vehicle.

The next time the engine is started, the alarm

system will be reset and Full guard will appear

in the instrument panel display. The accessory

inclination and movement alarm sensors will be

reactivated.

In either of the alternatives, if you prefer not to

deactivate the accessory inclination and move-

ment alarm sensors, do not make a choice in

the menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.

02 Locks and alarm

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Instruments and controls........................................................................ 76

Ignition modes........................................................................................ 84

Seats....................................................................................................... 86

Steering wheel........................................................................................ 93

Lighting................................................................................................... 94

Wipers and washers.............................................................................. 102

Power windows..................................................................................... 105

Mirrors................................................................................................... 107

Compass*.............................................................................................. 109

Laminated panoramic roof*................................................................... 110

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*.................................................. 113

Starting the engine................................................................................ 116

Transmission......................................................................................... 121

Brakes................................................................................................... 124

Parking brake........................................................................................ 127

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*.................................................................. 130

YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77

Function Page

Menus and mes-

sages, turn signals,

high/low beams,

trip computer

191, 99,

94, 205

Cruise control 138

Horn, airbag 93, 22

Main instrument

panel

Audio system/Blue-

tooth hands-free

controls

214, 243

START/STOP

ENGINE button

Ignition slot 84

Infotainment/menu

display

Door handle –

Function Page

In-door control pan-

els (power win-

dows, mirrors,

power child safety

locks, central lock-

ing button)

105, 107,

52, 67

Hazard warning

flashers

Audio system con-

trols

214

Climate system

controls

200

Gear selector 121

Controls for active

chassis (Four-C)*

207

Wipers and washers 102, 103

Steering wheel

adjustment

Hood opening con-

trol

325

Parking brake 127

Function Page

Lighting panel, con-

trols for opening

fuel filler door/tail-

gate

94, 273,

Power seat* adjust-

ment controls

Information displays

Information displays in the instrument panel

The information displays show information on

some of the vehicle's functions, such as cruise

control, the trip computer and messages. The

information is shown with text and symbols.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

More detailed information can be found in the

descriptions of the functions that use the infor-

mation displays.

Gauges

Gauges in the instrument panel

Speedometer

Fuel gauge. Please note that the fuel level

indicator in the gauge moves from right to

left as the amount of fuel in the tank

decreases. The arrow indicates the side of

the vehicle that the fuel filler door is on. See

also the section on refueling beginning on

page 271. See page 205 for more infor-

mation on fuel level and consumption.

The tachometer shows engine speed in

thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Do not drive continuously with the needle

in the red area of the gauge. The engine

management system will automatically

prevent excessively high engines speeds.

This will be noticeable as a pronounced

unevenness in engine speed.

Indicator and warning symbols

High beam and turn signal indicators

Indicator and warning symbols

Information and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Function check

All indicator and warning symbols light up in

ignition mode II or when the engine is started.

When the engine has started, all the symbols

should go out except the parking brake sym-

bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis-

engaged.

If the engine does not start or if the function

check is carried out in ignition mode II, all sym-

bols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol

for faults in the vehicle's emissions system and

the symbol for low oil pressure.

Certain symbols may not have their functions

illustrated, depending on the vehicle's equip-

ment.

Indicator symbols

Symbol Description

Fault in the Active Bending

Light (ABL)*system

Malfunction indicator light

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Rear fog light on

Stability system

Tire pressure monitoring sen-

sor (TPMS)A

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

Symbol Description

Low fuel level

Information symbol, see text

in information display

High beam indicator

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

The stability system's Sport

mode is activated.

AOption in Canada

Fault in the Active Bending Light

(ABL) system

This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in

the ABL system. See page 97 for more infor-

mation about this system.

Malfunction Indicator Light

As you drive, a computer called On-Board

Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's

engine, transmission, electrical and emission

systems.

The malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE)

light will illuminate if the computer senses a

condition that potentially may need correcting.

When this happens, please have your vehicle

checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician as soon as possible.

A malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light

may have many causes. Sometimes, you may

not notice a change in your car's behavior.

Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt

fuel economy, emission controls, and drivabil-

ity. Extended driving without correcting the

cause could even damage other components

in your vehicle.

This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is

not closed tightly or if the engine was running

while the vehicle was refueled.

Canadian models are equipped with this

symbol for the Malfunction Indicator Light.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

warning light

If the warning light comes on, there may be a

malfunction in the ABS system (the standard

braking system will still function). Check the

system by:

1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off

the ignition.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the warning light goes off, no further

action is required.

If the warning light remains on, the vehicle

should be driven to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for inspection, see

page 124 for additional information.

Canadian models are equipped with this

symbol.

Rear fog light

This symbol indicates that the rear fog light

(located in the driver's side tail light cluster) is

on.

Stability system

This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC

(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys-

tem) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle,

see page 134 for more detailed information.

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)*

This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire

pressure in one or more tires is low, see

page 316 for detailed information.

Low fuel level

When this light comes on, the vehicle should

be refueled as soon as possible. See page

271 for information about fuel and refueling.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Information symbol

The information symbol lights up and a text

message is displayed to provide the driver with

necessary information about one of the vehi-

cle's systems. The message can be erased and

the symbol can be turned off by pressing the

OK button (see page 189 for information) or

this will take place automatically after a short

time (the length of time varies, depending on

the function affected).

The information symbol may also illuminate

together with other symbols.

High beam indicator

This symbol illuminates when the high beam

headlights are on, or if the high beam flash

function is used.

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

NOTE

•Both turn signal indicators will flash

when the hazard warning flashers are

used.

•If either of these indicators flash faster

than normal, the direction indicators are

not functioning properly.

Sport mode

This symbol illuminates to indicate that the sta-

bility system's Sport mode has been activated

to help provide maximum tractive force, for

example when driving with snow chains, or

driving in deep snow or loose sand.

Warning symbols

Symbol Description

Low oil pressure

Parking brake applied

SRS airbags

Seat belt reminder

Generator not charging

Fault in the brake system

Warning symbol

Low oil pressure

If the light comes on while driving, stop the

vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and

check the engine oil level. Add oil if necessary.

If the oil level is normal and the light stays on

after restart, have the vehicle towed to the

nearest trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

Parking brake applied

This symbol illuminates when the parking

brake is applied. This symbol flashes while the

brake is being applied and then glows steadily

when the parking brake has been set.

If the symbol continues to flash after the brake

has been set, this indicates that a fault has

been detected. See the message in the infor-

mation display.

Canadian models are equipped with this

symbol.

See page 127 for more information about

using the parking brake.

Airbags – SRS

If this light comes on while the vehicle is being

driven, or remains on for longer than approxi-

mately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been

started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions

have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pre-

tensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag,

and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s)

inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician as soon as possible.

See page 21 for more information about the

airbag system.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Seat belt reminder

This symbol comes on for approximately 6 sec-

onds if the driver has not fastened his or her

seat belt.

Generator not charging

This symbol comes on during driving if a fault

has occurred in the electrical system. Contact

an authorized Volvo workshop.

Engine temperature

Engine overheating can result from low oil or

coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high

heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction.

Engine overheating will be signaled with text

and a red warning triangle in the middle of the

instrument display. The exact text will depend

on the degree of overheating. It may range from

High engine temp Reduce speed to High

engine temp Stop engine. If appropriate,

other messages, such as Coolant level low,

Stop safely will also be displayed. If your

engine does overheat so that you must stop the

engine, always allow the engine to cool before

attempting to check oil and coolant levels.

See page 328 for more information.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may

be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and

check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see

page 328. If the level in the reservoir is below

MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an

authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake

system checked.

Canadian models are equipped with this

symbol.

If the and symbols come on at the

same time, there may be a fault in the brake

force distribution system.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off

the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

•If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-

ing.

•If the symbols remain on, check the level in

the brake fluid reservoir, see page 328. If

the brake fluid level is normal but the sym-

bols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven,

with great care, to an authorized Volvo

workshop to have the brake system

checked.

•If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the

vehicle should be transported to an author-

ized Volvo workshop to have the brake

system checked.

WARNING

•If the fluid level is below the MIN mark

in the reservoir or if a warning message

is displayed in the text window: DO

NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to

a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician and have the brake system

inspected.

•If the ABS and Brake system lights are

on at the same time, there is a risk of

reduced vehicle stability.

Warning symbol

The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a

problem related to safety and/or drivability. A

message will also appear in the main instru-

ments panel's display. The symbol remains

visible until the fault has been rectified but the

text message can be cleared with the OK but-

ton, see page 189. The warning symbol can

also come on in conjunction with other sym-

bols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehi-

cle further.

2. Read the information on the information

display. Implement the action in accord-

ance with the message in the display. Clear

the message using OK.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Reminder – doors not closed

If one of the doors, the hood or tailgate is not

closed properly, the information or warning

symbol comes on together with an explanatory

text message in the instrument panel. Stop the

vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and

close the door, hood or tailgate.

If the vehicle is driven at a speed

lower than approximately 5 mph

(7 km/h), the information symbol comes on.

If the vehicle is driven at a speed

higher than approximately 5 mph

(7 km/h), the warning symbol comes on.

Road Sign Information (RSI)

Road Sign Information (RSI) is a feature that

helps the driver see road signs with information

such as current speed. See page 136 for

detailed information.

Trip odometers

Trip odometers and reset button

Odometer display

Button for toggling between T1 and T2,

and for resetting the odometer

The trip odometers are used to measure short

distances. The distance is shown in the dis-

play. A short press the button toggles between

the two trip odometers T1 and T2. A long press

(more than 2 seconds) resets the currently dis-

played trip odometer to zero.

Clock

Clock and setting control

Display

Control for setting the clock

Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwise

to set the time. The set time is shown in the

information display.

The clock may be temporarily replaced by a

symbol in conjunction with a message, see

page 189.

Setting the clock in MY CAR

In addition to setting the clock manually as

described above, it can also be set in the MY

CAR menu system. See page 191 for addi-

tional information about these menus.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

1. Go to Settings System options

Time.

2. The hour box will be selected. Press OK to

activate this box.

3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and

press OK to confirm the setting and deac-

tivate this box.

4. Turn TUNE to select the minute box (A) and

press OK to activate this box (B).

5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and

press OK to confirm the setting and deac-

tivate this box.

6. Turn TUNE to select OK and press OK to

complete the procedure.

Use the menu selection Settings System

options Time format to display the time in

the 24-hour format or the 12-hour format (AM/

PM).

03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Inserting and removing the remote key

Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP

ENGINE button.

Inserting the remote key

Holding the end of the remote key with the

base of the key blade, insert the remote key

into the ignition slot as shown in the illustration

and press it in as far as possible.

CAUTION

Foreign objects in the ignition slot can

impair function or cause damage.

Removing the remote key

The remote key can be removed from the igni-

tion slot by pulling it out.

Functions

The remote key has 3 modes: 0, I, and II that

can be used without starting the engine. The

following table shows examples of which func-

tions are available in the respective modes.

NOTE

To access ignition modes I or II without star-

ting the engine, the brake pedal must not be

depressed.

Mode Function

0The odometer, clock and tem-

perature gauge are illuminated.

Power seats* can be adjusted

and the infotainment system can

be used for a limited time (to min-

imize battery drain see

page 214).

IThe laminated panoramic roof,

power windows,12-volt sockets

in the passenger compartment,

navigation system*, climate sys-

tem blower, windshield wipers

can be used.

II The headlights/taillights illumi-

nate. Warning/indicator lights

illuminate for 5 seconds. Other

systems are activated. However,

the heated seats* and heated

rear window function can only be

activated when the engine is run-

ning. Mode II should only be

used for very short periods to

help avoid draining the battery.

1Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Ignition mode 0

–The vehicle is unlocked.

Ignition mode I

–With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot1, press START/STOP

ENGINE briefly.

Ignition mode II

–With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot1, press START/STOP

ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds.

Returning to mode 0

To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press

START/STOP ENGINE briefly.

Starting and stopping the engine

See page 116 for information on starting the

engine and switching it off.

Emergency towing

See page 287 for important information about

the remote key when the vehicle is being

towed.

1Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front seats

Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer

or softer lumbar support.

Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and

move the seat to the position of your

choice.

Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,

pump up/down.

Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the

angle of the backrest.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Control panel for power seat*.

WARNING

•Do not adjust the seat while driving. The

seat should be adjusted so that the

brake pedal can be depressed fully. In

addition, position the seat as far rear-

ward as comfort and control allow.

•Check that the seat is securely locked

into position after adjusting.

Folding the front seat backrest

The front passenger seat backrest can be

folded to a horizontal position to make room for

a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:

Move the seat as far back and down as

possible.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest.

Without releasing the catches, push the

backrest forward.

Move the seat as far forward as possible

so that the head restraint slides under the

glove compartment.

WARNING

•When transporting long objects, cover

sharp edges on the load to help prevent

injury to occupants. Secure the load to

help prevent shifting during sudden

stops.

•When the seat's backrest is returned to

the upright position, push and pull it to

be sure that it is securely locked in this

position.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

Power seat

Power seat adjustment controls

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat forward/rearward and up/down

Backrest tilt

Operation

The seats can be adjusted for a short period

after unlocking the door with the remote con-

trol without the key in the ignition slot. Seat

adjustment is normally made when the ignition

is on and can always be made when the engine

is running.

NOTE

•Only one of the power seat's controls

can be used at the same time.

•The power seats have an overload pro-

tector that activates if a seat is blocked

by any object. If this occurs, switch off

the ignition (key in position 0) and wait

for a short period before operating the

seat again.

Power seat memory function

Power seat memory buttons

Button for storing a position

M (memory) button

Programming the seat's memory

Three different seating and door mirror posi-

tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.

The following example explains how button (1)

can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) are

programmed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat and door mirror posi-

tion in button (1):

1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the

desired positions using the seat and mirror

adjustment controls.

2. Press and hold down the M (memory) but-

ton (4).

3. With the memory button depressed, press

button (1) briefly to store the current posi-

tion for the seat/mirrors.

To move the seat and mirrors to the position

that they were in when a button was pro-

grammed:

–Press and hold down button (1) until the

seat and mirrors stop moving.

1Optional on certain models

03 Your driving environment

Seats

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

As a safety precaution, the seat will stop

automatically if the button is released before

the seat has reached the preset position.

Remote key memory and the power

driver's seat* and door mirrors

Each remote key has a feature that enables it

to store (remember) the position of the power

driver's seat and door mirrors when the vehicle

is locked with that remote key.

This feature has to be activated for each of the

remote keys used in the vehicle as follows:

1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot.

2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to

Settings Car settings Car key

memory

3. To activate the remote key memory fea-

ture, press ENTER (check the box).

> The remote key is now ready to store the

position of the power driver's seat and

door mirrors.

Repeat this procedure for each of the vehicle's

remote keys.

See page 191 for a description of the menu

system.

Storing the positions of the power

driver's seat/mirrors in the remote key

1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the

desired position using the seat and mirror

adjustment controls.

2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with the

remote key (or close the driver's door and

press the lock button on the door handle

with the remote key in your possession on

vehicles with the optional keyless drive).

> The positions of the power driver's seat

and door mirrors are now stored in the

remote key's memory.

NOTE

The remote key's memory feature and the

power driver's seat memory function (the

settings made using the buttons on the side

of the seat, see the section "Power seat

memory function" on page 87) work inde-

pendently of each other.

Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored

positions

To move the seat and door mirrors to the posi-

tion stored in the remote key:

1. Unlock the driver's door with the same

remote key (the one used to lock the

doors). For models equipped with the

optional keyless drive, you must have the

same remote key in your possession.

2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.

The driver's seat and door mirrors will auto-

matically move to the position in which you left

them (if the vehicle has been unlocked with one

of the other keys and new seat/mirror adjust-

ments have been made).

2This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89

NOTE

•The seat will move to this position even

if someone else has moved it to a dif-

ferent position and locked the vehicle

with a different remote key.

•This feature will work in the same way

with all of the remote keys that you use

with your vehicle.

Emergency stop

WARNING

•Because the driver's seat can be

adjusted with the ignition off, children

should never be left unattended in the

vehicle.

•Movement of the seat can be STOPPED

at any time by pressing any button on

the power seat control panel.

•Do not adjust the seat while driving. The

seat should be adjusted so that the

brake pedal can be depressed fully. In

addition, position the seat as far rear-

ward as comfort and control allow.

•The seat rails on the floor must not be

obstructed in any way when the seat is

in motion.

Heated seats*

See page 201.

Rear seats

Rear center head restraint

The center head restraint should be adjusted

according to the passenger's height. The

restraint should be carefully adjusted to sup-

port the occupant's head.

•Pull the head restraint up as required.

•To lower, press and hold the button

(located at the center, between the back-

rest and the head restraint) while pressing

the head restrain down carefully.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING

The center rear seat head restraint should

only be in its lowest position when this seat

is NOT occupied. When the center position

is occupied, the head restraint should be

correctly adjusted to the passenger’s

height. The upper edge of the head restraint

should be at least on a level with the upper-

most point of the seat occupant's ear.

Manually folding down the rear seat's

outboard head restraints

•Pull the handle closest to the head restraint

to fold it down.

•To return the head restraint to the upright

position, push it up until it clicks into place.

NOTE

•The head restraint must be returned to

the upright position manually.

•The outboard head restraints cannot be

folded down on models that are not

equipped with this button.

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not be kept

folded down for prolonged periods. This

could result in pressure marks in leather

upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should be

allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi-

tions if the head restraints are folded down.

If these positions are occupied, the head

restraints should be in the upright (fixed)

position.

Automatically folding down the rear

seat’s outboard head restraints

1. The ignition must be in mode II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear head

restraints for improved visibility.

NOTE

•The head restraint must be returned to

the upright position manually.

•The outboard head restraints cannot be

folded down on models that are not

equipped with this button.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not be kept

folded down for prolonged periods. This

could result in pressure marks in leather

upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should be

allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi-

tions if the head restraints are folded down.

If these positions are occupied, the head

restraints should be in the upright (fixed)

position.

Folding down the rear seat backrests

The three sections of the rear seat backrest can

be folded down in different combinations to

make it easier to transport long objects.

•The left (driver's side) section can be folded

down separately.

•The center section can be folded down

separately.

•The right (passenger's side) section can

only be folded down together with the cen-

ter section.

•All three sections can be folded down

together.

CAUTION

To help avoid damage to the upholstery,

there should be no objects on the rear seat

and the seat belt should not be buckled

when the backrest is folded down.

Release and lower the center head

restraint (see page 89) if the center and/or

right section of the backrest is to be low-

ered. The outboard head restraints fold

down automatically.

Pull up the backrest release control on the

respective section(s) ( ) and fold the sec-

tion(s) down. A red indicator ( ) shows

that the backrest is not locked in the

upright position.

NOTE

It may be necessary to move the front seats

forward or put their backrests in a more

upright position before folding down the

rear seat backrests.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING

•When one or more sections of the back-

rest is returned to the upright position,

check that it is properly locked in place

by pushing and pulling it. The red indi-

cators should also not be visible.

•Return the outboard head restraints to

the upright position.

•Long loads should always be securely

anchored to help avoid injury in the

event of a sudden stop.

•Always turn the engine off and apply the

parking brake when loading/unloading

the vehicle.

•Place the transmission in the Park (P)

position to help prevent inadvertent

movement of the gear selector.

•On hot days, the temperature in the

vehicle interior can rise very quickly.

Exposure of people to these high tem-

peratures for even a short period of time

can cause heat-related injury or death.

Small children are particularly at risk.

03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

Adjusting

G021138

Adjusting the steering wheel

Lever for releasing/locking the steering

wheel

Possible positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both

height and reach:

1. Pull the lever toward you to release the

steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position

that suits you.

3. Push back the lever to lock the steering

wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to

push into place, press the steering wheel

lightly at the same time as you push the

lever.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-

ing.

With the optional speed-dependent power

steering the level of steering force can be

adjusted, see page 207.

Keypads

Keypads in the steering wheel

Cruise control, see page 138. Adaptive

cruise control*, see page 140.

Infotainment controls, see page 216.

Horn

–Press the steering wheel hub to sound the

horn.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Lighting panel

Overview, light switches

Thumb wheel for adjusting display and

instrument lighting

Rear fog light

Headlights/parking lights

Overview, light switches with AUTO function

Thumb wheel for adjusting display and

instrument lighting

Rear fog light

Headlights/parking lights

Instrument lighting

Illumination of the display and instrument lights

will vary, depending on ignition mode.

The display lighting is automatically subdued

in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the

thumb wheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting is

adjusted with the thumb wheel.

High/low beam headlights

Headlight switch and lever

High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams

Position Description

Daytime running lights/high

beams/high beam flash

Parking lights

Low beams/high beams/high

beam flash

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95

Headlight switch with AUTO and lever

High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams

Position Description

Daytime running lights/high

beams/high beam flash

Parking lights

Position Description

Low beams/high beams/high

beam flash

"Tunnel detection"* will acti-

vate the low beams in poor

lighting conditions

The "Active high beam"* func-

tion can be used

High beam flash

Low beams/high beams/high

beam flash

Volvo recommends using the position

whenever weather conditions allow the use of

the "Active high beam"* function (see

page 96).

High beam flash

Move the lever toward the steering wheel to

position 1. The high beams come on until the

lever is released.

High/low beam headlights

Continuous high beams

1. Set the ignition to mode II.

2. With the light switch in position 0 or

, pull the turn signal lever toward the

steering wheel to position 2 to toggle

between high and low beams (this also

applies on models equipped with the

optional Active Bending Lights).

>The symbol illuminates in the

instrument panel to indicate that the

high beams are on.

Low beams

When the engine is started, the low beams are

activated automatically (daytime running lights)

if the headlight control is in position 0 or

Daytime running lights can be deactivated in

the MY CAR menu system under Settings

Car settings Light settings Daytime

running lights.

However, please be aware that these lights

may not be deactivated in Canada.

NOTE

•The use of daytime running lights is

mandatory in Canada.

•Continuous high beams cannot be acti-

vated when the headlight switch is in

position . High beam flash will

function in this position.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Active high beams – AHB*

AHB is a feature that uses a camera at the

upper edge of the windshield to detect the

headlights of oncoming vehicles or the tail-

lights of a vehicle directly ahead. When this

happens, the headlights will automatically

switch from high beams to low beams. When

the camera no longer detects the headlights/

taillights of other vehicles, your headlights will

switch back to high beams after several sec-

onds.

To activate this feature, turn the light switch to

the position. Activation will occur if the

engine has been running for at least

20 seconds and the vehicle's speed is at least

12 mph (20 km/h).

Light switch in the AUTO position

Activate/deactivate AHB by pulling the left

steering wheel lever rearward (toward the

steering wheel) as far as possible and releasing

it. If AHB is deactivated while the high beams

are on, the headlights will switch to low beams.

When AHB is activated, the symbol

will illuminate in the instrument panel. The high

beam indicator ( ) in the instrument panel

will also illuminate when the high beams are on.

NOTE

•Keep the windshield in front of the cam-

era free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.

•Do not mount or in any way attach any-

thing on the windshield that could

obstruct the camera.

If the symbol illuminates in the instru-

ment panel and AHB unavailable is displayed,

switching between high and low beams will

have to be done manually. The light switch can

remain in the AUTO position. The same applies

if Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed

and the symbol is displayed. The

symbol will go out when these mes-

sages are displayed.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in

heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active

again or if the sensors in the windshield are no

longer obscured, the messages will disappear

and the symbol will illuminate.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

CAUTION

In the following situations, it may be neces-

sary to switch between high and low beams

manually:

•In heavy fog or rain

•In blowing snow or slush

•In bright moonlight

•In freezing rain

•In areas with dim street lighting

•When oncoming vehicles have dim front

lighting

•If there are pedestrians on or near the

road

•If there are reflective objects, such as

signs, near the road

•When oncoming vehicles' lights are

obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc.

•When there are vehicles on connecting

roads

•At the top of hills or in dips in the road

•In sharp curves

See page164 for more information about the

camera's limitations.

Tunnel detection (standard on models

with a rain sensor)

The optional rain sensor reacts to the change

in lighting conditions when, for example, the

vehicle is driven into a tunnel. If the daytime

running lights have been deactivated, tunnel

detection will activate the low beam headlights

while the vehicle is in the tunnel. The low

beams will be switched off approx.

20 seconds after the vehicle leaves the tunnel.

The rain sensor does not have to be activated

for tunnel detection to function.

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light

function deactivated (left) and activated (right)

When this function is activated, the headlight

beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve

according to movements of the steering wheel

(see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).

ABL is activated automatically1 when the

engine is started.

The function can be deactivated/reactivated in

the MY CAR menu system under My XC60

Active Bending Lights or under Settings

Car settings Light settings Active

Bending Lights.

See page 191 for a description of the menu

system.

NOTE

This function is only active in twilight or dark

conditions, and only when the vehicle is in

motion.

If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol

will illuminate and a message will be displayed

as shown in the table.

1The factory default setting is on.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Display Explana-

tion

Headlamp

failure

Service

required

The system

is not func-

tioning

properly and

should be

inspected/

repaired by

a trained

and qualified

Volvo serv-

ice techni-

cian.

Auxiliary lights*

If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the

driver can use the MY CAR menu system to

choose to deactivate and turn these lights on

and off along with the high beam headlights2.

Parking lights

Headlight control in position for parking lights

The parking lights (the license plate lights also

come on) can be turned on even when the igni-

tion is switched off.

Turn the headlight control to the center posi-

tion (the license plate lighting comes on at the

same time).

The lighting also comes on when the tailgate is

opened in order to alert anyone traveling

behind your vehicle.

In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear

parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate

is opened to alert anyone traveling behind your

vehicle. This happens regardless of the posi-

tion that the headlight control is in or which

mode the ignition is in.

Rear fog light

The single rear fog light is located in the driver's

side taillight cluster. The rear fog light will only

function in combination with the high/low

beam headlights.

–Press the button to switch the rear fog light

on/off.

> The rear fog light indicator symbol

on the instrument panel and the

light in the button come on when the

rear fog light is switched on.

2The auxiliary lights must be connected to the vehicle's electrical system, which should only be done by a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. See page 191 for more information about

the menu system.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

NOTE

The rear fog light is considerably brighter

than the normal taillights and should be

used only when conditions such as fog, rain,

snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for

other vehicles to less than 500 ft.

(150 meters).

Hazard warning flashers

Location of the hazard warning flasher button

The hazard warning flasher should be used to

indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic

hazard.

–To activate the flashers, press the button

in the center dash. Press the button again

to turn off the flashers.

NOTE

•Regulations regarding the use of the

hazard warning flasher may vary,

depending on where you live.

•The hazard warning flashers will be acti-

vated automatically if an airbag

deploys.

Turn signals

When changing lanes

The driver can automatically flash the turn

signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever

up or down to the first position and releasing it.

When turning

Move the lever as far up or down as possi-

ble to start the turn signals. The turn signals will

be cancelled automatically by the movement of

the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned

to its initial position by hand.

NOTE

•This automatic flashing sequence can

be interrupted by immediately moving

the lever in the opposite direction.

•If the turn signal indicator flashes faster

than normal, check for a burned-out

turn signal bulb.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Interior lighting, front

G021149

Light switches, front roof lighting

Drivers side front reading light, on/off

Passenger's side front reading light, on/off

Overhead courtesy lighting.

The lighting in the front part of the passenger

compartment is controlled with the buttons (1)

and (2) in the roof console.

Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger

compartment lighting:

•Off: right side depressed, automatic light-

ing off.

•Neutral position: automatic lighting is on.

•On – left side depressed, passenger com-

partment lighting on.

"Theater lighting"

When the overhead courtesy lighting has gone

out and the engine is running, several LEDs

located near the roof console illuminate to pro-

vide faint lighting for the occupants of the front

seats. This lighting goes out just after the over-

head courtesy lighting when the vehicle is

locked.

Interior lighting, rear

Rear reading lights

The lights are switched on or off by pressing

each respective button.

Courtesy lights/door step lighting*

The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch

on/off automatically when one of the front

doors is opened/closed.

Glove compartment lighting

The glove compartment lighting switches on/

off automatically when the lid is opened/

closed.

Overhead courtesy lighting

The passenger compartment lighting is

switched on and off automatically when button

(3) is in the neutral position.

The lighting comes on and remains on for

30 seconds if:

•the vehicle is unlocked from the outside

with the key or remote control

•the engine is switched off and the ignition

is in mode 0.

The lighting switches off when:

•the engine is started

•the vehicle is locked from the outside.

The lighting comes on and remains on for two

minutes if one of the doors is open.

The passenger compartment lighting can be

switched on and off manually within 30 minutes

after the vehicle has been unlocked.

If the lighting is switched on manually and the

vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will

switch off automatically after one minute.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

101

Cargo area lighting

The cargo area lighting comes on automatically

when the tailgate is opened.

Home safe lighting

When you leave your vehicle at night, you can

make use of the home safe lighting function to

illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.

1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to put

the ignition in mode 0 (see page 85 for

information about the ignition modes).

2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible

towards the steering wheel and release it.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

The headlights, parking lights, turn signals,

lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights,

and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain

on for 30 3, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval

can be set in MY CAR under Settings Car

settings Light settings Home safe light

duration. See page 191 for a description of

the menu system.

Approach lighting

Approach lighting is activated by pressing the

approach light button on the remote key (see

the illustration on page 59).

When the function has been activated, the

parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror

lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting and

door step lighting come on.

The time interval for this lighting can be set by

pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings

Light settings Approach light

duration. See page 191 for a description of

the menu system.

3Factory setting

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Windshield wipers/washers

Windshield wipers and washers

Rain sensor* on/off

Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency

CAUTION

•Use ample washer fluid when washing

the windshield. The windshield should

be thoroughly wet when the wipers are

in operation.

•Before using the wipers, ice and snow

should be removed from the wind-

shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper

blades are not frozen in place.

Windshield wipers off

Move the lever to position 0 to switch

off the windshield wipers.

Single sweep

Move the lever upward from position

0 to sweep the windshield one stroke

at a time for as long as the lever is held up.

Intermittent wiping

With the lever in this position, you can

set the wiper interval by twisting the

thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed

or downward to decrease the speed.

Continuous wiping

The wipers operate at normal speed.

The wipers operate at high speed.

Windshield wiper service position

The windshield wipers must be in the service

position before the wiper blades can be

cleaned or replaced. See page 337 for addi-

tional information.

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper

speed according to the amount of water on the

windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor

can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up

(the wipers will sweep the windshield more fre-

quently) or down (the wipers will sweep the

windshield less frequently).

NOTE

The wipers will make an extra sweep each

time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.

When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol

will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity

When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle

must be running or in ignition mode II and the

windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 or

in the single sweep position.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button

. The windshield wipers will make one

sweep.

Press the lever up for the wipers to make an

extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active

mode when the stalk is released back to posi-

tion 0.

Deactivating

Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-

ton or press the lever down to another

wiper position.

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated

when the key is removed from the ignition slot

or five minutes after the ignition has been

switched off.

CAUTION

The rain sensor should be deactivated when

washing the car in an automatic car wash,

etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the

wipers will start inadvertently in the car

wash and could be damaged.

Windshield washing

Washing function

Move the lever toward the steering wheel to

start the windshield and headlight washers.

After the lever is released the wipers make sev-

eral extra sweeps.

Heated washer nozzles*

The washer nozzles are heated automatically

in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid

from freezing.

High-pressure headlight washing*

High-pressure headlight washing consumes a

large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the

headlights are washed using two alternatives:

•Low/high beam headlights on. The head-

lights will be washed the first time the wind-

shield is washed. Thereafter, the head-

lights will only be washed once for every

five times the windshield is washed within

a 10-minute period.

•Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend-

ing Lights will be washed once for every

five times the windshield is washed. Nor-

mal halogen headlights will not be washed.

CAUTION

•Use ample washer fluid when washing

the windshield. The windshield should

be thoroughly wet when the wipers are

in operation.

•When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of

washer fluid remains in the reservoir,

the headlights will no longer be washed.

A text message will also be displayed to

remind the driver to fill the washer fluid

reservoir.

Tailgate wiper/washer

Move the lever forward to start the tailgate washer.

Intermittent wiping

Normal (continuous) wiping

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

104

Move the lever forward to start the tailgate washer.

Intermittent wiping

Normal (continuous) wiping

NOTE

The rear wiper is equipped with cut-off func-

tion, which means that it will not operate if

its electric motor overheats. The wiper will

function again after a cool-down period

(30 seconds or longer, depending on the

heat of the motor and ambient temperature

conditions).

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear

If the windshield wipers are on and the trans-

mission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate

wiper will go into intermittent wiping function1.

This function is deactivated when a different

gear is selected.

NOTE

On vehicles with the optional rain sensor,

the tailgate wiper will be activated when

reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is acti-

vated and it is raining.

If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continuous)

wiping mode, selecting different gears will not

affect its function.

1Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

03 Your driving environment

Power windows

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

Power windows

Driver's door control panel

Switch for power child safety locks* and

disengaging rear power window buttons,

see page 52

Rear window controls

Front window controls.

WARNING

•Always remove the ignition key when

the vehicle is unattended to put the igni-

tion in mode 0 (see page 85 for infor-

mation about the ignition modes).

•Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

•Make sure that the windows are com-

pletely unobstructed before they are

operated.

Operating

Operating the power windows

Manual up/down

Auto up/down.

All power windows can be operated using the

control panel in the driver's door. The control

panels in the other doors only operate the win-

dow in the respective doors.

For the power windows to function, the ignition

must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle

has been running, the power windows can be

operated for several minutes after the remote

key has been removed from the ignition slot, or

until a door has been opened.

NOTE

•Movement of the windows will stop if

they are obstructed in any way.

•To reduce buffeting wind noise if the

rear windows are opened, also open the

front windows slightly.

Manual up/down

–Move one of the controls up/down slightly.

> The power windows move up/down as

long as the control is held in position.

Auto up/down

–Move one of the controls up/down as far

as possible and release it.

> The window will open or close com-

pletely.

03 Your driving environment

Power windows

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Resetting

If the battery has been disconnected, the auto

open function must be reset so that it will work

properly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the button

to close the window and hold it for one

second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again

for one second.

Laminated glass*

This glass is reinforced to help pro-

vide protection against break-ins and

improved sound insulation in the

passenger compartment.

The windshield, laminated panoramic roof and

other windows have laminated glass.

03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

Power door mirrors

Door mirror controls

Adjusting

1. Press the L button for the left door mirror

or the R button for the right door mirror.

The light in the button comes on.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the

center.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light

should no longer be on.

WARNING

Objects seen in the mirrors may appear fur-

ther away than they actually are.

Retractable power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving

in narrow spaces:

1. Press down the L and R buttons at the

same time.

2. Release them after approximately one sec-

ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the

fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L

and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors

automatically stop in the fully extended posi-

tion.

Storing the position*

The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-

ory when the vehicle has been locked with the

remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with

the same remote control the mirrors and the

driver's seat adopt the stored positions when

the driver's door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Car key memory Personal settings in key

memory. See page 191 for a description of the

menu system.

Tilting the door mirrors when parking*

The door mirrors can be tilted down to help

give the driver a better view along the sides of

the vehicle, for example when parallel parking.

To activate this function, select reverse gear

and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt

the mirror down.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt

right mirror. See page 191 for a description

of the menu system.

The door mirror will reset to its normal position:

•after 10 seconds when reverse is disen-

gaged and the car remains stopped.

•immediately when reverse is disengaged

and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

•immediately if you press the correspond-

ing L or R button again.

•when the engine is turned off.

•when the side mirrors are folded in.

NOTE

Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time.

Automatically tilting the door mirrors

when parking

The door mirrors can tilt down automatically to

help give the driver a better view along the

sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel

parking. When the transmission is no longer in

03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

108

reverse, the mirrors will automatically return to

their original position.

This function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt

left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right

mirror. See page 191 for information about

the MY CAR menu system.

Automatic retraction when locking

When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the

remote key the door mirrors are automatically

retracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors

when locking. See page 191 for a description

of the menu system.

Resetting to neutral

Mirrors that have been moved out of position

by an external force must be electrically reset

to the neutral position for electric retracting/

extending to work.

•Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-

tons.

•Fold them out again with the L and R but-

tons.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Home safe and approach lighting

The light on the door mirrors comes on when

approach lighting or home safe lighting is

selected, see page 101.

Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and ice

from the rear window and the door mirrors.

Press the button once to start simultaneous

rear window and door mirror defrosting. The

light in the button indicates that the function is

active. Switch the function off when then win-

dows have cleared to help avoid battery drain.

The rear window is defogged/de-iced auto-

matically if the vehicle is started in an outside

temperature lower than 48 °F (9 °C). Auto-

defrosting can be selected in MY CAR under

Settings Climate settings Automatic

rear defroster. See page 191 for a description

of the menu system.

Interior rearview mirror

Auto-dim function

An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from

following traffic and automatically reduces

glare in the mirror.

03 Your driving environment

Compass*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

The rearview mirror has an integrated display

that shows the compass direction in which the

vehicle is pointing. Eight different directions are

shown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE

(north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south),

SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest).

The compass is displayed automatically when

the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To

switch the compass on/off use a pen or similar

object and press in the button on the underside

of the mirror.

Calibration

The compass will need to be calibrated if the

vehicle is driven into a new magnetic zone (see

the magnetic zones on the map at the end of

this section). To do so:

1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely

out of traffic and away from steel structures

and high-tension electrical wires.

2. Start the vehicle.

NOTE

For best results from calibration, switch off

all electrical equipment in the vehicle (cli-

mate system, windshield wipers, audio sys-

tem, etc.) and make sure that all doors are

closed.

3. Using a pen or similar object, press and

hold the button on the underside of mirror

until C is shown again in the mirror (after

approx. 6 seconds).

4. Drive as usual. C disappears from the dis-

play when calibration is complete.

Alternative calibration method:

Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no

more than 5 mph (8 km/h) until C disap-

pears from the display when calibration is

complete.

Selecting a magnetic zone

G018632

Magnetic zones.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The correct zone must be selected for the com-

pass to work correctly.

1. Put the ignition in mode II.

2. Using a pen or similar object, press and

hold the button on the rear side of mirror

for at least 3 seconds. The number for the

current area will be shown.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the num-

ber for the required geographic area

(1 – 15) is shown.

4. The display will revert to showing the com-

pass direction after several seconds.

03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The laminated panoramic roof is divided into

two sections.

•The rear glass section is fixed in place and

cannot be moved.

•The front glass section can be slid hori-

zontally to the open or closed positions or

its rear edge can be raised and lowered to

allow ventilation.

All references in this section to opening or clos-

ing the panoramic roof pertain to the front glass

section.

The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun

shade made of perforated fabric that is located

below the sections of glass. This shade can be

opened or closed, for example when driving in

bright sunlight.

Both the laminated panoramic roof and the sun

shade are operated by the controls in the ceil-

ing console, near the rear-view mirror. The

vehicle's ignition must be in mode I or II before

the laminated panoramic roof/sun shade can

be operated.

CAUTION

•Remove ice and snow before opening

the laminated panoramic roof.

•Do not operate the laminated panor-

amic roof if it is frozen closed.

•Never place heavy objects on the lami-

nated panoramic roof.

Operation

Auto open (arrow points toward the rear of

the vehicle)

Manual open

Manual close

Auto close

03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111

WARNING

•During manual closing, if the laminated

panoramic roof is obstructed, immedi-

ately open it again.

•Never open or close the laminated pan-

oramic roof if it is obstructed in any way.

•Never allow a child to operate the lami-

nated panoramic roof.

•Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

•When leaving the vehicle, ensure that

the ignition is in mode 0 (see page 84 for

information about the various ignition

modes) to disable the laminated panor-

amic roof. Never leave the remote key/

PCC* in the vehicle.

•Never extend any object or body part

though the open laminated panoramic

roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is

completely switched off.

Automatic operation

1. To open the sun shade completely, pull the

control as far back as possible (to the auto

open position) and release it.

2. To fully open the laminated panoramic

roof, pull the control as far back as possible

a second time (to the auto open position)

and release it.

Quick open/close

The laminated panoramic roof and the sun

shade can be opened/closed at the same time:

•Open - pull the control back (to the auto

open position) twice in quick succession

and release it.

•Close - push the control forward (to the

auto close position) twice in quick succes-

sion and release it.

Manual operation

1. Opening the sun shade: Pull the control

back to the first stop (the manual open

position) and hold it until the sun shade has

opened to the position of your choice.

2. Opening the rear edge of the laminated

panoramic roof: Pull the control back to

the first stop (the manual open position) a

second time to open the rear edge of the

laminated panoramic roof.

3. Opening the front glass section: Pull the

control back to the first stop (the manual

open position) a third time and hold it until

the laminated panoramic roof has opened

to the position of your choice.

Perform this procedure in reverse order to

close the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun

shade.

NOTE

For manual opening, the sun shade must

first be fully open before it will be possible

to open the laminated panoramic roof.

When closing, the laminated panoramic roof

must be fully closed before the sun shade

can be closed.

Tilt position

Tilt position, raised at the rear edge

Open (raise the rear edge of the front glass

section) by pressing the rear edge of the

control upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-

trol downward and holding it until the lami-

nated panoramic roof has closed com-

pletely.

If the sun shade is completely closed, it will

open approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the

03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt

position.

Wind blocker

The moonroof is equipped with a wind blocker

that folds up when the moonroof is open.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink

Wireless Control System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113

Introduction

The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro-

vides a convenient way to replace up to three

hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters

used to activate devices such as gate opera-

tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,

security systems, even home lighting. Addi-

tional HomeLink information can be found on

the Internet at www.homelink.com or by phon-

ing the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

WARNING

•If you use HomeLink to open a garage

door or gate, be sure no one is near the

gate or door while it is in motion.

•When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park outside of

the garage.

•Do not use HomeLink with any garage

door opener that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by U.S.

federal safety standards (this includes

any garage door opener model manu-

factured before April 1, 1982). A garage

door that cannot detect an object - sig-

naling the door to stop and reverse -

does not meet current U.S. federal

safety standards. For more information,

contact HomeLink at:

www.homelink.com.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF device

you are programming for use in other vehicles

as well as for future HomeLink programming. It

is also suggested that upon the sale of the

vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be

erased for security purposes. Refer to “Reset-

ting HomeLink Buttons” on page 115.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE

Some vehicles may require the ignition to be

switched on or be in the “accessories” posi-

tion for programming and/or operation of

HomeLink. It is also recommended that a

new battery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being programmed

to HomeLink for quicker training and accu-

rate transmission of the radio-frequency

signal. The HomeLink buttons must be reset

first. When this has been completed, Home-

link is in learning mode so that you can per-

form programming.

1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-

mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the

HomeLink button you wish to program

while keeping the indicator light in view.

2. Simultaneously press and hold both the

chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit-

ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator

light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink-

ing light. Now you may release both the

HomeLink and hand-held transmitter but-

tons.

1HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink

Wireless Control System*

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to replace

this Programming Step 2 with procedures

noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-

gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica-

tor light does not change to a rapidly blink-

ing light after performing these steps, con-

tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or by

phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink but-

ton up to two separate times to activate the

door. If the door does not activate, press

and hold the just-trained HomeLink button

and observe the indicator light.

•If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate when

the HomeLink button is pressed and

released.

•If the indicator light blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a con-

stant light continue with “Program-

ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro-

gramming of a rolling code equipped

device (most commonly a garage door

opener).

4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-

head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”

or “smart” button. This can usually be

found where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the motor-head unit.

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or

“smart” button. (The name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer.) There

are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold

for two seconds and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence a second

time, and, depending on the brand of the

garage door opener (or other rolling code

equipped device), repeat this sequence a

third time to complete the programming

process.

HomeLink should now activate your rolling

code equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-

mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-

eral seconds of transmission – which may not

be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the

signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are

designed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficul-

ties programming a gate operator or garage

door opener by using the “Programming” pro-

cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”

step 2 with the following:

•Continue to press and hold the HomeLink

button while you press and release -

every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-

held transmitter until the HomeLink indica-

tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly

blinking light. Now you may release both

the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter

buttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-

plete.

Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and hold the pro-

grammed HomeLink button until the trained

device begins to operate (this may take several

seconds). Activation will now occur for the

trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate

operator, security system, entry door lock,

home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience,

the hand-held transmitter of the device may

also be used at any time. In the event that there

are still programming difficulties or questions,

contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or

by phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink

Wireless Control System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115

NOTE

If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will

function for 30 minutes after the driver's

door has been opened.

Resetting HomeLink Buttons

Use the following procedure to reset (erase

programming) from the three HomeLink but-

tons (individual buttons cannot be reset but

can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the fol-

lowing section):

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons until the indicator light begins to

flash.

2. Release both buttons.

> HomeLink is now in the training (or

learning) mode and can be programmed

at any time beginning with “Program-

ming” - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink

Button

To program a device to HomeLink using a

HomeLink button previously trained, follow

these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-

ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-

Link button, proceed with “Programming”

- step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink

at: www.homelink.com or phone 1–800–355–

3515.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15

and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) This device must accept any

interference that may be received including

interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or

modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the

device.2

2The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Start

Ignition slot with remote key inserted ( see

page 84 for more information on ignition modes)

WARNING

Before starting the engine:

•Fasten the seat belt.

•Check that the seat, steering wheel and

mirrors are adjusted properly.

•Make sure the brake pedal can be

depressed completely. Adjust the seat

if necessary.

WARNING

•Never use more than one floor mat at a

time on the driver's floor. An extra mat

on the driver's floor can cause the

accelerator and/or brake pedal to

catch. Check that the movement of

these pedals is not impeded.

•Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-

factured for your car. They must be

firmly secured in the clips on the floor so

that they cannot slide and become trap-

ped under the pedals on the driver's

side.

1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot

as far as possible, with the metallic key

blade pointing outward (not inserted into

the slot)1.

2. Depress the brake pedal2.

3. Press and release the START/STOP

ENGINE button. The autostart function will

operate the starter motor until the engine

starts or until its overheating function stops

it.

The starter motor operates for a maximum

of 10 seconds. If the engine has not

started, repeat the procedure.

CAUTION

If the engine does not start after the third try,

wait for approximately 3 minutes before try-

ing to start it again to give the battery time

to recover its starting capacity.

NOTE

Keyless drive*

To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless

drive feature, one of the remote keys must

be in the passenger compartment. Follow

the instructions in steps 2 and 3 to start the

vehicle.

1On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment.

2If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

117

WARNING

•Always remove the remote key from the

ignition slot when leaving the vehicle

and ensure that the ignition in mode 0

(see page 85 for information about the

ignition modes), especially if there are

children in the vehicle.

•On vehicles with th optional keyless

drive, never remove the remote key

from the vehicle while it is being driven

or towed.

•Always place the gear selector in Park

and apply the parking brake before

leaving the vehicle. Never leave the

vehicle unattended with the engine run-

ning.

•Always open garage doors fully before

starting the engine inside a garage to

ensure adequate ventilation. The

exhaust gases contain carbon monox-

ide, which is invisible and odorless but

very poisonous.

NOTE

•After a cold start, idle speed may be

noticeably higher than normal for a

short period. This is done to help bring

components in the emission control

system to their normal operating tem-

perature as quickly as possible, which

enables them to control emissions and

help reduce the vehicle's impact on the

environment3.

CAUTION

•When starting in cold weather, the auto-

matic transmission may shift up at

slightly higher engine speeds than nor-

mal until the automatic transmission

fluid reaches normal operating tem-

perature.

•Do not race a cold engine immediately

after starting. Oil flow may not reach

some lubrication points fast enough to

prevent engine damage.

•The engine should be idling when you

move the gear selector. Never acceler-

ate until after you feel the transmission

engage. Accelerating immediately after

selecting a gear will cause harsh

engagement and premature transmis-

sion wear.

•Selecting P or N when idling at a stand-

still for prolonged periods of time will

help prevent overheating of the auto-

matic transmission fluid.

3If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Engine Remote Start (ERS)*

Introduction

ERS is a feature that makes it possible to

remotely start the engine to cool or heat the

passenger compartment before driving.

The climate control system will start using the

same settings as when the engine was

switched off.

When the engine is started using ERS, it will run

for a maximum of 15 minutes before automat-

ically switching off again. After 2 ERS starts,

the engine must be started in the normal way

before ERS can be used again.

NOTE

Always adhere to applicable State, Province

and or Local laws regarding engine idling

when using ERS.

WARNING

Keep the following in mind before using ERS

•The vehicle should be in view.

•The vehicle should be unoccupied.

•The vehicle must not be parked indoors

or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes

are harmful to the health.

Using ERS

Remote key buttons used for remote engine start

Lock

Approach lighting

Information4.

Starting the engine

The maximum range for ERS is approximately

100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is

unobstructed. The vehicle must also be

locked.

To start the engine:

1. Press button 1 briefly.

2. Immediately press button 2 for approxi-

mately 2 seconds.

If the requirements for ERS have been met, the

following will occur:

1. The turn signals will flash several times.

2. The engine will start.

3. The turn signals will illuminate for

3 seconds to indicate that the engine has

started.

After the engine has started, the vehicle

remains locked but the alarm is disarmed.

Models with a Personal Car

Communicator (PCC) remote key* (see

page 60)

The indicator light for approach light-

ing will flash several times and then

glow continuously if all of the require-

ments for ERS have been met. How-

ever, this does not indicate that ERS has

started the engine.

To check if ERS has started the engine, press

the information button (3). If the engine has

started, the indicator light for button 2 will illu-

minate.

Active functions

When the engine is started with ERS, the fol-

lowing functions are activated:

•The climate control system

•The infotainment system.

4PCC keys only, see page 60

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

119

Deactivated functions

When the engine is started with ERS, the fol-

lowing functions are deactivated:

•Headlights

•Parking lights

•License plate lights

•Windshield wipers

Switching off an engine started with ERS

Any of the following will switch off the engine if

it has been started with ERS:

•Pressing the lock button (1) on the remote

key

•Unlocking the vehicle

•Opening a door

•Depressing the throttle or brake pedal

•Moving the gear selector from the P posi-

tion

•If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons

(10 liters) of fuel in the tank

•More than 15 minutes have elapsed.

If the engine has been started with ERS and

switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for

3 seconds.

Message in the instrument panel display

If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be

displayed in the instrument panel.

Switching off the engine

With the engine running, press the START/

STOP ENGINE button.

If the gear selector is not in the P position or if

the vehicle is moving, press the START/STOP

ENGINE button twice or press and hold it in

until the engine switches off.

Jump starting

G021347

Connecting the jumper cables

Follow these instructions to jump start your

vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another

vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the

12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another

vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touch-

ing to prevent premature completion of a cir-

cuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc-

tions provided for the other vehicle.

To jump start your vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to

mode 0, see page 84).

2. First connect the red jumper cable to the

auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).

3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+)

terminal on your vehicle's battery (2),

marked with a "+" sign, located under a

folding cover.

4. Connect the black jumper cable to the aux-

iliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) and

to the ground point in your vehicle's engine

compartment (right engine mount at the

top, on the outer screw) (4).

5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,

then start the engine in the vehicle with

dead battery.

6. After the engine has started, first remove

the negative (–) terminal jumper cable

(black). Then remove the positive (+) termi-

nal jumper cable (red).

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

120

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the state of California

to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Connect the jumper cables carefully to

avoid short circuits with other components

in the engine compartment.

WARNING

•Do not connect the jumper cable to any

part of the fuel system or to any moving

parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.

•Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which

is flammable and explosive.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-

tact occurs, flush the affected area

immediately with water. Obtain medical

help immediately if eyes are affected.

•Never expose the battery to open flame

or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Failure to follow the instructions for

jump starting can lead to injury.

03 Your driving environment

Transmission

121

Automatic transmission

G021351

Shiftgate positions1

Depress the button on the front of the gear

selector knob to move the gear selector

between the R, N, D, and P positions.

The gear selector can be moved freely between

the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D)

positions while driving.

CAUTION

The transmission’s temperature is moni-

tored to help prevent damage to the trans-

mission or other drivetrain components. If

there is a risk of overheating, the warning

symbol on the instrument panel will illumi-

nate and a text message will be displayed.

Follow the instructions provided there.

Park position (P)

Select the P position when starting or parking.

Shiftlock

When P has been selected, the transmission is

mechanically blocked in this position. The

brake pedal must be depressed and the igni-

tion must be in at least mode II (see page 84)

before the gear lever can be moved from the

P position.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when the

vehicle is parked, particularly when parking

on a hill. The transmission's P mode may

not be able to keep the vehicle stationary if

it is parked on an incline.

Press the control to apply the parking brake,

see page 127.

CAUTION

The vehicle must be stationary when posi-

tion P is selected.

Reverse (R)

The vehicle must be stationary when position

R is selected.

Neutral position (N)

No gear is engaged and the engine can be

started with the gear selector in this position.

Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta-

tionary with the gear selector in position N.

Drive (D)

D is the normal driving position. The car auto-

matically shifts between the various forward

1The information display (see page 77) shows the gear selector's position or the selected gear by displaying the following: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

03 Your driving environment

Transmission

122

gears, based on the level of acceleration and

speed. The car must be at a standstill when

shifting from position R to position D.

Geartronic–manual shifting

Geartronic allows you to manually shift among

your vehicle's six forward speeds. Geartronic

can be selected at any time.

•To access the manual shifting position

from Drive (D), move the gear selector to

the right (to the area marked M in the illus-

tration.

•To return to the D position from the manual

shifting position, move the gear selector to

the left.

While driving

•If you select the manual shifting position

while driving, the gear that was being used

in the Drive position will also initially be

selected in the manual shifting position.

•Move the gear selector forward (toward

"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward

(toward "–") to shift to a lower gear.

•If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the

transmission will downshift one gear at a

time and will utilize the braking power of

the engine. If the current speed is too high

for using a lower gear, the downshift will

not occur until the speed has decreased

enough to allow the lower gear to be used.

•If you slow to a very low speed, the trans-

mission will automatically shift down.

Shiftlock – Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in the N position and the

vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 sec-

onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run-

ning) then the gear selector is locked.

To be able to move the gear selector from N to

another gear position, the brake pedal must be

depressed and the ignition must be in posi-

tion II, see page 84.

Geartronic–Sport mode (S)

This transmission mode provides sportier shift-

ing characteristics and enables a more active

driving style by making it possible to drive at

higher rpm in each gear before shifting up. The

engine also responds faster when the throttle

pedal is pressed.

To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move the

gear selector to the right. The transmission will

not switch to manual shifting mode until the

gear selector is moved forward or rearward

toward + or –.

Sport mode can be selected any time.

NOTE

•On vehicles equipped with Sport mode,

the transmission symbol in the main

instrument panel will change from D to

S when the gear selector is moved to

the manual shifting mode. If the gear

selector is moved toward "+" or "-", the

number of the gear currently being used

will be displayed, see page 77).

•Please be aware that using Sport mode

may result in a slight decrease in fuel

economy. Driving in D can help improve

fuel economy.

Geartronic–starting on slippery surfaces

Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual shift-

ing mode can help provide better traction when

starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so:

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the

gear selector to the right from the D posi-

tion to the manual shifting position. The

text in the instrument panel display will

change from D to 1.

2. Press the gear selector forward and

release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the

selector forward again and release it to

select 3rd gear.

2Certain models only

03 Your driving environment

Transmission

123

3. Release the brake pedal and press gently

on the accelerator pedal.

Shiftlock override

If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example

because of a dead battery, the gear selector

must be moved from the P position before the

vehicle can be moved3.

Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the

storage compartment behind the center

console to expose the small opening for

overriding the shiftlock system.

Insert the key blade into the opening. Press

the key blade down as far as possible and

keep it held down.

Move the gear selector from the P position.

For information on the key blade, see

page 61.

All Wheel Drive – AWD

Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent

All Wheel Drive, which means that power is

distributed automatically between the front

and rear wheels. Under normal driving condi-

tions, most of the engine's power is directed to

the front wheels. However, if there is any ten-

dency for the front wheels to spin, an electron-

ically controlled coupling distributes power to

the wheels that have the best traction.

NOTE

The message AWD disabled Service

required will be appear in the information

display if an electrical fault should occur in

the AWD system. A warning light will also

illuminate in the instrument panel. If this

occurs, have the system checked by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian.

3If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 119.

4Standard on certain models.

03 Your driving environment

Brakes

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Brake system

The brake system is a hydraulic system con-

sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob-

lem should occur in one of these circuits, it is

still possible to stop the vehicle with the other

brake circuit.

If the brake pedal must be depressed farther

than normal and requires greater foot pressure,

the stopping distance will be longer.

A warning light in the instrument panel will light

up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.

If this light comes on while driving or braking,

stop immediately and check the brake fluid

level in the reservoir.

NOTE

Press the brake pedal hard and maintain

pressure on the pedal – do not pump the

brakes.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the

reservoir or if a brake system message is

shown in the information display: DO NOT

DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician and

have the brake system inspected.

Brake pad inspection

On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi-

tion of the brake pads can be checked by rais-

ing the vehicle (see page 312 for information

about using the jack and removing a wheel)

and performing a visual inspection of the brake

pads.

WARNING

•If the vehicle has been driven immedi-

ately prior to a brake pad inspection, the

wheel hub, brake components, etc., will

be very hot. Allow time for these com-

ponents to cool before carrying out the

inspection.

•Apply the parking brake and put the

gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•Block the wheels standing on the

ground, use rigid wooden blocks or

large stones.

WARNING

•Use the jack intended for the vehicle

when changing a tire. For any other job,

use stands to support the vehicle.

•The jack should be kept well-greased

and clean, and should not be damaged.

•Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-

slippery surface.

•No objects should be placed between

the base of jack and the ground, or

between the jack and the attachment

bar on the vehicle.

•The jack must correctly engage the jack

attachment.

•Never allow any part of your body to be

extended under a vehicle supported by

a jack.

Brake lights

The brake lights come on automatically when

the brakes are applied.

Adaptive brake lights

The adaptive brake lights activate in the event

of sudden braking or if the ABS system is acti-

vated. This function causes an additional tail-

light on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to

help alert vehicles traveling behind.

The adaptive brake lights activate if:

03 Your driving environment

Brakes

125

•The ABS system activates for more than

approximately a half second

•In the event of sudden braking while the

vehicle is moving at speeds above approx-

imately 6 mph (10 km/h)

When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake

lights and additional taillights remain on for as

long as the brake pedal is depressed or until

braking force on the vehicle is reduced.

Power brakes function only when the

engine is running

The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure

which is only created when the engine is run-

ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the

engine switched off.

If the power brakes are not working, consider-

ably higher pressure will be required on the

brake pedal to compensate for the lack of

power assistance. This can happen for exam-

ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is

switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The

brake pedal feels harder than usual.

Water on brake discs and brake pads

affects braking

Driving in rain and slush or passing through an

automatic car wash can cause water to collect

on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a

delay in braking effect when the pedal is

depressed. To avoid such a delay when the

brakes are needed, depress the pedal occa-

sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc.

This will remove the water from the brakes.

Check that brake application feels normal. This

should also be done after washing or starting

in very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system

The brakes will be subject to severe strain

when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or

when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually

slower, which means that the cooling of the

brakes is less efficient than when driving on

level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,

shift into a lower gear and let the engine help

with the braking. Do not forget that if you are

towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to

a greater than normal load.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to

improve vehicle control (stopping and steering)

during severe braking conditions by limiting

brake lockup. When the system "senses"

impending lockup, braking pressure is auto-

matically modulated in order to help prevent

lockup that could lead to a skid.

The system performs a brief self-diagnostic

test when the engine has been started and

driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto-

matic test may be performed when the vehicle

first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several

times and a sound may be audible from the

ABS control module, which is normal.

Cleaning the brake discs

Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs

may result in delayed brake function. This delay

is minimized by cleaning the brake linings.

Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet

weather, prior to long-term parking, and after

the vehicle has been washed. Do this by brak-

ing gently for a short period while the vehicle is

moving.

Emergency Brake Assistance

EBA is designed to provide full brake effect

immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak-

ing. The system is activated by the speed with

which the brake pedal is depressed.

When the EBA system is activated, the brake

pedal will go down and pressure in the brake

system immediately increases to the maximum

level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal

in order to utilize the system completely. EBA

is automatically deactivated when the brake

pedal is released.

03 Your driving environment

Brakes

126

NOTE

•When the EBA system is activated, the

brake pedal will go down and pressure

in the brake system immediately increa-

ses to the maximum level. You must

maintain full pressure on the brake

pedal in order to utilize the system com-

pletely. There will be no braking effect if

the pedal is released. EBA is automati-

cally deactivated when the brake pedal

is released.

•When the vehicle has been parked for

some time, the brake pedal may sink

more than usual when the engine is

started. This is normal and the pedal will

return to its usual position when it is

released.

Symbols in the instrument panel

Symbol Specification

Steady glow – Check the brake

fluid level. If the level is low, fill

with brake fluid and check for

the cause of the brake fluid

loss.

Steady glow for two seconds

when the engine is started –

There was a fault in the brake

system's ABS function when

the engine was last running.

WARNING

If and come on at the same time

and the brake level is below the MIN mark

in the reservoir or if a brake system-related

message is shown in the information dis-

play: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician and have the brake system

inspected.

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

127

Electric parking brake

An electric parking brake has the same func-

tion as a manual parking brake.

NOTE

•A faint sound from the parking brake's

electric motor can be heard when the

parking brake is being applied. This

sound can also be heard during the

automatic function check of the parking

brake.

•The brake pedal will move slightly when

the electric parking brake is applied or

released.

Low battery voltage

If the battery voltage is too low, the parking

brake cannot be applied or released. Connect

an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too

low, see page 119.

Applying the electric parking brake

Parking brake control

1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

2. Push the control.

>The symbol in the instrument

panel flashes while the parking brake is

being applied, and glows steadily when

the parking brake has been fully applied.

3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that

the vehicle is at a standstill.

4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selec-

tor must be in position P.

NOTE

•In an emergency the parking brake can

be applied when the vehicle is moving

by holding in the control. Braking will be

interrupted when the accelerator pedal

is depressed or the control is released.

•An audible signal will sound during this

procedure if the vehicle is moving at

speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

Parking on a hill

•If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front

wheels so that they point away from the

curb.

•If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the

front wheels so that they point toward the

curb.

The parking brake should also be applied.

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

128

Releasing the electric parking brake

Parking brake control

Manual release

1. Fasten the seat belt.

2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and

press the START/STOP ENGINE button

(or press the START/STOP ENGINE but-

ton with a valid remote key in the passen-

ger compartment on vehicles with the

optional keyless drive).

3. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

4. Pull the parking brake control.

Automatic release

1. Start the engine.

NOTE

•For safety reasons, the parking brake is

only released automatically if the engine

is running and the driver is wearing a seat

belt.

•The electric parking brake will be

released immediately when the acceler-

ator pedal is pressed and the gear selec-

tor is in position D or R.

2. Fasten the seat belt.

3. Move the gear selector to position D or R

and press the accelerator pedal. The park-

ing brake will release when the vehicle

begins to move.

Heavy load uphill

A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the

vehicle to roll backward when the parking

brake is released automatically on a steep

incline. To help avoid this:

1. Keep the electric parking brake lever

pushed in with the left hand while shifting

into Drive with the right.

2. While pressing the throttle pedal to pull

away, release the parking brake lever only

after the vehicle begins to move.

Symbols

Symbol Specification

Read the message in the infor-

mation display

A flashing symbol indicates that

the parking brake is being

applied. If the symbol flashes in

any other situation then this

means that a fault has arisen.

Read the message on the infor-

mation display.

Messages

Park brake not fully released – A fault is pre-

venting the parking brake from being released.

Try to apply the parking brake and release it

several times. If the problem persists, contact

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

129

an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off

with this error message showing, a warning

signal sounds.

Parking brake not applied – A fault is pre-

venting the parking brake from being applied.

Try to apply the parking brake and release it

several times. If the problem persists, contact

an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off

with this error message showing, a warning

signal sounds.

Parking brake Service required – A fault has

occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a

Volvo workshop if the fault remains.

WARNING

If the vehicle must be parked before the fault

has been corrected, always put the gear

selector in P and turn the wheels so that

they point away from the curb if the vehicle

is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is

pointing downhill.

03 Your driving environment

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

Normally, when the accelerator pedal is

released while driving down hills, the vehicle's

speed slows as the engine runs at lower rpm

(the normal engine braking effect). However, if

the downhill gradient becomes steeper and if

the vehicle is carrying a load, speed increases

despite the engine braking effect. In this situa-

tion, the brakes must be applied to reduce the

vehicle's speed.

HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and

makes it possible to increase or decrease the

vehicle's speed on downhill gradients using

only the accelerator pedal, without applying

the brakes. The brake system functions auto-

matically to maintain a low and steady speed.

HDC is particularly useful when driving down

steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the

road may have slippery patches.

WARNING

HDC does not function in all situations, and

is a supplementary braking aid. The driver

has full responsibility for driving in a safe

manner.

Function

•HDC can be switched on and off with the

button in the center console. An indicator

light in the button illuminates when HDC is

activated.

•The indicator light in the instrument

panel illuminates and a message is dis-

played when the system is controlling the

vehicle's speed.

•HDC only functions when first or reverse

gears are selected (1 will be shown in the

instrument panel display when first gear is

selected).

NOTE

HDC cannot be activated if the gear selector

is the D position.

Using HDC

HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maxi-

mum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph

(7 km/h) in reverse. However, the accelerator

pedal can be used to select any speed that is

possible in first or reverse gears. When the

accelerator pedal is released, speed is quickly

reduced again to 6 mph (10 km/h) or 4 mph

(7 km/h), depending on the gear selected,

regardless of the hill's gradient. It is not nec-

essary to apply the brakes.

•The brake lights illuminate automatically

when HDC is controlling the vehicle's

speed.

•The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at

any time by applying the brakes.

HDC is deactivated when:

•The button on the center console is

pressed

•A gear higher than first gear is selected

•D is selected on vehicles with an automatic

transmission

HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this is

done while driving down a steep hill, the sys-

tem's braking effect will decrease gradually.

03 Your driving environment

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131

NOTE

Engine response to pressure on the accel-

erator pedal may be slightly slower than

normal when HDC is activated.

G000000

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Stability system..................................................................................... 134

Road sign information (RSI) ................................................................. 136

Cruise control........................................................................................ 138

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*............................................................ 140

Distance Alert* ..................................................................................... 151

City Safety™ ........................................................................................ 154

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*...... 160

Driver Alert System* ............................................................................. 168

Park assist*........................................................................................... 174

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* .......................................................... 178

Blind Spot Information System*............................................................ 182

DRIVER SUPPORT

04 Driver support

Stability system

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control

system (DSTC) consists of a number of func-

tions designed to help reduce wheel spin,

counteract skidding, and to generally help

improve directional stability.

CAUTION

A pulsating sound will be audible when the

system is actively operating and is normal.

Traction control (TC)

This function is designed to help reduce wheel

spin by transferring power from a drive wheel

that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the

opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).

TC is most active at low speeds.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and

cannot be switched off.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

This function helps maintain directional stabil-

ity, for example when cornering, by braking

one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows

a tendency to skid or slide laterally.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and

cannot be switched off.

Spin control (SC)

The spin control function is designed to help

prevent the drive wheels from spinning while

the vehicle is accelerating.

Engine Drag Control (EDC)

EDC helps keep the engine running if the

wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when

shifting down in the Geartronic manual shifting

mode or while using the engine's braking func-

tion on a slippery surface. If the engine were to

stop, power steering would not function, mak-

ing the vehicle more difficult to steer.

Trailer Stability Assist – TSA*

Trailer Stability Assist helps stabilize a vehicle

that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and

trailer have begun to sway. See page 284 for

more information.

This system is automatically deactivated if the

driver selects Sport mode.

Operation

Sport mode

The stability system is always activated and

cannot be switched off.

However, the driver can select Sport mode,

which offers more active driving characteris-

tics. In this mode, the engine management sys-

tem monitors movement of the accelerator

pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving by

allowing more lateral movement of the rear

wheels before DSTC is activated.

Under certain circumstances, such as when

driving with snow chains, or driving in deep

snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to

temporarily use Sport mode for maximum

tractive force.

If the driver releases pressure on the acceler-

ator pedal, DSTC will also activate to help sta-

bilize the vehicle.

To switch to Sport mode:

1. Press the My Car button in the center con-

sole control panel and select My XC60

DSTC in the menu.

2. Unselect the symbol and leave the menu

by pressing EXIT.

>This puts DSTC in Sport mode.

Sport mode remains active until the driver

switches it off in the menu or until the engine is

switched off. DSTC will return to normal mode

when the engine is restarted.

04 Driver support

Stability system

135

Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel

Symbol Message Description

DSTC Temporarily OFF The DSTC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. DSTC

reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required The DSTC system is not functioning properly.

•Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it.

•If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo work-

shop to have the system inspected.

and

"Message" Read the message in the information display

Steady glow for 2 secs. The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

Flashing symbol DSTC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

-Sport mode has been activated.

WARNING

The stability system is intended to help

improve driving safety. It supplements, but

can never replace, the driver's judgment

and responsibility when operating the vehi-

cle. Speed and driving style should always

be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

04 Driver support

Road sign information (RSI)

136

Introduction

Examples of readable road signs

Road Sign Information (RSI) is a feature that

helps the driver see road signs with the posted

speed limit.

If the vehicle passes a sign showing the speed

limit, this will be displayed in the center con-

sole.

WARNING

RSI does not function in all situations and is

only intended to provide supplementary

information.

The driver is always responsible for operat-

ing the vehicle safely.

Operation

Registered speed information

When RSI registers a road sign showing the

speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol

on the instrument panel.

Settings in MY CAR

Possible settings in MY CAR

Displaying the speed limit indication can be

deactivated. To do so:

•Deselect the alternative in MY CAR

Settings Car settings Road Sign

Information or cancel by pressing EXIT.

Speed alert

The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle

exceeds the posted speed limit by more than

3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the

symbol with the posted speed limit in the

instrument panel begins to flash.

To activate speed alert:

•Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR

Settings Car settings Speed alert

or cancel by pressing EXIT.

Limitations

RSI's camera has the same limitations as the

human eye. See page 164 for more informa-

tion about the camera's limitations.

Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit

(such as a sign with a town's name and the

permitted speed limit) will not be registered by

RSI.

Other factors that may interfere with RSI

include:

•Faded signs

•Signs located in a curve

04 Driver support

Road sign information (RSI)

137

•Twisted or damaged signs

•Obstructed signs

•Signs that are partially covered by snow,

ice, etc.

04 Driver support

Cruise control

138

Operation

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Set speed indicator (parentheses indicate

standby mode)

Engaging the cruise control function

Before a speed can be set, the cruise control

system must be engaged (put in standby

mode).

–Press the symbol (1).

>The symbol illuminates and the text

(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con-

trol is in standby mode.

NOTE

•Putting cruise control in standby mode

does not set a cruising speed.

•When cruise control is in standby mode,

the driver's seat belt must be fastened

before a cruising speed can be set.

Setting a speed

Use the or buttons set the vehicle's cur-

rent speed. The set speed is shown in the dis-

play.

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged at

speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

Adjusting the set speed

After a speed has been set, it can be increased

or decreased by using the or buttons.

1. Press and hold down or until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

> This will become the set speed when the

button is released.

2. Press or for approximately a half

second and release the button to increase

or decrease vehicle speed by approxi-

mately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

NOTE

•A temporary increase in speed by

pressing the accelerator pedal, for less

than 1 minute (e.g. when passing

another car), does not affect the current

cruise control setting. The vehicle will

automatically return to the previously

set speed when the accelerator pedal is

released.

•If one of the cruise control buttons is

kept depressed for more than approx.

1 minute cruise control is disengaged.

The engine must then be switched off in

order to reset cruise control.

Automatic deactivation

Cruise control is automatically deactivated

temporarily if one of the following occurs:

•If the speed drops below approximately

20 mph (30 km/h).

•When the brake pedal is depressed.

•If the gear selector is moved to position N.

04 Driver support

Cruise control

139

•During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.

•If the vehicle's speed is increased by using

the accelerator pedal for more than

1 minute.

The currently set speed will be saved in the

system's memory.

Temporary deactivation

The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise

control by pressing 0. The saved speed is

shown in brackets in the information display.

Resume set speed

If cruise control has been deactivated tempo-

rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The

vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set

speed.

WARNING

There may be a significant increase in speed

after the button has been pressed.

Deactivation

Cruise control is disengaged by pressing or

by switching off the engine. The set speed is

cleared.

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavy

traffic or when driving on wet or slippery

roads. Cruise control may not maintain set

speed on steep downgrades.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional

system designed to assist the driver by main-

taining a set speed or a set time interval to the

vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for use

on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as

on highways and other main roads.

When the driver has set the desired speed and

the time interval to the vehicle ahead, ACC

functions as follows:

•If there are no other vehicles in the lane

ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at the

set speed.

•If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower

moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys-

tem will adapt your vehicle's speed to help

maintain the set time interval to the vehicle

ahead. When there are no longer slower

moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will

accelerate to resume the set speed.

If ACC is switched off completely or in standby

mode and your vehicle comes too close to

another vehicle ahead, the driver will be

warned by the Distance Alert system (see

page 151).

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover

all driving situations and traffic, weather

and road conditions. The "Function"

section provides information about lim-

itations that the driver must be aware of

before using this feature.

•This system is designed to be a supple-

mentary driving aid. It is not, however,

intended to replace the driver's atten-

tion and judgement. The driver is

responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance and speed and must intervene if

Adaptive Cruise Control does not main-

tain a suitable speed or suitable dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead.

•Maintenance of ACC components may

only be performed by a trained and

qualified Volvo technician.

Function

Function overview1

Warning light, braking by driver required

Controls in steering wheel

Radar sensor in front grille

Adaptive Cruise Control consists of:

•A cruise control system to maintain a set

speed

•A system to maintain a set distance to the

vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a

time interval. For example, you can choose

to remain approximately 2 seconds behind

the vehicle ahead. The actual distance

required to maintain a 2-second interval

will vary according the speed of the vehi-

cles.

1The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-

sion avoidance system. The driver is

always responsible for applying the

brakes if the system does not detect

another vehicle.

•Adaptive Cruise Control does not react

to people or animals, or small vehicles

such as bicycles and motorcycles. It

also does not react to slow moving,

parked or approaching vehicles, or sta-

tionary objects.

•Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in

demanding driving conditions such as

city driving or other heavy traffic situa-

tions, in slippery conditions, when there

is a great deal of water or slush on the

road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor

visibility, on winding roads or on high-

way on- or off-ramps.

The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same

lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehi-

cle's speed is regulated by accelerating and

braking. The brakes may emit a sound when

they are being modulated by the adaptive

cruise control system. This is normal.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when the adaptive

cruise control system modulates the

brakes. Do not rest your foot under the

brake pedal.

The ACC system is designed to smoothly reg-

ulate speed. However, the driver must apply

the brakes in situations that require immediate

braking. This applies when there are great dif-

ferences in speed between vehicles, or if the

vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.

WARNING

Due to limitations in the radar sensor, brak-

ing may occur unexpectedly or not at all,

see page 146.

Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active

mode at any permitted speed. However, if the

vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h)

or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, ACC

disengages (goes into standby mode) and will

no longer modulate the brakes2. The driver will

then have to maintain a safe distance to the

vehicle ahead.

WARNING

When Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby

mode or is switched off completely, the

brakes will not be modulated automatically.

The driver must assume full control over the

vehicle.

Warning light—driver braking required

Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force

that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the

vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations

requiring more brake force than ACC can pro-

vide and if the driver does not apply the brakes,

an audible signal from the Collision Warning

system will sound and warning light will illumi-

nate (see page 161) in the windshield to alert

the driver to react.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light

contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the

driver is not looking straight ahead may

make the visual warning signal in the wind-

shield difficult to see.

2Does not apply to vehicles with the optional Queue Assist. See page 144 for more information.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehi-

cles detected by the radar sensor, see

page 146. In some cases there may be no

warning or the warning may be delayed. The

driver should always apply the brakes when

necessary.

Steep inclines and/or heavy loads

ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly level

roads. The system may have difficulty main-

taining the correct distance to a vehicle ahead

on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a

heavy load or is towing a trailer. In these situa-

tions, the driver should always be prepared to

apply the brakes if necessary.

Operation

Controls and display

Resume previous settings, increase speed

(each additional press increases speed by

1 mph (approximately 2 km/h).

Standby mode on/off

Set time interval

Put in active mode and set a speed

Set speed (parentheses indicate standby

mode)

Time interval while it is being set

Time interval after it has been set

Putting ACC in standby mode

Before ACC can be used to regulate speed

and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it must

first be put in standby mode.

To do so:

Press .

The symbol appears in the display and

parentheses (---) indicate that ACC is in

standby mode.

NOTE

The driver's door must be closed and the

driver's seat belt must be fastened before

ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv-

er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's

door is opened, ACC will return to standby

mode.

Setting a speed

Once ACC has been put in standby mode, use

the or buttons to store (set) the vehicle's

current speed. This puts the system in active

mode. The set speed, for example 55 mph, is

shown in the display.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143

When the symbol on the

left side of the display

changes to , the radar sen-

sor has detected another

vehicle ahead. The distance

to a vehicle ahead is only

regulated when this symbol ( ) is illumi-

nated.

Changing the set speed

After a speed has been set, it can be increased

or decreased by using the or buttons.

Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the

vehicle's speed changes by 5 mph

(approximately 8 km/h).

When the system is in active mode, the but-

ton has the same function as , but results in

a smaller increase in speed.

NOTE

•If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control

buttons is pressed for more than

approximately one minute, ACC will be

deactivated. The engine must then be

switched off and restarted to reset ACC.

•In some situations Adaptive Cruise

Control cannot be put in active mode.

Cruise control Unavailable is shown

in the display, see page 149.

Setting a time interval

The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be

increased by pressing and decreased by

pressing . The current time interval is shown

briefly in the display following adjustment.

Different time intervals can be

selected and are shown in the

display as 1–5 horizontal bars.

The greater the number of

bars, the longer the time inter-

val. One bar represents a time

interval of approximately

1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds.

At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle

ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval

slightly. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as

smoothly as possible, ACC allows the time

interval to vary considerably in certain situa-

tions.

WARNING

•Only use a time interval that is suitable

in current traffic conditions.

•A short time interval gives the driver lim-

ited reaction time if an unexpected sit-

uation occurs in traffic.

The number of bars indicating the selected

time interval are shown while the setting is

being made and for several seconds afterward.

A smaller version of the symbol is then shown

to the right in the display. The same symbol is

also displayed when Distance Alert is in active

mode, see page 151 .

Standby mode (temporary deactivation)

Press to temporarily deactivate cruise con-

trol (put it in standby mode). The set speed, for

example 55 mph, is then shown in parenthe-

ses.

The previously set speed and time interval are

resumed by pressing .

WARNING

There may be a significant increase in speed

after the button has been pressed.

When ACC is in active mode, the vehicle’s

speed increases by approximately 1 mph

(1 km/h) each additional time is pressed.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Standby mode due to action by the driver

ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in

standby mode:

•if the brakes are applied

•if the gear selector is moved to N

•if the driver drives at a speed higher than

the set speed for more than 1 minute.

In this happens, the driver will have to regulate

the vehicle's speed.

NOTE

If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for

a short time, such as when passing another

vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and

is reactivated when the pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode

Adaptive cruise control is linked to other sys-

tems such as the stability and traction control

system (DSTC). If this system is not functioning

properly, adaptive cruise control is automati-

cally deactivated and will go into standby

mode.

In the event of automatic deactivation, an audi-

ble signal will sound and the message Cruise

control Cancelled is shown in the display.

The driver must then intervene and adapt the

vehicle's speed to the surrounding traffic and

regulate the distance to the vehicle ahead.

An automatic switch to standby mode may be

caused if:

•engine speed (rpm) is too high/low

•the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph

(30 km/h)3

•the wheels lose traction

•brake temperature is high

•the radar sensor is obstructed by, for

example, wet snow or rain.

Resuming the set speed

If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactivated

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel keypad. The vehicle will return to the

most recently set speed.

WARNING

The vehicle may accelerate quickly after

has been pressed if its current speed is

considerably lower than the set speed.

Passing another vehicle

If your vehicle’s speed is being regulated by

ACC and the driver indicates that he/she would

like to pass the vehicle ahead by using the

left turn signal, ACC can assist by accelerating

briefly.

This function is active at speeds above approx-

imately 45 mph (70 km/h).

WARNING

Please be aware that this function will also

cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in

certain situations other than passing

another vehicle, for example using the left

turn signal to indicate a lane change or a

turn toward a highway exit at speeds above

approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

Queue Assist

Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is

linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis-

sion.

Queue Assist consists of the following func-

tions:

•Enhanced speed interval (including when

the vehicle is at a complete stop or is mov-

ing at speed below 18 mph (30 km/h))

•Automatic standby mode when ACC

changes target vehicles

•No automatic braking when at a standstill

•The parking brake is applied automatically

3Does not apply to vehicles equipped with the optional Queue Assist

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145

Please note that the lowest speed that can be

set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can

maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle

ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist con-

sists of the following features:

Enhanced speed interval

NOTE

The driver's door must be closed and the

driver's seat belt must be fastened before

ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv-

er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's

door is opened, ACC will return to standby

mode.

Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval

to the vehicle ahead at any permissible speed,

including a complete stop.

In order to activate ACC at speeds below

18 mph (30 km/h):

•The vehicle ahead must be within a rea-

sonable distance (not farther away than

approx. 100 ft/30 meters)

•The lowest speed that can be selected is

18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also

help maintain the set time interval to the

vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including a

complete stop.

During short stops (less than approximately

3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehicle

will begin moving again automatically as soon

as the vehicle ahead begins to move.

If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle

ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automati-

cally go into standby mode.

The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in

one of the following ways:

•By pressing

•By accelerating up to at least 3 mph

(4 km/h). ACC will then resume following

the vehicle ahead.

Your vehicle will then resume following the

vehicle ahead at the set time interval.

NOTE

ACC can remain active and keep your vehi-

cle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes. After

4 minutes have elapsed, the parking brake

will be engaged and ACC will go into

standby mode.

To reactivate ACC, the driver must release

the parking brake (see page 128).

Automatic standby mode when ACC

changes target vehicles

If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be

a stationary vehicle ahead

The following only applies at speeds below

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h):

If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle that

the radar sensor has detected) from a moving

vehicle to a stationary one, the system will

apply the brakes in your vehicle.

WARNING

At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC

will not react to a stationary vehicle and

apply the brakes but will instead accelerate

to the previously set speed. The driver must

actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle.

ACC disengages and goes into standby mode

if:

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph

(15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if the

target object is a stationary vehicle or some

other type of object such as e.g., a speed

bump.

•Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph

(15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so

that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to

follow.

No automatic braking when at a

standstill

In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply

the brakes and go into standby mode while the

vehicle is not moving. This means that the

driver will have to apply the brakes.

This happens if:

•The driver presses the brake pedal

•The parking brake is activated

•The gear selected is moved to P,N or R

•The driver presses the button to put

ACC in standby mode

The parking brake is applied

automatically

In certain situations, ACC will apply the parking

brake in order to continue keeping the vehicle

at a standstill.

This happens if:

•The driver opens the door or takes off

his/her seat belt

•DSTC is put in Sport mode (see page 134)

•ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for

more than 2 minutes

•The engine has been switched off

•The brakes have overheated

Turning ACC off completely

•From standby mode, press once.

•From active mode, press twice.

The set speed and time interval are then

cleared from the system's memory and cannot

be resumed by pressing .

The radar sensor and its limitations

In addition to being used by ACC, the radar

sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see

page 151) and Collision Warning with Full

Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection (see

page 160). This sensor is designed to detect

cars or larger vehicles driving in the same

direction as your vehicle, in the same lane.

WARNING

Accessories or other objects, such as extra

headlights, must not be installed in front of

the grille.

Modification of the radar sensor could make

its use illegal.

The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles

ahead is impeded:

•if the radar sensor is obstructed and can-

not detect other vehicles, for example in

heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are

obscuring the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the area in front of the radar sensor

clean.

•if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi-

cantly different from your own speed.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147

Situations where ACC may not function

optimally

WARNING

•The radar sensor has a limited field of

vision. In some situations it may detect

a vehicle later than expected or not

detect other vehicles at all.

•If ACC is not functioning properly,

cruise control will also be disabled.

Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink)

In certain situations, the radar sensor can-

not detect vehicles at close quarters, for

example a vehicle that suddenly enters the

lane between your vehicle and the target

vehicle.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or

vehicles not driving in the center of the lane

may remain undetected.

In curves, the radar sensor may detect the

wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target

vehicle.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover

all driving situations and traffic, weather

and road conditions. The "Function"

section provides information about lim-

itations that the driver must be aware of

before using this feature.

•This system is designed to be a supple-

mentary driving aid. It is not, however,

intended to replace the driver's atten-

tion and judgement. The driver is

responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance and speed and must intervene if

Adaptive Cruise Control does not main-

tain a suitable speed or suitable dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead.

•Maintenance of ACC components may

only be performed by a trained and

qualified Volvo technician.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-

sion avoidance system. The driver is

always responsible for applying the

brakes if the system does not detect

another vehicle.

•Adaptive Cruise Control does not react

to people or animals, or small vehicles

such as bicycles and motorcycles. It

also does not react to slow moving,

parked or approaching vehicles, or sta-

tionary objects.

•Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in

demanding driving conditions such as

city driving or other heavy traffic situa-

tions, in slippery conditions, when there

is a great deal of water or slush on the

road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor

visibility, on winding roads or on high-

way on- or off-ramps.

Fault tracing and actions

If the message Radar blocked See manual is

displayed, this means that the radar signals

from the sensor have been obstructed and that

a vehicle ahead cannot be detected.

This, in turn, means that the functions of the

ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning

System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian

Detection will not function.

The table lists possible causes for this mes-

sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the

radar.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149

Cause Action

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with

the radar signals.

No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect

the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that

it is no longer obstructed.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

- Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected.

- Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed/distance.

- Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

-Turn on DSTC to enable

Cruise

ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC is in Sport mode. Switch DSTC to

normal operating mode, see page 134 for more information.

ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC's Spin control is switched off. See

page 134 for more information.

-Cruise control Cancelled ACC has been automatically switched off.

The driver must regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the vehicle ahead.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Message Description

-Cruise control Unavailable ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to:

•high brake temperature

•the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)

Radar blocked See manual ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot

detect other vehicles.

See page 146 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Cruise control Service

required

ACC is not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Press Brake To hold + an

audible signal

The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep

the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll.

The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal

will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

–Below 20 mph Only follow-

ing

This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle

ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

Introduction

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol and is a function that provides information

about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Distance Alert is active at speeds above

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time interval

information is only given for a vehicle that is

driving ahead of your vehicle in the same direc-

tion. No information is provided for vehicles

driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a

standstill.

Amber warning light1.

An amber warning light in the windshield glows

steadily if your vehicle is closer to the one

ahead than the set time interval.

NOTE

Distance Alert only monitors distance to the

vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control

is in standby mode or off.

WARNING

Distance Alert only indicates the distance to

the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the

speed of your vehicle.

Operation

Press the button in the center instrument panel

to switch this function on or off. The indicator

light in the button illuminates when the function

is on.

Depending on the optional equipment

selected, there may not be room for a Distance

Alert button in the center console. In this case,

the function is controlled through the menu

system. Press MY CAR and go to Settings

Car settings Distance alert On/Off.

Setting a time interval

Controls and display

Time interval: Increase/decrease

Time interval: On, while it is being set

Time interval: On, after it has been set

Press to increase the interval or to

decrease it.

1The illustration is schematic - certain details may vary from model to model

04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Five different time intervals

can be selected and are

shown in the display as 1–5

horizontal bars. The greater

the number of bars, the longer

the time interval. One bar rep-

resents approximately

1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is

approximately 2.5 seconds.

The number of bars indicating

the selected time interval are

shown while the setting is

being made and for several

seconds afterward. A smaller

version of the symbol is then

shown to the right in the dis-

play. The same symbol is displayed when

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is activated.

NOTE

•The higher your vehicle’s speed, the

greater the distance to the vehicle

ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a

given time interval.

•The set time interval is also used by

Adaptive Cruise Control, see page 142.

WARNING

Only use a time interval that is suitable in

current traffic conditions.

Limitations

Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor

used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col-

lision Warning system. See page 146 for more

information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light

contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the

driver is not looking straight ahead may

make the visual warning signal in the wind-

shield difficult to see.

WARNING

•Bad weather or winding roads may

affect the radar sensor’s capacity to

detect vehicles ahead.

•The size of the vehicle ahead, such as a

motorcycle, may also make it difficult to

detect. This may result in the warning

light illuminating at a shorter distance

than the one that has been set, or that

the light will not come on at all.

04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

- Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

Radar blocked See manual Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and

cannot detect other vehicles. See page 146 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service

required

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning

properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

154

Introduction

City Safety™1 is a support system designed to

help the driver avoid low speed collisions when

driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic.

City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s

speed is below approximately 2 mph (4 km/h).

This means that City Safety™ will not react if

your vehicle approaches another vehicle at

very low speed, for example, when parking.

The function is active at speeds up to approx-

imately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists the driver

by applying the brakes automatically, thereby

avoiding or helping to reduce the effects of a

collision.

City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late

as possible to help avoid unnecessary activa-

tion.

City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if a

low-speed collision is imminent. However, the

system will not intervene in situations where

the driver actively steers the vehicle or applies

the brakes, even if a collision cannot be avoi-

ded. This is done in order to always give the

driver’s actions highest priority.

City Safety™ activates in situations where the

driver has not applied the brakes in time, which

means that the system cannot help the driver

in all situations.

City Safety™ should not be used to alter the

way in which the driver operates the vehicle.

The driver should never rely solely on this sys-

tem to safely stop the vehicle.

Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not

be aware of City Safety™ except when the

system intervenes when a low-speed collision

is imminent.

If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional

Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and

Pedestrian Detection system, the two systems

interact. For more information about the Colli-

sion Warning with Auto-brake system, see

page 160.

WARNING

•City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to

the driver. It can never replace the

driver’s attention to traffic conditions or

his/her responsibility for operating the

vehicle in a safe manner.

•City Safety™ does not function in all

driving situations or in all traffic, weather

or road conditions.

WARNING

•City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles

traveling in the same direction as your

vehicle and does not react to small vehi-

cles, bicycles or motorcycles or to peo-

ple or animals.

•City Safety™ is not activated when your

vehicle is backing up.

•City Safety™ functions at speeds up to

30 mph (50 km/h). This system can help

prevent a collision if the difference in

speed between your vehicle and the

vehicle ahead is less than 9 mph

(15 km/h). If the difference in speed is

greater, a collision cannot be avoided

but the speed at which the collision

occurs can be reduced. The driver must

apply the vehicle’s brakes for full brak-

ing effect.

•City Safety™ will not intervene in a

potential collision situation if the vehicle

is being driven actively. The driver is

always responsible for maintaining a

safe distance to a vehicle or object

ahead.

1City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

04 Driver support

City Safety™

155

Function

Location of the laser sensor in the windshield2

City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you

using a laser sensor mounted in the upper sec-

tion of the windshield. If a collision is imminent,

City Safety™ will automatically apply the

brakes, which may feel like hard braking.

If the difference in speed between your vehicle

and the vehicle ahead is more than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™ alone

cannot prevent a collision from taking place.

The driver must apply the brakes to help avoid

a collision or reduce its effect.

When the function activates and applies the

brakes, a message will appear in the informa-

tion display to indicate that the system is/has

been active.

NOTE

•When City Safety™ applies the brakes,

the brake lights will illuminate.

•In cases where City Safety™ has stop-

ped the vehicle, the system will then

release the brakes. The driver must

apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at

a standstill.

Using City Safety™

NOTE

The City Safety™ function is activated auto-

matically each time the engine has been

switched off and restarted.

On and Off

In certain situations, it may be desirable to

switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving

in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc.

may obscure the hood and windshield.

When the engine is running, City Safety™ can

be switched off as follows:

Press My Car in the center console control

panel and go to Settings Car settings

Driver support systems City Safety.

Select Off.

If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will

reactivate when the engine is restarted.

WARNING

The laser sensor emits light when the igni-

tion is in mode II or higher, even if City

Safety™ has been switched off.

To switch City Safety™ on again:

•Follow the same procedure as for switch-

ing City Safety™ off but select On.

Limitations

The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed

to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles

ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and dark-

ness.

2The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model

04 Driver support

City Safety™

156

WARNING

The laser sensor has certain limitations and

its function may be reduced (or it may not

function at all) in conditions such as heavy

rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or thick,

blowing dust or snow. Condensation, dirt,

ice or snow on the windshield may also

interfere with the sensor’s function.

Objects such as warning flags hanging from

long objects on the roof or accessories such as

auxiliary lights or protective arches on the front

of the vehicle that are higher than the hood may

also impede the sensor’s function.

Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increa-

ses on slippery road surfaces, which may

reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a colli-

sion. In situations like this, the DSTC system

(see page 134) will help provide the best pos-

sible braking capacity and stability.

City Safety™ emits a laser beam and measures

the way in which the light is reflected. There-

fore, vehicles or objects with low-reflective sur-

faces may not be detected. Normally, the

license plate and taillight reflectors give the

rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient reflec-

tive surfaces to be detected.

NOTE

•Keep the windshield in front of the laser

sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. See

page 155.

•Snow or ice on the hood deeper than

2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen-

sor. Keep the hood free of ice and snow.

•Do not mount or in any way attach any-

thing on the windshield that could

obstruct the laser sensor.

Troubleshooting

If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in

the information display, this indicates that the

City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in

some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead of

you, which means that the system is not func-

tioning.

However, this message will not be displayed in

all situations in which the sensor is obstructed.

For this reason, the driver must ensure that the

area of the windshield in front of the sensor is

always kept clean.

The following table shows some of the situa-

tions that can cause the message to be dis-

played and suggested actions.

Cause Action

The area of the

windshield in front of

the sensor is dirty or

covered by ice or

snow.

Clean the wind-

shield or remove the

ice/snow.

The laser sensor's

field of view is

obstructed.

Remove the

obstruction.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

157

CAUTION

If a crack, scratch or stone chip should

occur in the section of the windshield in

front the laser sensor, contact a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician to repair

or replace the windshield (see the illustra-

tion showing the location of the sensor on

page 155). Failing to do so may result in

reduced City Safety™ functionality.

To help prevent reduced functionality,

please also observe the following:

•Before the windshield is replaced, con-

tact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the

correct windshield is ordered and

installed. If the wrong type of windshield

is used, this may cause City Safety™ to

function improperly or not at all. Volvo

recommends the use of only Genuine

Volvo Replacement Windshields.

•When replacing windshield wipers, use

the same type or ones approved by

Volvo.

The laser sensor

The upper decal describes the laser beam's

classification and contains the following text:

Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly

with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class

1M laser product.

The lower decal describes the laser beam's

physical data and contains the text:

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with

FDA performance standards for laser products

except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice

No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001

The laser beam's physical data is listed in the

following table:

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse length 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal × verti-

cal)

28° × 12°

NOTE

The function of aftermarket laser detectors

may be affected by City Safety's laser sen-

sor.

WARNING

The laser sensor emits light when the igni-

tion is in mode II or higher, even if City

Safety™ has been switched off.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

158

WARNING

Eye injury may occur if any of the following

points are not followed:

•It is essential that all pertinent instruc-

tions be followed when handling laser

instruments. Testing, repairing, remov-

ing, adjusting and/or replacing any

components in the laser sensor may

only be done by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

•Do not remove the laser sensor (includ-

ing removal of the lenses). A laser sen-

sor that has been removed belongs to

laser class 3B according to standard

IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser class 3B

present a risk of injury to the eyes.

•The laser sensor’s connector must be

disconnected before the sensor is

removed from the windshield.

•The laser sensor must be mounted in

place on the windshield before con-

necting the sensor’s connector.

•Do not view the laser sensor (which

emits spreading, invisible laser beams)

with optical instruments from a distance

of less than 4 inches (100 mm).

Symbols and messages in the display

When City Safety™ automatically applies the

brakes, one or more of the symbols in the main

instrument panel may illuminate and its asso-

ciated message will be displayed.

A text message can be erased by pressing

briefly on the OK button on the turn signal

lever.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

159

Symbol Message Meaning/action required

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction.

•Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s).

For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see page 155.

City Safety Service required City Safety™ is not functioning.

•If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and

Pedestrian Detection is designed to assist the

driver if there is a risk of a collision with a

pedestrian, a vehicle ahead that is at a stand-

still or one that is moving in the same direction

as your vehicle.

Collision Warning consists of the following

three functions:

•Collision Warning warns the driver of a

potential collision situation.

•Brake Support helps the driver brake effi-

ciently in a critical situation.

•Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati-

cally if a collision with a pedestrian or

another vehicle cannot be avoided and the

driver does not apply the brakes in time or

steer around the person/vehicle. Auto-

brake can help prevent a collision or

reduce the speed at which a collision

occurs.

Since Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake

and Pedestrian Detection is activated in cir-

cumstances where the driver should have

begun braking much sooner, the system will

not be able to assist the driver in all situations.

This system is designed to activate as late as

possible to help avoid unnecessary interven-

tion.

The system should not be used in such a way

that the driver changes his/her way of operat-

ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on the

system, the chances of an accident eventually

occurring increase considerably.

The Collision Warning and City Safety™ sys-

tems supplement each other. See page 154 for

detailed information about City Safety™.

WARNING

No automatic system can be guaranteed to

function 100% correctly in all situations. For

that reason, never test the Auto-brake sys-

tem by driving toward a person or object.

This could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

•Collision Warning does not work in all

driving, traffic, weather and road condi-

tions. It does not react to vehicles not

traveling in the same direction as your

vehicle.

•Collision Warning does not react to ani-

mals.

•Warnings are only provided when the

risk of collision is high. The "Function"

section provides information about lim-

itations that the driver must be aware of

before using Collision Warning.

•Collision Warning will not provide a

warning or brake the vehicle for pedes-

trians at speeds above 50 mph

(80 km/h).

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

WARNING

•Collision Warning will not provide a

warning or brake the vehicle for pedes-

trians in darkness or in tunnels, even if

there is street lighting in the area.

•The auto-brake function can help pre-

vent a collision or reduce the speed at

impact but the driver should always

apply the brakes for the best possible

braking effect, even if auto-brake is

actively applying the brakes.

•Never wait for a collision warning. This

system is designed to be a supplemen-

tary driving aid. It is not, however,

intended to replace the driver's atten-

tion and judgement. The driver is

responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance and speed, even when the colli-

sion warning system is in use.

•Maintenance of the Collision Warning

system's components must only be

performed by a trained and qualified

Volvo technician.

Function

Function overview

Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk

Radar sensor

Camera

Collision Warning

The radar sensor and the camera work

together to detect a pedestrian, stationary

vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the

same direction as your vehicle. If there is a risk

of collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian, the

driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light

and an audible warning signal. Collision warn-

ing is active at speeds above 3 mph (4 km/h).

Brake Support

If the risk of collision continues to increase after

the collision warning has been given, Brake

Support is activated. Brake Support prepares

the brake system to react quickly, and the

brakes are applied slightly. This may be expe-

rienced as a light tug.

If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking

effect will be provided. Brake Support also

increases brake force if the system determines

that the driver has not applied adequate pres-

sure on the brake pedal.

Auto-brake

If a collision is imminent and the driver has not

applied the brakes or begun to steer around the

vehicle or pedestrian, the auto-brake function

is activated without the driver pressing the

brake pedal. Full brake force is applied to help

reduce the vehicle’s speed when the collision

occurs or limited brake force is applied if this

is sufficient to avoid the collision.

NOTE

The auto-brake and brake support functions

are always on and cannot be turned off.

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Operation

Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on the

center console control panel and using the

menus displayed.

Activating/deactivating both warning

signals

To switch Collision Warning's audible and vis-

ual signals on or off at the same time, press

MY CAR on the center console control panel

and go to Settings Car settings Driver

support systems Collision Warning. If

Collision Warning is on, the system will perform

a self-test each time the engine is started by

briefly illuminating the warning light. See page

191 for a description of the menu system.

When the engine is switched on, the Collision

Warning setting that was being used when it

was switched off will be the default setting.

NOTE

The auto-brake and pedestrian detection

features are always on, even if the audible

and visual warning signals have been deac-

tivated.

Activating/deactivating the audible

warning signal only

The audible warning signal can be activated/

deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the center

console control panel and going to Settings

Car settings Driver support systems

Warning sound if risk of collision.

Setting a warning distance

This setting determines the distance at which

the visual and audible warnings are triggered.

Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing MY

CAR on the center console control panel and

going to Settings Car settings Driver

support systems Collision Warning

Warning distance.

The warning distance determines the level of

sensitivity used by the system. The warning

distance Long provides an earlier warning.

Begin by using Long and if the system gives

too many warnings, try changing to Normal.

WARNING

•The setting Short should only be used

in situations where traffic is light and

moving at low speeds.

•Collision Warning alerts the driver to the

risk of a collision but this function can-

not reduce the driver’s reaction time.

•For Collision Warning to be as effective

as possible, it is recommended that Dis-

tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see

page 151.

NOTE

•When Adaptive Cruise Control is used,

the warning light and signal will be used

by that function, even if the warnings

provided by Collision Warning have

been deactivated by the driver.

•In situations where traffic is moving at

considerably different speeds, or if the

vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn-

ings may be considered to be late, even

if the setting Long has been selected.

Checking settings

The current Collision Warning settings can be

checked by pressing MY CAR on the center

console control panel and going to Settings

Car settings Driver support systems

Collision Warning.

Limitations

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-

trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is

not looking straight ahead may make the visual

warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.

For this reason, always activate the audible

warning signal.

Slippery driving conditions increase braking

distance, which can reduce the system's

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163

capacity to avoid a collision. In these condi-

tions, the ABS and DSTC systems provide the

best possible braking effect while helping to

maintain stability.

NOTE

The visual warning signal may be temporar-

ily disengaged in the event of high passen-

ger compartment temperature due to strong

sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible

warning signal will be used, even if it has

been deactivated in the menu system.

WARNING

•In certain situations, the system cannot

provide warnings or warnings may be

delayed if traffic conditions or other

external factors make it impossible for

the radar sensor or camera to detect a

pedestrian or a vehicle ahead.

•Warnings may not be provided if the

distance to the vehicle ahead is short,

or if movements of the steering wheel/

brake pedal are great, such as during

active driving.

•The sensor system has a limited range

for pedestrians and provides warnings

and braking effect most effectively at

speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For sta-

tionary or slow-moving vehicles, the

system functions best if your vehicle’s

speed is below approximately 45 mph

(70 km/h).

•Warnings for stationary or slow-moving

vehicles may not be provided in dark

conditions or in poor visibility.

The Collision Warning system uses the same

radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For

more information on the radar sensor and its

limitations, see page 146.

NOTE

If warnings are given too frequently, the

warning distance can be reduced (see

page 162). This causes the system to pro-

vide later warnings, which decreases the

total number of warnings provided.

WARNING

•The system is not activated at speeds

under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). There-

fore, it will not brake your vehicle if you

approach a vehicle ahead at very low

speed, such as when parking.

•The driver's actions always have high-

est priority and override the Collision

Warning system. This means that the

system will not intervene in situations

where the driver is actively steering,

braking or pressing the accelerator

pedal, even if a collision is imminent.

•When Auto-brake has prevented a col-

lision with a stationary object, your vehi-

cle will remain at a standstill for approx.

1.5 seconds. If your vehicle has been

braked for a moving vehicle ahead, your

vehicle's speed will be reduced to the

same speed as that vehicle's.

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The camera’s limitations

The camera is used by Collision Warning with

Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see

page 168), and Lane Departure Warning (see

page 171).

NOTE

•To help protect the camera in very hot

conditions, it may be temporarily

switched off for approximately 15

minutes after the engine has been

started.

•Keep the section of the windshield in

front of the camera clean and free of ice,

snow, or condensation.

WARNING

•The camera has the same limitations as

the human eye. In other words, its

“vision is impaired” by adverse weather

conditions such as heavy snowfall,

dense fog, etc. These conditions may

reduce the function of systems that

depend on the camera or cause these

systems to temporarily stop function-

ing.

•Never place any objects, decals, etc.,

on the windshield in front of the camera.

This could reduce or block the camera’s

function, and could cause one or more

of the systems that utilize the camera to

stop functioning.

•Strong sunlight, reflections from the

road surface, ice or snow covering the

road, a dirty road surface, or unclear

lane marker lines may drastically reduce

the camera’s capacity to detect the side

of a lane, a pedestrian or another vehi-

cle.

Pedestrians

The system cannot identify all pedestrians

The Collision Warning system can only identify

and detect a pedestrian who is standing

upright. This person can be standing still, walk-

ing or running.

This means that the system has to be able to

identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, legs,

the upper and lower parts of the body and a

person's pattern of movement when walking or

running.

If parts of the body are not visible to the cam-

era, the system cannot detect the pedestrian.

The following conditions apply:

•In order to detect a pedestrian, the system

must have a full view of the person's entire

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

body and the person must be at least

32 in. (80 cm) tall.

•The system cannot detect a pedestrian

carrying a large object.

•The camera's capacity to see a pedestrian

at dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for

the human eye.

•The camera's function is deactivated and

will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or

in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in

the area.

WARNING

•Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake

and Pedestrian Detection is designed to

be a supplementary driving aid. It is not,

however, intended to replace the driv-

er's attention and judgement. The driver

is always responsible for operating the

vehicle in a safe manner.

•The system cannot detect all pedes-

trians in all situations, such as in dark-

ness/at night and cannot detect parti-

ally hidden pedestrians, people who are

less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm) tall, or

people wearing clothing that obscures

the contours of their bodies.

Fault tracing and actions

If the message Windscreen Sensors

blocked is displayed, this means that the cam-

era is obscured and cannot detect pedestrians,

vehicles or road marker lines in front of the

vehicle.

This, in turn, means that Collision Warning with

Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection,

Lane Departure Warning, and Driver Alert Con-

trol will not have full functionality.

The table lists possible causes for this mes-

sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Cause Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered

with ice or snow.

Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the

camera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the

display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register

visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this

surface cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

Collision Warning Off Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will dis-

appear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK button.

Collision Warning Unavail-

able

Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate

the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Auto braking was acti-

vated

Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by

snow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see

page 164 for more information on the camera’s limitations.

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167

Symbol Message Description

Radar blocked See man-

ual

Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for

example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other

vehicles, see page 146 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service

required

Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The Driver Alert System is designed to help a

driver who may be becoming fatigued or who

is inadvertently leaving the lane.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-

ent functions that can be switched on together

or separately.

•Driver Alert Control (DAC)

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see

page 171

When one or both of the functions has been

switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti-

vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of

40 mph (65 km/h).

The function deactivates if the vehicle's speed

goes under 37 mph (60 km/h).

Both functions use a camera that is dependent

on the road/lane being clearly marked by pain-

ted lines on each side.

WARNING

The Driver Alert System does not function in

all situations and is designed to be a sup-

plementary aid. It is not, however, intended

to replace the driver’s attention and judge-

ment.

Driver Alert Control (DAC)–

introduction

This function is intended to alert the driver if

his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the

driver is distracted or fatigued.

NOTE

The camera has certain limitations, see

page 146.

A camera monitors the painted lines marking

the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and

compares the direction of the road with the

driver’s movements of the steering wheel. The

driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow

the lane smoothly.

DAC is designed to help detect a slowly chang-

ing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be

used on main roads and is not meant for use in

city traffic.

WARNING

•DAC is not intended to extend the dura-

tion of driving. Always plan breaks at

regular intervals to help remain alert.

•In certain cases, fatigue may not affect

the driver’s behavior. In situations of

this type, no warning will be provided.

Therefore, it is important to take breaks

at regular intervals, regardless of

whether or not DAC has given a warn-

ing.

Limitations

In certain situations, DAC may provide warn-

ings even if the driver’s driving pattern has not

become erratic.

•if the driver is testing the LDW function

•in strong crosswinds

•on grooved road surfaces.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169

Operating DAC

Certain settings can be made from the menu

system controlled from the center instrument

panel.

The current system status can be checked on

the trip computer’s display by using the but-

tons on the left steering wheel lever.

Thumb wheel. Turn this wheel until Driver

Alert is displayed. The second line shows

the alternatives Off Driver Alert Standby

<40 mph (Driver Alert Standby <65 km/

h), Unavailable or the level ( number of

bars) will be displayed.

OK button. Confirms and erases a mes-

sage in the display.

Activating DAC

Press MY CAR in the center instrument panel

and go to Car settings Driver Alert and

select On. See page 191 for more information

on the menu system.

The function is activated when the

vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph

(65 km/h). The display will show level

markings of 1–5 bars, where a low

number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high

number of bars indicates stable driving.

If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the

driver will be alerted by an audible signal and

the message Driver Alert, Time for a break is

displayed. The warning will be repeated after a

short time if the driving pattern remains the

same.

WARNING

•An alert should be taken seriously since

it is sometimes difficult for a driver to

realize that he/she is fatigued.

•In the event of a warning or if the driver

feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible

in a safe place and rest.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

-Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.

-Driver Alert Standby <40

mph (Driver Alert Standby

<65 km/h)

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).

-Driver Alert Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines.

Driver Alert The function is analyzing the driver’s driving pattern. The number of bars varies from 1–5, where a low

number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a

break

The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area

of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 164 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message

remains in the display.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)–

introduction

This function is designed to help reduce the

risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle

leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off

the road or into the opposite lane. LDW con-

sists of a camera that monitors the lane’s side

marker lines. The driver is alerted by an audible

signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line

or the road’s center dividing line.

Operation and function

LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the

button on the center console. A light in the but-

ton illuminates when the function is on.

The trip computer display shows Lane Depart

Warn Standby <40 mph (Lane Depart Warn

Standby <65 km/h) when the function is in

standby mode.

When LDW is in standby mode, the function is

activated automatically after the camera has

monitored the road’s side marker lines and the

vehicle’s speed exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h).

Lane Depart Warn Unavailable will be dis-

played.

If the vehicle’s speed falls below 37 mph

(60 km/h), LDW will return to standby mode

and Driver Alert Standby <40 mph will be

displayed.

If the camera can no longer monitor the road’s

side marker lines, Lane Depart Warn

Unavailable will be displayed.

If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane’s

left or right side marker lines, the driver will be

alerted by an audible signal.

No warning signal will be given in the follow-

ing situations:

•The turn signal is being used

•The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1

•The throttle pedal is pressed quickly1

•If the steering wheel is moved quickly1

•In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s

body to sway

See page 164 for information on the camera’s

limitations.

WARNING

The driver will only be warned once for each

time the wheels cross a marker line. No

alarm will be given if a marker line is

between the wheels.

1When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Settings

Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be

made in the menu system by pressing My

Car. Go to Settings Car settings Driver

support systems Lane Departure

Warning.

There are two alternatives:

On at start-up: This selection switches LDW

on each time the engine is started. Otherwise,

the system will be in the mode that it was in

when the engine was switched off.

Increased sensitivity: This selection increa-

ses the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be

given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations

apply. When this setting is being used, the sys-

tem only needs to monitor lane marker lines on

one side of the vehicle to change status to

Lane Depart Warn Available.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

Lane departure warning ON/Lane

departure warning OFF

The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

-Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

-Lane Depart Warn Standby <40

mph (Lane Depart Warn Standby

<65 km/h)

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph

(65 km/h).

-Lane Depart Warn Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173

Symbol Message Description

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean

the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 164 for information on the camera’s

limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service required The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the

message remains in the display.

04 Driver support

Park assist*

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The park assist system is designed to assist

you when driving into parking spaces, garages,

etc. It utilizes ultrasound sensors in the front

bumper and rear bumper(s) to measure the dis-

tance to a vehicle or an object that may be

close to the front or rear of your vehicle. An

audible signal and symbols in the audio sys-

tem’s display indicate the distance to the

object.

NOTE

A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated

with the vehicle's electrical system will be

included in the measurement of the availa-

ble space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

Park Assist is an information system, NOT a

safety system. This system is designed to

be a supplementary aid when parking the

vehicle. It is not, however, intended to

replace the driver's attention and judge-

ment.

Function

Park assist button

The system is activated automatically when the

vehicle is started. The indicator light in the but-

ton in the center console illuminates when the

system is on.

•The front park assist system is active from

the time the engine is started until the vehi-

cle exceeds a speed of approximately

10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the

vehicle is backing up.

•Rear park assist is active when the engine

is running and reverse gear has been

selected.

Activating/deactivating

The system is activated automatically when the

vehicle is started.

–Press the Park assist button on the center

console to temporarily deactivate the sys-

tem(s).

> The indicator light in the button will go

out when the system has been deacti-

vated.

Park assist will be automatically reactivated the

next time the engine is started, or if the button

is pressed (the indicator light in the button will

illuminate).

NOTE

Park assist is disengaged automatically

when the parking brake is applied.

04 Driver support

Park assist*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175

Signals from the park assist system

View in the display (warning for objects front left/

right rear)

Visual indicator

The audio system’s display gives an overview

of the vehicle’s position in relation to a

detected object.

The marked sectors in the display indicate that

one or more of the sensors has detected an

object. The closer the car symbol comes to a

sector, the closer the vehicle is to the object.

If the infotainment system is switched off, the

park assist system will not be able to provide a

visual indicator. An audible signal will still be

provided.

Audible signal

The Park Assist system uses an intermittent

tone that pulses faster as you come close to an

object, and becomes constant when you are

within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object

in front of or behind the vehicle. If there are

objects within this distance both behind and in

front of the vehicle, the tone alternates

between front and rear speakers.

NOTE

The level of the audible signal can be low-

ered/raised with the infotainment volume

control. The level can also be set in the MY

CAR menu system. See page 191 for a

description of the menu system.

If the volume of another source from the audio

system is high, this will be automatically low-

ered.

Rear park assist

The distance monitored behind the vehicle is

approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal

comes from the rear speakers.

The system must be deactivated when towing

a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted

carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park

assist system's sensors.

NOTE

Rear park assist is deactivated automati-

cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine

trailer wiring is used.

04 Driver support

Park assist*

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front park assist

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle

is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig-

nal comes from the audio system's front

speakers.

It may not be possible to combine auxiliary

headlights and front park assist since these

lights could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE

Front park assist is deactivated when the

parking brake is applied and or when the

gear selector is in the P position.

Faults in the system

If the information symbol illuminates and Park

assist syst Service required is shown on the

information display, this indicates that the sys-

tem is not functioning properly and has been

disengaged. Consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the park assist

system may give unexpected warning sig-

nals that can be caused by external sound

sources that use the same ultrasound fre-

quencies as the system. This may include

such things as the horns of other vehicles,

wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,

motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does

not indicate a fault in the system.

Cleaning the sensors

G031402

Location of the front sensors

Location of the rear sensors

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to

ensure that they work properly. Clean them

04 Driver support

Park assist*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177

with water and a suitable car washing deter-

gent.

Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause

incorrect warning signals.

NOTE

If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,

snow, or ice, this could result in false warn-

ing signals from the park assist system.

04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The Park Assist Camera uses the display in the

center console to show the area behind the car

while you are backing up.

PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-screen

image to indicate the direction that the vehicle

will take as it moves rearward, which helps

simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight

space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle.

NOTE

A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated

with the vehicle's electrical system will be

included in the measurement of the availa-

ble space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

•PAC is designed to be a supplementary

aid when parking the vehicle. It is not,

however, intended to replace the

driver’s attention and judgment.

•The camera has blind spots where it

cannot detect objects or people behind

the vehicle.

•Pay particular attention to people or ani-

mals that are close to the vehicle.

Function

The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and

if a person or animal should suddenly appear

from the side.

PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the open-

ing handle.

The camera has built-in electronics that help

reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image

shown on the screen is as natural as possible.

This may cause some objects on the screen to

“lean,” which is normal.

WARNING

Objects seen on the screen may be closer

than they appear to be.

Ambient lighting conditions

The camera automatically monitors the ambi-

ent lighting conditions behind the vehicle and

constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may

cause the brightness and quality of the image

on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitivity to light

is increased in dark conditions or in bad

weather, which may affect image quality.

If the image on the screen seems too dark,

brightness can be increased with the thumb

wheel on the lighting panel.

NOTE

In order to function properly, the camera

lens should always be kept clean. This is

particularly important in bad weather. Keep

the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.

04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179

Using PAC

Activation

PAC is activated when the gear selector is

moved to R if the system is selected in the MY

CAR menu system or by pressing the CAM

button in the center console. See page 191 for

a description of the menu system.

If the Volvo Navigation System (VNS) is in use,

PAC will automatically override the navigation

system to show the camera's image on the

screen instead of navigation information, for as

long as reverse gear is selected.

Zoom

The camera can be useful when attaching a

trailer. Press CAM to zoom in on the trailer

hitch (and press this button again to return to

the normal camera view).

With the camera zoomed in on the trailer hitch,

a guiding line showing the hitch's path toward

the trailer will be projected. This feature can be

activated in the MY CAR menu. See page

191 for a description of the menu system. The

guiding lines for the wheels (see the following

section "Guiding lines") and for the trailer hitch

cannot be displayed at the same time.

If the camera shows an enlarged (zoomed)

image, turn TUNE counterclockwise, or press

EXIT, CAM or OK to return to a normal view.

Deactivation

Move the gear selector from R to another posi-

tion. There is a slight delay in the PAC system,

which means that the view from behind the

vehicle will remain on the screen for approxi-

mately 15 seconds after the gear selector has

been moved from the R position or until the

vehicle reaches a forward speed of 6 mph

(10 km/h). The screen will then revert to the

mode that it was in before R was selected and

will, for example, display navigation system

information.

NOTE

If any button on the center console control

panel is pressed, the camera image will dis-

appear from the display. Pressing CAM will

return the camera image to the display.

Guiding lines

The lines on the screen are projected as if they

were a path on the ground behind the vehicle

and are affected by the way in which the steer-

ing wheel is turned. This enables the driver to

see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she

turns the steering wheel while backing up.

NOTE

When backing up with a trailer, the guiding

lines show the path that the vehicle will

take, not the trailer.

04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Keep in mind that the image on the screen

only shows the area behind the vehicle. The

driver must always watch for people, ani-

mals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides of

the vehicle when turning while backing up.

Marker lines

The PAC system's lines

Marker line for a 1-foot (30-centimeter)

zone behind the vehicle

Marker line for the clear back-up zone

"Wheel tracks"

The solid line (1) indicates a zone within 1 ft

(30 centimeters) of the rear bumper.

The dashed line (2) indicates the clear zone of

approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the

bumper. These lines also indicate the outmost

limits that any object (door mirrors, corners of

the body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle,

even when it turns.

The "wheel tracks" (3) between the side marker

lines show where the wheels will roll and can

extend up to approximately 10.5 ft (3.2 m)

behind the bumper if there are no objects in the

way.

Vehicles equipped with Park Assist

Colored fields (4-one per sensor) indicate distance

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park

Assist system, the distance to an object will be

indicated more exactly and colored markers in

the display indicate which of the sensor(s) has

detected the object.

The markers change color (from yellow to

orange to red) as the vehicle comes closer to

the object.

Marker (color) Distance to

object

Yellow more than 5 ft (1.5 m)

Orange 5–1 ft (0.3–1.5 m)

Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m)

Settings

Press OK/MENU when a normal camera view

is displayed and make the desired settings.

Parking camera settings

•Mark Guide lines to display the sidelines

while backing up.

•Mark Distance bars to display the inter-

secting lines while backing up.

Activating the system

•Mark Automatic activation of rear

camera to activate PAC each time reverse

gear is selected.

•Mark Off to turn off PAC completely.

Summary

•The camera is activated when the gear

selector is moved to R (this can be

changed in the MY CAR menu) and the

04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181

image is shown on the center console dis-

play.

•When backing up, two solid lines are pro-

jected on the screen to show the path that

the vehicle's rear wheels will take. These

lines are affected by movements of the

steering wheel. The vehicle's approximate

outer dimension are shown by two dashed

lines.

•The graphic lines will not be displayed

when backing up with a trailer that is con-

nected to the vehicle's electrical system.

•Objects on the ground that are closer than

1 ft (30 centimeters) cannot be detected by

the camera.

•The camera is active for approx.

5 seconds after the gear selector is moved

to R or until the vehicle's speed exceeds

6 mph (10 km/h).

•The optional Park Assist sensors and the

parking camera work together and infor-

mation from the sensors is shown graphi-

cally on the display.

•The graphic lines shown on the screen

when the vehicle backs up can be disabled

in the settings menu.

•Manual zoom can be selected in the MY

CAR menu.

•The system can be switched off by press-

ing CAM. By default, the system is acti-

vated when the gear selector is moved to

R. This setting can be changed in the MY

CAR menu.

•If there are two cameras installed on the

vehicle*, to switch between cameras, turn

TUNE (at least one of the cameras has to

be active), press CAM repeatedly or use

the center console controls. If the front

camera is on, it overrides the optional park

assist system's visual indicator but there

will still be an audible signal.

Limitations

Even if a fairly small section of the screen image

appears to be obstructed, this may mean that

a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hid-

den and objects there may not be detected

until they are very near the vehicle.

NOTE

Bicycle carriers or other accessories moun-

ted on the tailgate may obstruct the cam-

era's field of view.

Keep in mind

•Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and

snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to

avoid scratching the lens.

•Clean the lens regularly with warm water

and a suitable car washing detergent.

04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

G031404

BLIS camera

Indicator light

BLIS symbol

The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an

information system that indicates the presence

of another vehicle moving in the same direction

as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind

area."

CAUTION

The BLIS system should only be repaired by

a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

WARNING

•BLIS is an information system, NOT a

warning or safety system.

•BLIS does not eliminate the need for

you to visually confirm the conditions

around you, and the need for you to turn

your head and shoulders to make sure

that you can safely change lanes.

•As the driver, you have full responsibility

for changing lanes in a safe manner.

The system is based on digital camera tech-

nology. The cameras are located beneath the

side-view mirrors.

When one (or both) of the cameras have

detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to

approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of

your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.

(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see

the illustration, the indicator light in the door

panel illuminates. The light will glow continu-

ously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the

blind area.

NOTE

The door panel indicator light illuminates on

the side of the vehicle where the system has

detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is

passed on both sides at the same time, both

lights will illuminate.

BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the

driver if a fault should occur with the system.

For example, if one or both of the system's

cameras are obscured, a message (see the

table on page 184) will appear in the informa-

tion display in the instrument panel. If this

occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,

the system can be temporarily switched off (for

instructions, see page 184).

Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx.

31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft.

(3 meters)

04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183

When does BLIS function

The system functions when your vehicle is

moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

When you pass another vehicle:

The system reacts when you pass another

vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)

faster than that vehicle.

When you are passed by another vehicle:

The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by

another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph

(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.

WARNING

•BLIS does not function in sharp curves.

•BLIS does not function when your vehi-

cle is backing up.

•If you are towing a wide trailer, this may

prevent the BLIS cameras from detect-

ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes.

How BLIS functions in daylight and

darkness

Daylight

BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi-

cles. The system is designed to help detect

motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,

motorcycles, etc.

Darkness

BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding

vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a

vehicle in the blind area must have its head-

lights on. This means, for example, that the

system will not detect a trailer without head-

lights that is being towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

•BLIS does not react to cyclists or

mopeds.

•BLIS does not react to vehicles that are

standing still.

•The BLIS cameras have the same limi-

tation as the human eye. In other words,

their "vision is impaired" by adverse

weather conditions such as heavy

snowfall, intense light directly into the

camera, dense fog, etc.

Limitations

In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)

may illuminate even when there are no other

vehicles in the area monitored by the system.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa-

sionally even when there are no other vehi-

cles in the blind area, this does not indicate

a fault in the system.

In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.

Service required will be displayed.

The following are several examples of situa-

tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may

illuminate even when there are no other vehi-

cles in the area monitored by the system.

Light reflected from a wet road surface

04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,

smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on

a highway

Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low

on the horizon

Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses

In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera

lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped

clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.

CAUTION

•Clean the lenses carefully to avoid

scratching.

•The lenses are electrically heated to

help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen-

tly brush away snow from the lenses.

Switching BLIS on and off

BLIS is automatically activated when the igni-

tion is switched on. The indicator lights will

provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.

•The system can be switched off by press-

ing the BLIS button in the center console

(see the illustration). The indicator light in

the button goes out when the system is

switched off, and a text message is dis-

played.

•BLIS can be switched on again by pressing

the button. The indicator light in the button

will illuminate and a new text message will

be displayed. Press the OK button (see

page 189) to erase the message.

Depending on the vehicle's optional equip-

ment, there may not be space for the BLIS but-

ton in the center console. In this case, BLIS can

be switched on and off in the menu system by

pressing MY CAR and going to Settings

Car settings BLIS. See page 191 for a

description of the menu system.

BLIS system messages

Text in the dis-

play

System status

Blind spot syst.

Service required

BLIS not functioning

properly. Contact an

authorized Volvo

service technician.

Blind spot syst.

Camera blocked

BLIS camera

obscured. Clean the

lenses.

Blind-spot info

system ON

BLIS system on

04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185

Text in the dis-

play

System status

Blind-spot info

system OFF

BLIS system off

Blind spot syst.

Reduced function

The BLIS cameras'

function has been

reduced due to

weak or impaired

data transfer

between the BLIS

system's cameras

and the vehicle's

electrical system.

The cameras will

reset themselves

when this data

transfer has

returned to normal.

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Volvo Sensus........................................................................................ 188

Menus and messages........................................................................... 189

The MY CAR menus.............................................................................. 191

Climate system..................................................................................... 197

Trip computer........................................................................................ 205

Active chassis system–Four C*............................................................. 207

Passenger compartment convenience................................................. 208

COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Volvo Sensus

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

Center console control panel

Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV:

see the separate VNS manual for operating

instructions.

Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL): see

page 214 .

Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR: see

page 191.

Park assist camera - CAM*: see page 178.

Climate system: see page 197.

Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your

vehicle providing a coordinated interface for a

number of functions such as the individualized

settings that can be made in the MY CAR

menus, the climate and infotainment systems

as well as other options such as the park assist

camera(s), etc.

Volvo Sensus uses the screen in the center

instrument panel to display information and

selections are made using this panel’s controls

and buttons. Certain features can also be con-

trolled using the steering wheel keypad.

Press MY CAR to present all of the available

settings related to driving and/or controlling

the vehicle, such as City Safety, setting the

clock, lock settings, etc.

Press RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, NAV* and CAM*

to change a source and to activated systems

or functions such as AM, FM1, CD, DVD, Blue-

tooth, navigation* and the park assist camera

See the respective sections in this manual for

more detailed information about your vehicle's

various features and functions.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189

Main instrument panel

Information display and menu controls

OK – access to the list of messages and

message confirmation.

Thumb wheel – browse among menus and

options in the list of functions.

RESET – reset the active function. Used in

certain cases to select/activate a function,

see the explanation under each respective

function.

The menus shown on the information displays

in the instrument panel are controlled with the

left lever. The menus shown depend on ignition

mode. Press OK to erase a message and return

to the menus.

Menu overview

Driving distance on current fuel reserve

Average

Instantaneous

Average speed

Current speed in mph (Canadian models

only)

Engine oil level*

Calibrate tire pressure*

Messages

When a warning, information or indicator sym-

bol comes on, a corresponding message

appears on the information display. An error

message is stored in a memory list until the

fault is rectified.

Press OK to acknowledge and scroll among

the messages.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are

using the trip computer, the message must

be read and confirmed by pressing OK

before the previous activity can be

resumed.

Message Description

Stop engineAStop and switch off

the engine as soon

as possible. Serious

risk of damage.

Contact an author-

ized Volvo work-

shop.

Stop safelyAStop and switch off

the engine. Serious

risk of damage.

Contact an author-

ized Volvo work-

shop.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

190

Message Description

Service urgentAHave the vehicle

checked by an

authorized Volvo

workshop immedi-

ately.

Service requiredAHave the vehicle

checked by an

authorized Volvo

workshop as soon

as possible.

See manualARead the owner's

manual.

Book time for

maintenance

Time to book service

at an authorized

Volvo retailer.

Time for regular

maintenance

Time for regular

service at an author-

ized Volvo work-

shop. The timing is

determined by the

number of miles

driven, number of

months since the

last service, engine

running time.

Message Description

Maintenance over-

due

If the service inter-

vals are not fol-

lowed, the warranty

does not cover any

damaged parts.

Contact an author-

ized Volvo workshop

for service.

Temporarily OFFAA function has been

temporarily

switched off and is

reset automatically

while driving or after

starting again.

Low battery Power

save mode

The audio system is

switched off to save

current. Charge the

battery.

AThere will also be a system-specific part of this message

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

191

Introduction

The menu system provides access to

menus for operating many of the vehi-

cle's functions, such as setting the

clock, door mirrors, locks, etc.

Navigating in the menus is done using the but-

tons on the center console control panel or with

the right-side steering wheel keypad.

Some of the features mentioned in this section

are optional.

Operation

Center console controls

Center console controls for menu navigation

Press MY CAR to access the My Car

menus.

Press OK/MENU to select a highlighted

selection or to store a certain function in

the system's memory.

Turn to navigate up/down among menu

selections.

EXIT

EXIT functions

The results of a short press on EXIT vary,

depending on where the cursor is and where

you are in the menu structure.

•Reject and incoming phone call

•The current function will be cancelled

•Characters that have been entered will be

erased

•The most recent selection will be cancelled

•Go back (upward) in the menu system

A long press will take you to the highest menu

level (the main view), giving you access to all of

the vehicles/menus. See page 215 for addi-

tional information.

Steering wheel keypad

The keypad varies according to the vehicle's

equipment

Turn the thumb wheel to go up/down

among menu selections. Press the thumb

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

192

wheel to make a selection or store a func-

tion in the system's memory.

EXIT.

Paths

The current menu level is displayed at the

upper right of the center console display. Menu

paths are displayed as follows, for example:

Settings Car settings Lock settings

Doors unlock Driver door, then all

The following is an example of how to set a

function in the menu system:

1. Press the MY CAR button on the center

console control panel.

2. Navigate to a menu, for example

Settings using the thumb wheel (1) and

press it to open a submenu.

3. Navigate to the desired submenu such as

Car settings.

4. Navigate to Lock settings and press the

thumb wheel to open a new submenu.

5. Navigate to Doors unlock and press the

thumb wheel to open a submenu with alter-

natives that can be selected.

6. Use the thumb wheel to move to the

desired choice and press the thumb wheel

to put an X in the box.

7. Finish by exiting the menu system either

one step at a time with short presses on

EXIT (2) or press and hold this button to

return to the main menu.

The OK/MENU (2), EXIT (4) and control (3) in

the center console can be used in the same

way.

MY CAR

When the MY CAR symbol has been selected,

the following menu alternatives are displayed.

•My XC60

•Support systems

•Settings

My XC60

MY CAR My XC60

The display shows all of the vehicle's driver

support systems, which can be activated/

deactivated here.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

193

Driver support systems

MY CAR Support systems

(MY CAR > Support systems)

The screen shows the current status (settings)

for the vehicle's driver support systems.

Menu settings

The following pages list the main menus/sub-

menus and possible selections.

Car key memory

See pages 88 and 57 for more information.

Lock settings

Automatic door locking

Doors unlock

All doors

Driver door, then all

Keyless entry

All doors

Any door

Doors on same side

Both front doors

Audible confirmation

See page 57 and 64 for more information.

Reduced Guard

Activate once

Ask when exiting

See page 71 for more information.

Side mirror settings

Fold mirrors

Tilt left mirror

Tilt right mirror

See page 107 for more information.

Light settings

Door lock confirmation light

Unlock confirmation light

See page 57 for more information.

Approach light duration

Off

30 sec

60 sec

90 sec

See page 59 for more information.

Home safe light duration

30 sec

60 sec

90 sec

See page 101 for more information.

Triple indicator

See page 99 for more information.

Daytime running lights

See page 94 for more information.

Active bending lights

See page 97 for more information.

Tire pressure system

Warns if tyre pressure is too low

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

194

Calibrate tire pressure

See page 316 for more information. This sys-

tem is optional in Canada.

Steering wheel force

High

Medium

Low

See page 207 for more information.

Reset car settings

This feature returns the "Car settings" menu to

the original factory settings.

MY CAR Settings Driver support

systems

Collision Warning

Warning distance

Long

Normal

Short

Warning sound

See page 162 for more information.

Lane Departure Warning

On at start-up

Increased sensitivity

See page 171 for more information.

Road Sign Information

Off

Speed alert

Off

DSTC

See page 134 for more information.

City Safety

See page 154 for more information.

BLIS

See page 182 for more information.

Distance Alert

See page 151 for more information.

Driver Alert

See page 168 for more information.

MY CAR Settings System options

Set/change time

See page 82 for more information.

Time format

12 h

24 h

Screen saver

The contents of the screen are replaced by

another image if this selection is marked. The

contents of the screen will be displayed again

if one of the buttons (1-4) is pressed, see

page 191.

Uncheck the selection to turn the screen saver

off.

Language

Select the language for menu texts.

Show help text

This displays help texts for the current menu.

Distance and fuel units

MPG (UK)

MPG (US)

km/l

l/100km

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

195

See page 205 for more information about the

trip computer.

Temperature unit

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Select the temperature scale to be displayed

by the climate control unit.

Volume levels

Voice output volume

Front park assist volume

Rear park assist volume

Phone ringing volume

Reset system options

This feature returns the "System options"

menu to the original factory settings.

MY CAR Settings Voice settingsA.

AOnly on vehicles with the optional Volvo Navigation System

and/or a Bluetooth-connected cell phone

Voice tutorial

Select this menu alternative and press OK for

spoken information about how the system

works.

Voice command list

Phone commands

Phone

Phone call contact

Phone dial number

Navigation commands

Navigation

Navigation repeat instruction

Navigation go to address

General commands

Help

Cancel

Voice tutorial

The menu alternatives under Phone

commands show examples of the voice com-

mands available when a cell phone is con-

nected to the Bluetooth hands-free system.

See page 251 for more detailed information.

The menu alternatives under Navigation

commands show examples of the voice com-

mands available for the optional Volvo

Navigation System. Refer to the navigation

system's manual for detailed information.

Voice user setting

Default setting

User 1

User 2

Two user profiles can be set, which is useful if

more than one person uses voice commands

regularly. Default setting resets the factory

settings.

Voice training

User 1

User 2

Voice training enables the system to become

familiar with the driver's voice and pronuncia-

tion. A list of phrases is presented on the

screen for the driver to read aloud. When the

system has registered the driver's pronuncia-

tion, no additional phrases will be displayed.

After completed voice training, select User 1

or User 2 in Voice user setting to set the sys-

tem to the current user.

Voice output volume

•A volume control will be displayed. To set

the volume level:

1. Adjust the volume using the thumb wheel

2. Test the setting by pressing OK

3. Store the setting and leave the menu by

pressing EXIT.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

196

Voice POI list

Edit list

The navigation system has a large number of

points of interest (POIs). A maximum of 30 POIs

can be stored in this list.

The menu alternative Voice POI list is only

displayed if the vehicle is equipped with the

optional Volvo Navigation System. Refer to the

navigation system's manual for detailed infor-

mation.

MY CAR Settings Audio settings

See page 214 for more information about the

infotainment system.

MY CAR Settings Climate settings

Automatic blower adjustment

Normal

High

Low

Recirculation timer

Automatic rear defroster

Interior air quality system

Reset climate settings

This feature returns the "Climate settings"

menu to the original factory settings.

For more information about the climate sys-

tem, see page 197.

MY CAR Settings Favourites (FAV)

See page 220 for more information about this

feature.

MY CAR Settings Information

Number of keys

See page 56 for more information.

VIN number

See page 359 for more information.

DivX® VOD code

See page 236 for more information.

Bluetooth software version in car

See page 224 for more information.

Map and software version

Refer to the optional Volvo Navigation System

manual for more information.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197

Introduction

Air conditioning

The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate

Control (ECC). The climate control system

cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the pas-

senger compartment.

NOTE

•The air conditioning can be switched

off, but to ensure the best possible cli-

mate comfort in the passenger com-

partment and to prevent the windows

from misting, it should always be on.

•In warm weather, a small amount of

water may accumulate under the car

when it has been parked. This water is

condensation from the A/C system and

is normal.

Sensor location

•The sunlight sensor is located on the top

side of the dashboard.

NOTE

The sunlight sensor monitors which side of

the car that is most exposed to sunlight.

This can mean that the temperature may

differ between the right and left-side air

vents, even if the temperatures set for both

sides of the passenger compartment are the

same.

•The temperature sensor for the passenger

compartment is located below the climate

control panel.

•The outside (ambient) temperature sensor

is located on the door mirror.

•The humidity sensor* is located in the inte-

rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with

clothing or other objects.

Side windows and laminated panoramic

roof

To ensure that the air conditioning works opti-

mally, the side windows, and the laminated

panoramic roof should be closed.

Fog on the inside of the windows

The defroster function should be used to

remove fog or mist from the inside of the win-

dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com-

mercially available window washing spray will

also help prevent fogging or misting.

Temporary shut-off of the air

conditioning

The air conditioning is momentarily disen-

gaged during full-throttle acceleration or when

driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a

temporary increase in cabin temperature.

Ice and snow

Always keep the air intake grille at the base of

the windshield free of snow.

Climate system maintenance

Special tools and equipment are required to

maintain and carry out repairs on the climate

system. Work of this type should only be done

by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

Refrigerant

Volvo cares about the environment. The air

conditioning system in your car contains a

CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance

will not deplete the ozone layer. The air condi-

tioning system contains 1.8 lbs (820 g) of

R134a. The systems uses PAG oil.

Passenger compartment filter

Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at

the recommended intervals. Please refer to

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

198

your Warranty and Service Records Informa-

tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for these intervals.

The filter should be replaced more often when

driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The

filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should

always be replaced with a new one.

NOTE

There are different types of cabin air filters.

Ensure that the correct type is installed.

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)

A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles

in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels

of odors and contaminants entering the vehi-

cle. The air quality sensor detects increased

levels of contaminants in the outside air. When

the air quality sensor detects contaminated

outside air, the air intake closes and the air

inside the passenger compartment is recircu-

lated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. The

filter also cleans recirculated passenger com-

partment air.

NOTE

Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter

replacement intervals.

Materials used in the cabin

The materials used in the cabin have been

developed to help minimize the amount of dust

and make the cabin easier to keep clean. All

floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning.

Use car cleaning products recommended by

Volvo. See also the information beginning on

page 352.

Menu settings

The default settings for four of the climate sys-

tem's functions can be changed in the menu

system.

•Blower speed in automatic mode.

•Recirculation timer for passenger com-

partment air.

•Automatic rear window defrosting.

•The optional Interior Air Quality System

(IAQS).

The functions can also be returned to factory

settings in the menu system.

See page 191 for a description of the menu

system.

Air distribution

The incoming air is distributed from a number

of different vents in the passenger compart-

ment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO

mode.

If desired, air distribution can be controlled

manually, see page 204.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

199

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

Air vents in the door pillars

Closed

Open

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

Direct the vents into the passenger compart-

ment to help maintain the desired temperature

in the rear seat.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Electronic climate control, ECC

Temperature control, driver's side

Heated driver's seat*

Defroster (maximum effect)

Blower

Manual air distribution—floor

Manual air distribution—dashboard air

vents

Manual air distribution—defroster

Heated rear window and door mirrors, see

page 108

Heated front passenger's seat*

Temperature control, passenger's side

Recirculation

AUTO

A/C on/off

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201

Climate system controls

Heated front seats*

The current seat temperature is shown in the cen-

ter console display

Press the button once for the

highest heat level – three indi-

cator lights come on.

Press the button twice for a

lower heat level – two indica-

tor lights come on.

Press the button three times for the lowest heat

level – one indicator light comes on.

Press the button four times to switch off the

heat – no indicator lights come on.

Seat heating will automatically switch off when

the engine is switched off.

Heated rear seats*

Heat control for the outboard seating positions

is done in the same way as for the front seats.

Blower control

Turn the control clockwise to

increase or counterclockwise

to decrease the blower

speed. If AUTO is selected,

blower speed will be regula-

ted automatically and this will

override manual adjustment.

NOTE

If the blower is turned off completely, the air

conditioning is disengaged, which may

result in fogging on the windows.

Air distribution

Manual air distribution—defroster

Manual air distribution—dashboard air

vents

Manual air distribution—floor

The figure consists of three buttons. When a

button is pressed, the corresponding figure will

appear in the display with an arrow indicating

which manual air flow has been selected (see

1Not available on models equipped with the optional integrated booster cushions

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

202

the following illustration). See also the air dis-

tribution chart on page 204.

Air distribution is shown in the center console dis-

play

Auto

The function automatically

regulates cooling, heating,

blower speed, recirculation,

and air distribution to main-

tain the chosen temperature.

If you select one or more man-

ual functions, the other func-

tions continue to be controlled automatically.

The air quality sensor is engaged and all man-

ual settings are switched off when AUTO is

pressed. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE.

Blower speed in automatic mode can be set

under Climate settings Automatic blower

adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal

or High.

NOTE

Selecting the lowest blower speed may

increases the risk of fog forming on the win-

dows.

Temperature control

The temperatures on the

driver and passenger sides

can be set separately. When

the vehicle is started, the

most recent setting is

resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by

selecting a higher/lower temperature than

the actual temperature required.

A/C – ON/OFF

When the indicator light in the

button is on, the air condition-

ing is controlled automati-

cally. This cools/heats and

dehumidifies the incoming air.

When the indicator light in the

button is off, the air condition-

ing is disengaged. Other functions are still con-

trolled automatically. When maximum

defroster is selected, the air conditioning sys-

tem is set for maximum blower speed and

dehumidification.

Defroster

This function defrosts/de-ices

the windshield and front side

windows. The indicator light

in the defroster button lights

when the function is active.

•Blower speed increases automatically and

the air conditioning will switch on (if not

already on and if the passenger compart-

ment blower is not turned off) to dehumid-

ify the air in the passenger compartment.

Air conditioning can be switched off by

pressing the AC button.

•Recirculation will not function while defrost

is engaged.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 203

The climate system will return to its previous

settings when the defroster function is

switched off.

Recirculation/air quality system

Recirculation

This function can be used to

shut out exhaust fumes,

smoke, etc., from the passen-

ger compartment. The air in

the passenger compartment

is then recirculated, i.e., no air

from outside the car is taken

into the car when this function is activated. The

indicator light in the button will illuminate when

recirculation is selected.

If the air in the car recirculates for too long,

there is a risk of condensation forming on the

insides of the windows, especially in winter.

Timer

The timer function minimizes the risk of fog-

ging, or stale air when the recirculation function

is selected by automatically switching off the

function after a certain length of time, depend-

ing on the ambient temperature. Activate/

deactivate the function under Climate

settings Recirculation timer. See page

191 for a description of the menu system.

NOTE

When Defroster is selected, recirculation is

always deactivated.

Interior Air Quality System–IAQS*

This system consists of a multifilter and an air

quality sensor. The filter helps remove gases

and particles from the incoming air, thereby

reducing the amounts of odors and contami-

nants entering the vehicle. The air quality sen-

sor detects increased levels of contaminants in

the outside air. When the air quality sensor

detects contaminated outside air, the air intake

closes and the air inside the passenger com-

partment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air

enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recir-

culated passenger compartment air. When the

AUTO button is depressed the air quality sen-

sor is always engaged.

Activate or deactivate this function in Climate

settings Interior air quality system.

NOTE

•The air quality sensor should always be

engaged in order to obtain the best air

in the passenger compartment.

•Recirculation is limited in cold weather

to avoid fogging.

•If the insides of the windows start fog-

ging, disengage the air quality sensor.

Use the defroster function to increase

airflow to the front, side, and rear win-

dows.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

204

Air distribution table

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air

flows from the dashboard

air vents. The air is not

recirculated. Air condition-

ing is always engaged.

To remove de-fog/de-

ice the front side win-

dows and windshield

quickly.

Air to the floor and windows.

Some air flows from the

dashboard air vents.

To ensure comfortable

conditions and good de-

fogging in cold or humid

weather.

Air to windshield and side

windows. Some air flows

from the air dashboard

vents.

In cold or humid

weather (blower

speed should be

moderate to high).

Air to floor and from dash-

board air vents.

In sunny weather with

cool outside tempera-

tures.

Airflow to windows and

from dashboard air vents.

To ensure good com-

fort in warm, dry

weather.

Air to floor. Some air flows to

the dashboard air vents and

windows.

To warm or cool the feet.

Airflow to the head and

chest from the dashboard

air vents.

To ensure efficient

cooling in warm

weather.

Airflow to windows, from

dashboard air vents and to

the floor.

To cool the feet or pro-

vide warmer air to the

upper body in cold

weather or hot, dry

weather.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

205

Introduction

Information display and controls

OK–press to acknowledge/confirm/erase

a message)

Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip

computer menus)

RESET–resets certain functions

To scroll through trip computer information,

move the thumb wheel up or down. Continue

turning to return to the starting point.

Functions

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are

using the trip computer, this message must

be acknowledged in order to return to the

trip computer function. Acknowledge a

message by pressing OK.

To change the unit of measure specified for

distance and speed, contact an authorized

Volvo workshop.

Average speed

The system calculates the average speed from

the last resetting. Reset using RESET.

Current speed in mph (Canadian models

only)

This function provides the driver with an instan-

taneous conversion of the car's current speed

from km/h to mph.

Current speed in km/h (U.S. models only)

This function provides the driver with an instan-

taneous conversion of the car's current speed

from mph to km/h.

Current fuel consumption

(Instantaneous)

Current fuel consumption is calculated every

second. The information on the display is

updated every few seconds. When the vehicle

is stationary, "----" appears on the display.

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption since the last

reset. Reset using RESET.

Driving distance on current fuel reserve

This function shows the approximate distance

that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the

tank. The calculation is based on average fuel

consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)

of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in

the tank when the reading was taken. When the

message ---- miles to empty tank appears in

the display, refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

The actual distance that can be driven on

the usable fuel remaining in the tank may be

influenced by a change in driving style.

See also page 268 for information on driving

economically.

Resetting

1. Select --- mph average speed or --.-

mpg average.

2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 sec-

ond to reset the selected function. If

RESET is kept depressed for at 3 three

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

206

seconds, Average speed and Average fuel

consumption are reset simultaneously.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Active chassis system–Four C*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207

Active chassis (Four C)

Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con-

trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the cha-

racteristics of the shock absorbers so that the

car's driving characteristics can be adjusted.

There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and

Advanced.

NOTE

This system is available on Canadian mod-

els only.

Comfort

Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride

and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm.

This mode is particularly suitable for long-dis-

tance highway driving. The indicator light in the

button will be on when this mode is selected.

Sport

In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is

reduced during cornering and steering

response is more immediate. The transmission

shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The

indicator light in the button will be on to indi-

cate that Sport mode has been selected.

Advanced

In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal

and steering response is very direct. Gear shift-

ing is done at high rpm in each gear for

dynamic and active driving.

Operation

Chassis settings

Use the buttons in the center console to

change setting. The setting in use when the

engine is switched off is activated the next time

the engine is started.

Speed-dependent steering force*

Steering force increases with the speed of the

vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.

At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in

order to facilitate parking, etc.

Steering force can be changed under MY CAR

Car settings Steering wheel force.

Select Low, Medium or High. For a descrip-

tion of the menu system, see page 191.

NOTE

This steering force level menu function can-

not be accessed when the vehicle is in

motion.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

208

Storage spaces

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209

Compartment in door panel

Storage pocket on the front edge of the

front seat cushions

Glove compartment

Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and

AUX input/USB connector*

Jacket holder

Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket

Jacket holder

The jacket hanger is located on the inboard

side of the front passenger's seat head

restraint. It is only intended for hanging light

garments.

Tunnel console

Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) under

armrest, AUX input/USB connector.

Includes cup holder for driver and passen-

ger, 12-volt socket and small storage com-

partment.

Glove compartment

The owner's manual and maps can be kept

here. There are also holders for pens and fuel

cards. The glove compartment can be locked

manually with the key blade, see page 68.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Vanity mirror

G021438

Vanity mirror with lighting

The light comes on automatically when the

cover is lifted.

12-volt sockets

G031435

12-volt socket in the front tunnel console

G021440

12-volt socket in the rear center console

The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt

accessories such as cell phone chargers and

coolers. For the socket to supply current, the

ignition must be in at least mode I, see

page 84.

The maximum current consumption is 10A

(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the

passenger compartment is in use. If both the

front and rear sockets are used at the same

time, the maximum current consumption per

socket is 7.5A (90W).

The auxiliary sockets can also be used to

power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette

lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from

your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Always keep the sockets covered when not

in use.

12-volt socket in the cargo area*

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

211

Fold down the cover to access the electrical

socket.

NOTE

The 12-volt socket in the cargo area pro-

vides electrical current even when the igni-

tion is switched off. Using the socket while

the engine is not running will drain the bat-

tery.

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction........................................................................................... 214

Radio..................................................................................................... 225

Media player......................................................................................... 234

AUX/USB sockets................................................................................. 238

Bluetooth media ................................................................................. 241

Bluetooth® hands-free connection ...................................................... 243

Cell phone voice control....................................................................... 251

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* ........................................................... 255

Remote control*.................................................................................... 264

INFOTAINMENT

06 Infotainment

Introduction

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information

The infotainment system consists of radio and

media player features and also makes it pos-

sible to communicate via a cell phone. The

information is displayed on a 7" screen in the

center console. Infotainment functions can be

controlled from the center console or via the

buttons on the steering wheel keypad. On

models equipped with the optional navigation

system, voice commands can also be used to

e.g., set destinations, make calls from a

Bluetooth-connected cell phone, etc.

If the infotainment system was on when the

ignition was switched off, the most recently

used source (FM1, etc.) will restart the next

time the ignition is put in mode I or higher. The

driver's door must also be closed on vehicles

with keyless drive*.

The infotainment system can be operated for

15 minutes at a time while the engine is

switched off by pressing the On/Off button.

While the engine is being started, the infotain-

ment system will be temporarily interrupted

and will resume when the engine has started.

NOTE

To help avoid excessive battery drain,

remove the remote key from the ignition slot

if the infotainment system is used while the

engine is switched off.

Dolby Pro Logic

The system is manufactured under license

from Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation.

Dolby Pro Logic II and the symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation.

Audyssey MultEQ

The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used

to optimize sound quality to help ensure a

world-class listening experience.

1Applies only to models with Premium Sound Multimedia.

06 Infotainment

Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215

Infotainment system overview

Sockets for external audio sources (AUX

and USB)

Steering wheel keypad

7" display

Center console control panel

Rear seat control panel with headphone

socket*

Not in use

Basic infotainment functions

Infotainment controls in the center console

Corresponding controls - keypad and center con-

sole

SOUND: press to access the menu for

adjusting bass, treble, etc., see page 220

for additional information.

VOL: turn to raise or lower the volume level.

ON/OFF/MUTE: short press - switch

the system ON. Press and hold (until the

screen turns black) - switch the system

OFF. A short press when the infotainment

system is on will mute/unmute the sound.

The entire infotainment system, including

the navigation* and telephone functions, is

switched on/off at the same time by using

this button.

Mode buttons: select a mode (e.g.,

RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.) by pressing its

button on the center console. The most

06 Infotainment

Introduction

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

recent source in the selected mode (e.g.,

FM1) will be displayed. The location of

these buttons on the center console may

vary slightly from model to model.

OK/MENU: confirm a menu selection. This

leads to the selected mode’s (RADIO,

MEDIA) menu view. Arrows at the right of

the screen indicate submenus.

TUNE: turn to scroll among tracks/folders,

radio stations, phone contacts or to navi-

gate among the alternatives shown on the

screen.

EXIT: short press - go upward in the menu

system, cancel a current function, reject an

incoming phone call or erase characters

that have been entered on the screen.

Press and hold - from a mode’s main view

to come to the infotainment system's main

view, see page 218.

# INFO: if more information is available

than is currently displayed on the screen,

press # INFO to display the remaining

information.

Keypad (for preset stations, entering let-

ters or numbers, etc).

* FAV: this button can be used to store a

shortcut to a commonly used function in

AM/FM/SIRIUS/DISC, etc. See the section

"* FAV—storing a shortcut" on page 220

for information on using this button.

Steering wheel keypad

The buttons on the right-hand steering wheel

keypad can be used in the same way as some

of the controls on the center console. There are

two versions of the keypad, depending on your

vehicle's specifications.

Left/right arrow keys: a short press moves

between preset radio stations or tracks on

a disc. Press and hold to search within

tracks or to tune to the next/previous

strong radio station.

Volume

EXIT: a short press takes you upward in

the menu system, cancels a current func-

tion, rejects an incoming phone call or era-

ses characters that have been entered on

the screen. Press and hold from a mode’s

main view to come to the infotainment sys-

tem's main view.

Thumb wheel: pressing functions in the

same way OK/MENU on the center con-

sole. Turning the thumb wheel functions in

the same way as TUNE on the center con-

sole.

Voice button: 2 press to voice-activate cer-

tain functions on a Bluetooth-connected

cell phone and the navigation system.

Main view

From a mode’s normal view, pressing and

holding EXIT will display the infotainment sys-

tem's main view, which enables you to select

a mode.

NAV: Navigation system*

RADIO

2Models with the optional navigation system only. On models without navigation, this button mutes/unmutes the infotainment system.

06 Infotainment

Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217

MEDIA: (DISC, USB, etc.)

TEL: Bluetooth hands-free

MY CAR: Driving-related settings

CAM: Park assist camera*

06 Infotainment

Introduction

218

Menu navigation

An example of menu navigation in MEDIA mode when a CD is playing

06 Infotainment

Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219

Mode button (in this example, the MEDIA

button). The number of buttons varies,

depending on your vehicle’s specifica-

tions). Each mode has four basic views:

Normal view

Shortcut view

Quick scroll view

Menu view

Select a mode by pressing its button (1)

(RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.). Navigate using

TUNE, OK/MENU or EXIT.

Rear control panel with headphone

sockets*

Headphones with an impedance of

16 – 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher

are recommended for best sound reproduc-

tion.

Volume control (right/left sides)

Scroll/search forward and back

MODE – select: AM, FM1, FM2,HD

Radio3, SAT1*, SAT2*, Disc, USB, iPod,

Bluetooth, AUX and ON/OFF.

Headphones sockets (3.5 mm)

Activating/deactivating

The control panel is activated by pressing

MODE when the infotainment system is

switched on. It is switched off automatically

when the infotainment system is switched off

or by a long press on MODE.

Scroll/search forward and back

Press briefly on (2) to scroll between CD tracks/

audio files or to search for the next available

radio station.

Limitations

NOTE

•The sound source (AM, FM1, Disc,

etc.) being played through the infotain-

ment system's speakers cannot be con-

trolled from the rear control panel.

•In order to select and play an external

device using MODE, the device must be

connected to the infotainment system.

3U.S. models only.

06 Infotainment

Introduction

220 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

* FAV—storing a shortcut

The * FAV button can be used to store fre-

quently used functions, making it possible to

start the stored function by simply press-

ing * FAV. One favorite (for example,

Equalizer) can be programmed for each of the

following infotainment system functions:

In RADIO mode

•AM

•FM1/FM2

•SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2*

In MEDIA mode

•DISC

•USB

•iPod

•Bluetooth

•AUX

Favorites can also be stored for MY CAR,

CAM* and NAV*. See page 191 for a descrip-

tion of the menu system.

To program a function on the * FAV button:

1. Select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA, etc.).

2. Press and hold * FAV until the "favorite"

menu is displayed.

3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of

alternatives displayed and press OK/

MENU to confirm (store) your choice.

> The next time the infotainment system

mode (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.) is selected,

a short press on * FAV will start the

stored function.

Basic sound settings

Press SOUND to display the basic sound set-

ting menu (Bass, Treble, etc). Continue press-

ing SOUND or OK/MENU to display the other

setting alternatives.

Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save

the new setting by pressing OK/MENU.

Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to

display:

•Surround:4 Can be set to On or Off. When

switched on, the system will automatically

select settings for the best sound quality,

which is normally DPLII and will

appear in the display. If the recording was

made using Dolby Digital technology, play-

back will be provided with this setting and

will appear in the display. If Sur-

round is switched off, audio will be provi-

ded using 3 channel stereo.

•Bass: Bass level.

•Treble: Treble level.

•Fader: Balance between the front and rear

speakers.

•Balance: Balance between the right and

left speakers.

4Premium Sound Multimedia only

06 Infotainment

Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221

•Subwoofer*: subwoofer volume level.

•DPL II centre level/3 channel centre

level4: Volume for the center speaker.

•DPL II surround level4/5: Surround level.

Advanced sound settings

Equalizer

Sound levels for different frequencies can be

adjusted separately using this feature.

To do so:

1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio

settings and select Equalizer

2. Turn TUNE to select one of the frequencies

and press OK/MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to adjust the sound setting and

confirm the change by pressing OK/

MENU. Do the same for the other frequen-

cies.

4. When you have finished making your set-

tings, press EXIT to save and return to nor-

mal view.

For general information regarding menu navi-

gation, see page 218 and menu overview see

page 222.

Sound stage

The sound experience can be optimized for the

driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat.

If the front and rear seats are occupied, the

sound stage setting Front seats is recom-

mended. Select one of the options under

Audio settings Sound stage.

Audio volume and automatic volume

control

The infotainment system compensates for dis-

rupting noises in the passenger compartment

by increasing the volume according to the

speed of the vehicle. The level of sound com-

pensation can be set at low, medium, high or

off. Select the level under Audio settings

Volume compensation.

External audio source volume

If an external device such as an MP3 player or

an iPod  is connected to the AUX socket, the

device's volume may be different than the vol-

ume of the internal sound sources such as the

disc player or the radio. If the external sound

source's volume is too high, the quality of the

sound may be impaired. To help prevent this,

adjust the input volume of the external audio

source:

NOTE

Sound quality may be affected if the MP3

player is being charged while the system is

in AUX mode. To help prevent this, avoid

charging the MP3 player in a 12-volt socket

while it is being played.

1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to AUX.

Press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad.

2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to AUX

input volume. Confirm by pressing OK/

MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume.

Optimal sound reproduction

The infotainment system is pre-calibrated for

optimal sound reproduction using digital signal

processing.

This calibration takes into account factors such

as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the

listeners' seating positions, etc., for each com-

bination of vehicle/infotainment system.

4Premium Sound Multimedia only

5Only when Surround is on.

6Premium Sound Multimedia only

06 Infotainment

Introduction

222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

There is also a dynamic calibration that takes

into consideration the volume level, radio

reception, and the speed of the vehicle.

The settings that are described in this manual,

(Bass, Treble, Equalizer etc.) are only

intended to enable the user to adapt sound

reproduction to his/her personal tastes.

Infotainment system menus

RADIO menus

Main AM menu

AM menu

Show presets7

Scan

Audio settings8

Sound stage9

Equalizer10

Volume compensation

Reset all audio settings

Main FM1/FM2 menu

FM menu

Show radio text

Show presets

Scan

Advanced settings

Reset all FM settings

Audio settings8

Main SAT1*/SAT2* menu (SiriusXM൅

൅

satellite radio)

SAT1

SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button

to activate SIRIUS.

SAT2

SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button

to activate SIRIUS.

Song memory

Add song

Song Seek

Delete song

View song memory

Channel list information

Station name

Artist

Title

Information

Show presets

Category list

Advanced SIRIUS settings

Skip options

Channel skip list

Lock options

Channel lock list

Unlock all channels

Temporarily unlock all chan-

nels

Change code

Audio settings8

7High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia only.

8The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

9Premium Sound Multimedia only.

10To reach sub menus, see "Main menu AM.

06 Infotainment

Introduction

223

MEDIA menus

Main CD Audio menu

Disc menu

Random

Scan

Audio settings8

Main CD/DVD

Data menu

Disc menu

Play/Pause

Stop

Random

Repeat folder

Change subtitles

Change audio track

Scan

Audio settings8

Main DVD

Video menu

DVD Video Menu

DVD disc menu

Play/Pause/Continue

Stop

Subtitles

Audio tracks

Advanced settings

Angle

DivX® VOD code

Audio settings8

Main iPod menu

iPod menu

Random

Scan

Audio settings8

Main USB menu

USB menu

Play/Pause

Stop

Random

Repeat folder

Select USB device

Change subtitles

Change audio track

Scan

Audio settings8

Main AUX menu

AUX menu

AUX input volume

Audio settings8

TEL menus

Main Bluetooth media menu

Bluetooth menu

Random

Change device

Remove Bluetooth device

Scan

Bluetooth software version in car

Audio settings8

8The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

11The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system.

06 Infotainment

Introduction

224

Main Bluetooth



hands-free menu

Phone menu

Call lists

All calls

Missed calls

Answered calls

Dialled calls

Call duration

Phone book

New contact

Speed dials

Receive vCard

Memory status

Clear phone book

Change phone

Remove Bluetooth device

Phone settings

Discoverable

Sounds and volume

Download phone book

Bluetooth software version in

car

Call options

Auto answer

Voicemail number

Disconnect phone

06 Infotainment

Radio

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225

General functions

RADIO button for selecting the AM, FM1,

FM2, SAT1* or SAT2* wavebands.

Keypad (buttons 0-9)

Navigate among the menu alternatives in

the display by turning TUNE or the thumb

wheel on the steering wheel keypad.

Confirm your selection or access the radio

menus by pressing OK/MENU or the

thumb wheel on the steering wheel key-

pad.

Left/right arrow keys: Press and hold to go

to the next/previous strong station, press

briefly to tune to a preset station.

Menu navigation

RADIO menu selections can be made from the

center console or the steering wheel keypad,

see page 216 for more information.

Selecting a station (in wavebands AM/

FM1/FM2)

Automatic tuning

1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE to toggle to the

desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and

press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad.

2. Press / keys on the center console

control panel or steering wheel keypad to

search for the next available station.

List of stations (in wavebands FM1/FM2

only)

The radio automatically compiles a list of the

strongest FM stations whose signals are cur-

rently being received. This enables you to find

stations when driving in areas where radio sta-

tions and their frequencies are unfamiliar.

To access this list:

1. Select the desired waveband (FM1 or

FM2).

2. Turn TUNE slightly in either direction. This

displays the list of stations in the area. The

currently tuned station will be indicated in

the list by magnified text.

3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to

select a station on the list.

4. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU or the

thumb wheel on the steering wheel key-

pad.

NOTE

•This list will only display the frequencies

of the stations currently being received,

not a complete list of all radio frequen-

cies on the currently selected wave-

band.

•If the signal from the currently tuned

station is weak, this may prevent the

radio from updating the list of stations.

If this occurs, press while the list

of stations is displayed to switch to

manual tuning mode and select a sta-

tion. If the list of stations is no longer

displayed, turn TUNE in either direction

to display the list again and press

The list will disappear from the display after

several seconds.

If the station list is no longer displayed, turn

TUNE in either direction and press on the

06 Infotainment

Radio

226

keypad on the center console to switch to

manual tuning (or to switch back from manual

tuning to the "list of stations" function).

Manual tuning

By default, the list of stations of the strongest

stations in the area will be displayed when you

turn TUNE (see the preceding section, "List of

stations"). While the list of stations is displayed,

press on the center console keypad to

switch to manual tuning, which enables you to

select a frequency from the complete list of all

radio frequencies available on the currently

selected waveband. In other words, in manual

tuning mode, turning TUNE one step will

change from e.g., 93.3 to 93.5, etc.).

To manually tune a station:

1. Press RADIO. Turn TUNE to scroll to the

desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and

press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad to confirm.

2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel to select a

frequency.

NOTE

The radio is initially set to automatically

search for stations in the area in which you

are driving (see the preceding section, "List

of stations").

However, if you have switched to manual

tuning (by pressing on the keypad on

the center console while the list of stations

is displayed), the radio will remain in manual

tuning mode the next time it is switched on.

To switch back to "list of stations" mode,

turn TUNE one step (to display the full list of

stations) and press .

Please note that if you press when the

list of stations is not displayed, this will acti-

vate the INFO function.

Storing preset stations

Ten preset stations can be stored for each

waveband (AM, FM1, etc.).

Stored preset stations are selected using the

buttons on the keypad on the center console.

Manually storing preset stations

1. Tune to a station (see "Selecting a station"

on page 225).

2. Press and hold one of the number key but-

tons.

> The sound will be muted for several sec-

onds and when it returns, the station has

been stored on the number key button

used.

A list of preset stations can be displayed. This

function can be activated/deactivated in AM/

FM mode in FM menu Show presets or in

AM menu Show presets

Scan

The function automatically searches the cur-

rent waveband for radio stations. When a sta-

tion is found, it is played for several seconds

before scanning is resumed. While the station

is playing it can be stored as a preset in the

usual way (see "Manually storing preset sta-

tions").

–To start scanning in AM/FM mode, go to

FM menu Scan or in AM menu

Scan.

Stop station scanning by pressing EXIT.

NOTE

Storing a station interrupts the SCAN func-

tion.

Radio text

Some stations transmit information on pro-

gram content, artists, etc. This information can

be shown on the display.

06 Infotainment

Radio

227

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Show

radio text.

HD Radio൅

൅

reception (U.S. models

only)

Introduction

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio

broadcast

NOTE

HD radio volume may fade in and out at

times due to coverage limitations.

HD radio is a brand name registered by the

Ibiquity digital corporation1. They are the

developer of a broadcasting technology called

IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to

the method of transmitting a digital radio

broadcast signal centered on the same fre-

quency as the AM or FM station's present fre-

quency.

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"

since it is both analogue and digital. During

hybrid operation, receivers still continue to

receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD

radio receivers incorporate both modes of

reception, where the receiver will automatically

switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal

cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.

When you have tuned to an HD Radio station,

the symbol will appear in the infotain-

ment system display. The symbol is "grayed-

out" when HD Radio is in standby mode and

white when the radio is actively receiving an HD

broadcast.

More information about HD radio and IBOC

can be found on Ibiquity's website,

www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.

Benefits of digital broadcasting

•Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality

and AM as analogue FM).

•Some FM frequencies offer a greater num-

ber of listening choices through “multicast-

ing” (consisting of a frequency's main

channel and any sub-channels that may

also be available on that particular fre-

quency. See also the section "Sub-chan-

nels" below).

•When receiving a digital signal there is no

multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/

crackling due to outside influences.

How HD broadcasting works

HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio

and broadcasts of this type are available in

many areas of the United States. However,

there are a few key differences:

•Instead of transmitting one analogue sig-

nal, stations send out a bundled signal –

both analogue and digital.

•An HD radio receiver can receive both dig-

ital and analogue broadcasts. Depending

on the terrain and location of the vehicle

(which will influence the signal strength),

the receiver will determine which signal to

receive.

Limitations

•Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM

only): The main channel is the only channel

that can receive in hybrid mode (both dig-

ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub-

channels, they are broadcast in digital

1HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity

Digital Corp.

06 Infotainment

Radio

228

mode only. The main FM channel will be

displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC

(Volvo uses the symbol ">" to indicate

there are sub-channels available) The sub-

FM channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2

WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.

•Reception coverage area: Due to current

IBOC transmitter power limitations, the

reception coverage area in digital mode is

somewhat more limited than the station's

analogue coverage area. Please be aware

that as with any radio broadcast technol-

ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level and

building location can have positive or neg-

ative effects on radio reception.

•Analogue to digital/digital to analogue

blending: Analogue to digital blending will

occur as the signal strength reaches a pre-

set threshold in the receiver. This will be

noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak

reception) and is normal.

NOTE

There may be a noticeable difference in

sound quality when a change from analogue

to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such

as:

•Volume increase or decrease

•Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/

Treble cut or boost

•Time alignment (Digital program mate-

rial in extreme cases can be as much as

8 seconds behind the analogue). This

will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.

The above items are dependant on the

broadcaster's equipment settings and do

not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio

receiver or antenna systems.

Switching HD on or off

The factory setting for HD radio is off. If acti-

vated when driving through areas with weak

HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience

that the radio repeatedly switches between

analogue/digital and digital/analogue recep-

tion. If this happens, it may be desirable to

switch HD off. To do so:

1. Be sure the infotainment system is

switched on and in one of the AM or FM

modes.

2. Press OK/MENU in the center console

control panel.

3. Turn TUNE and move the marker to HD

Radio.

4. Press OK/MENU to turn HD off (the X will

disappear from the box on the display

screen).

This will disable the radio's capability to receive

digital broadcasts but it will continue to func-

tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM

receiver. Please note that when HD is switched

off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan-

nels (see the following section for a more

detailed explanation of sub-channels).

Repeat steps 2-4 above to reactivate HD (an X

will appear in the box on the display screen).

Please note that this will only switch HD on or

off for the selected waveband (AM, FM1, etc.).

Sub-channels

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

06 Infotainment

Radio

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 229

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM

wavebands only) will also have sub-channels

offering additional types of programming or

music.

In such cases, the “-” symbol will be displayed

to the left of the frequency number and a num-

ber will be displayed to the right of the fre-

quency number indicating that the currently

tuned frequency has at least one sub-channel.

Selecting sub-channels

To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press

and hold the right arrow key on the center con-

sole or on the steering wheel keypad for

approximately 1 second. To go back to the

main channel, press and hold the left arrow key

on the center console or on the steering wheel

keypad for approximately 1 second. To go to

subchannel 2 (if available), press and hold the

right arrow key on the center console or on the

steering wheel keypad for approximately

1 second.

If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main

channel, pressing and holding the left arrow

key for approximately 1 second will tune to the

next lower radio frequency.

NOTE

•When the radio has gone into HD mode,

it may take several seconds before the

">" symbol (if the current frequency has

any sub-channels) is displayed to the

left of the frequency. Pressing and hold-

ing the arrow keys for approximately

1 second before the main-/sub-channel

icon is displayed will cause the radio to

tune to the next available radio station,

not to the current station's sub-chan-

nels.

•When you are no longer in broadcasting

range of the currently tuned sub-chan-

nel, No reception will be displayed.

The radio will then be muted and it will

be necessary to tune to or search for a

new radio station.

Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,

see page 226 for information on storing sta-

tions.

If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it

may take up to 6 seconds before the channel

becomes audible. If you press this button while

you are out of digital range of the transmitter,

No reception will be displayed.

SiriusXM

൅

satellite radio*

Listening to satellite radio

The SiriusXM൅ satellite system consists of a

number of high elevation satellites in geosyn-

chronous orbit.

NOTE

•The digital signals from the satellites are

line-of-sight, which means that physical

obstructions such as bridges, tunnels,

etc, may temporarily interfere with sig-

nal reception.

•Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-

lic objects transported on roof racks or

in a ski box, or other antennas that may

impede signals from the SiriusXM൅

satellites.

Selecting SiriusXM

൅

radio mode

1. With the infotainment system switched on,

press RADIO.

2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel on the

steering wheel keypad to scroll to the

desired waveband (SAT1 or SAT2) and

press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad.

Activating SiriusXM

൅

radio

1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no

audio, which means that the channel is

06 Infotainment

Radio

230

unsubscribed and the text Subscription

update needed is displayed (see also

"Selecting a channel").

2. Call SiriusXM൅ at 1-888-539-SIRIUS

(7474).

3. If you tune to an unsubscribed channel, the

SiriusXM൅ ID will be displayed. The Sir-

iusXM൅ ID can also be accessed from the

menu (press OK/MENU, turn TUNE to

scroll to the Advanced settings menu,

press OK/MENU, scroll to SIRIUS ID and

press OK/MENU to display the number).

4. Updating subscription will be displayed

while the subscription is being updated,

after which the display will return to the

normal view.

SiriusXM൅

൅

The SiriusXM൅ ID (sometimes referred to as

the Electronic Serial Number or ESN) is

required when contacting the SiriusXM൅ Call

Center. It is used to activate your account and

when making any account transactions.

Selecting a channel category

1. Turn TUNE to display a list of channels.

2. Press EXIT.

3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of cat-

egories and press OK/MENU to make a

selection.

> The channels in the selected category

are displayed.

NOTE

•The category All is default, which ena-

bles you to scroll through the entire list

of available satellite channels.

•The channel categories are automati-

cally updated several times a year. This

takes approximately two minutes and

will interrupt normal broadcasting. A

message will be displayed while updat-

ing is in progress. Information on chan-

nel or feature updates is available at

www.siriusxm.com.

Selecting a channel

There are three ways of tuning in a channel:

•Using the left and right arrow keys to go to

the next channel. Skipped channels (see

page 232) will be excluded.

•By turning the TUNE control and selecting

a channel from the list

•Through direct channel entry.

NOTE

•The numbers of skipped or locked

channels will not be displayed.

•If a channel is locked, the access code

must be entered before the channel can

be selected. See "Unlocking a channel"

on page 232.

Direct channel entry

The SiriusXM൅ satellite channels are in numer-

ical order throughout all of the categories. To

access a channel directly:

1. Turn TUNE to access the channel list.

2. Use the keypad buttons to enter the chan-

nel's number.

3. Press OK/MENU. The radio will tune to this

channel, even if it belongs to a category

other than the currently selected one.

Scanning

Scan automatically searches through the list of

satellite channels. The search will only be car-

ried out in the selected category, see

page 226 for more detailed information on the

scan function.

Storing a channel

A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;

10 channels each for SAT1 and SAT2, see

06 Infotainment

Radio

231

page 226 for detailed information on storing

channels.

•A long press on one of the number keys

stores the currently tuned channel on that

key.

•A short press on a number key while the

radio is in SAT1 or SAT2 mode will tune to

the preset satellite channel stored on that

button, regardless of the currently selected

channel category.

Searching for and storing songs

The Song Seek function provides notification

when SiriusXM൅ is broadcasting the songs

selected in song memory. Song memory ena-

bles you to store the name of the song for

future advance notification when that song is

being played.

Song seek

When a satellite radio channel plays one of the

songs stored in the song memory while the

Song seek feature is activated, the listener will

be alerted by a text message and an audible

signal.

Press OK/MENU to listen to the song or EXIT

to cancel.

To activate/deactivate the song seek function:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song memory and

press OK/MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song Seek and

press OK/MENU to activate or deactivate

the function.

NOTE

When the song has ended, the radio will

remain tuned to the channel on which the

song was played.

Song memory

Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's

memory.

To add the currently playing song to the list:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to Song memory and press OK/

MENU.

3. Scroll to Add current song to song

memory and press OK/MENU.

If a new song is selected when the memory is

full, you will be prompted to delete a song from

the list. To do so:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of

songs. Select a song and press OK/

MENU to delete it from the list.

Radio text

This text provides information about the song

that is currently playing. To turn this feature on

or off, press OK/MENU and scroll to Show

radio text and press OK/MENU to toggle

between on or off.

Advanced SiriusXM

൅

settings

This menu function enables you to make set-

tings on certain SiriusXM൅ satellite radio func-

tions. To access this menu:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu

and press OK/MENU.

WARNING

Settings should be made when the vehicle

is at a standstill.

The following settings can be made in the sat-

ellite menus:

•Channel skip settings can be made

•Channel lock settings can be made

•The channel access code can be displayed

or changed (see also "Locking a channel"

on page 232)

•Your SiriusXM൅ ID can be displayed

•Reset SiriusXM൅ settings

06 Infotainment

Radio

232

Skip options

This function is used to remove a channel from

the list of available channels.

Skipping a channel

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.

3. Press OK/MENU to enter the Skip

options menu.

4. Press OK/MENU to enter Channel skip

list.

5. Press OK/MENU to select All categories

or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and

press OK/MENU to select it.

6. Press OK/MENU to select Skip all

channels in the category or turn TUNE

to scroll to a channel and press OK/

MENU to select or deselect it. Multiple

channels can be selected.

Unskip all channels

This removes all channels from the skip list and

makes them available for selection.

Temporary unskip all channels

This function will temporarily unskip all chan-

nels and make them available for selection. The

channels remain on the skip list and will again

be skipped the next time the ignition is

switched on.

Channel lock

Access to specific channels can be restricted

(locked). A locked channel will not provide

audio, song titles, or artist information.

NOTE

All channels are initially unlocked.

Locking a channel

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.

3. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to scroll

to the Lock options menu and press OK/

MENU.

4. Use the keypad in the central control panel

to enter the channel access code2 and

press OK/MENU.

5. Press OK/MENU to enter the Channel

lock list.

6. Press OK/MENU to select All categories

or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and

press OK/MENU to select it.

7. Press OK/MENU to select Lock all

channels in the category or turn TUNE

to scroll to a channel and press OK/

MENU to select it. Multiple channels can

be selected.

The selected channel is now locked and a

checked box will be displayed to indicate this.

It will be necessary to enter the channel access

code2 in order to listen to a locked channel.

Unlocking a channel

A channel's access code2 is required to unlock

a channel.

Unlock all channels

This permanently removes all channels from

the locked list and makes them available for

selection.

Temporarily unlock all channels

This function will temporarily unlock all chan-

nels and make them available for selection. The

channels remain on the locked list and will

again be locked the next time the ignition is

switched on.

CHANGE CODE

This function makes it possible to change the

channel access code. The default code is

0000.

To change the code:

2The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

06 Infotainment

Radio

233

1. Select Change code in the Lock

options menu and press OK/MENU.

2. Enter the new code and press OK/MENU.

3. Confirm the new code and press OK/

MENU.

If an incorrect code is entered, the text

Incorrect code is displayed.

If you have forgotten the access code:

1. Select SIRIUS ID in the Advanced

settings menu and press OK/MENU.

2. Press and hold the OK/MENU button for

several seconds.

3. The current code will be displayed.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with

assistance.

SiriusXM൅

൅

This function displays the 12-digit SiriusXM൅

activation ID.

06 Infotainment

Media player

234

CD/DVD1 functions

Center console control panel

Disc slot

MEDIA button, the most recently used

active source will start when MEDIA is

pressed. Pressing this key from Media

mode's main view will display a shortcut

menu.

Eject

Keypad

TUNE:Turn to navigate among menu

selections/folders/tracks (or turn the

thumb wheel on the steering wheel key-

pad).

OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec-

tion or access the menus for the currently

selected source (e.g., Disc) or press the

thumb wheel on the steering wheel key-

pad.

Left/right arrow keys: Fast back/forward

and change track or chapter2.

The media player supports and can play the

following main types of discs and files:

•Purchased CDs (CD Audio)

•Home-burned CDs with audio and /or

video files

•Home-burned DVDs with audio and /or

video files

•Purchased DVDs

For a list of compatible formats, see

page 237.

Media menu selections can be made from the

center console or the steering wheel keypad.

For more information about the infotainment

menu system, see page 216.

For general information regarding menu navi-

gation, see page 218 and menu overview see

page 222.

Playing a disc

Press MEDIA ans scroll to Disc. Press OK/

MENU or the thumb wheel on the steering

wheel keypad. If there is a disc in the player, it

will begin playing automatically. Otherwise,

Insert disc will be displayed. Insert the disc

into the slot with the text side upward and it will

begin playing automatically.

If a disc with audio/video files is inserted, its

folder structure will be read by the system. It

may take several seconds until the disc begins

playing, depending on its quality and the

amount of information it contains.

Disc eject

For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected disc

must be removed within 12 seconds or it will

be automatically drawn back into the slot.

Pause

When the infotainment system volume is

turned off completely or the sound is muted,

the player will pause. It will resume playing

when the volume is turned up again or if the

sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via

the menu system, select Play/Pause.

1The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system.

2DVDs only

06 Infotainment

Media player

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235

Navigating a disc and playing tracks

CD audio discs

Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to

navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to con-

firm a choice and begin listening. Press EXIT

to cancel. Press and hold EXIT to return to the

playlist's root level.

The / buttons on the center console or

steering wheel keypad can also be used to

change tracks.

Home-burned CD/DVD audio/video files

Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to

navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to con-

firm a choice and begin listening. Use EXIT to

stop or to go back in the disc's folder structure.

Press and hold EXIT to return to the playlist's

root level.

The / buttons on the center console or

steering wheel keypad* can also be used to

change audio/video files.

The following symbols are used in the display:

•- audio files

•- video files

•- folders

When a file has been played, the player will

continue to play the rest of the files (of the same

type) in the current folder. When all of the files

in the folder have been played, the player will

automatically go to the next folder and play the

files in it (unless Repeat folder is activated).

The system automatically detects and changes

settings if a disc containing only audio or only

video files is inserted in the player and will play

these files. However, the system will not

change settings if a disc containing both audio

and video files is inserted and the player will

continue to play the current type of file.

NOTE

Video images will only be visible when the

vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is

traveling faster than approximately 4 mph

(6 km/h), No visual media available while

driving will be displayed. Sound from the

film will still be audible and video images will

be shown again when the vehicle stops.

NOTE

Some copy protected audio files or home-

burned audio files may not be read by the

player.

DVD videos

For information, see page 234.

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the / buttons to fast

forward/reverse. This is done at one speed for

audio files but several speeds can be chosen

for video files. Press the / buttons sev-

eral times to increase the speed. Release the

button to return to normal viewing speed.

Scan

This function plays the first ten seconds of

each track/audio file. To start scanning:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to Scan.

> The first ten seconds of each track/

audio file will be played.

3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The cur-

rent track/audio file will continue playing.

Random

This function plays the tracks in random order

(shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can be

scrolled through in the normal way. To listen to

tracks in random order:

1. Press OK/MENU,

3Not video DVDs

06 Infotainment

Media player

236

2. Scroll to Random

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate

the random play function.

Press the / buttons on the center con-

sole or steering wheel keypad to change

tracks/audio files.

Repeat folder

This function makes it possible to play files in

a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been

played, the first file will begin again. To acti-

vate:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder.

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate

the function.

Playing video DVDs

Play

When playing a video DVD, a disc menu may

appear on the display, giving you access to

extra functions and settings such as choice of

subtitle and language, scene selection, etc.

NOTE

Video images will only be visible when the

vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is

traveling faster than approximately 4 mph

(6 km/h), No visual media available while

driving will be displayed. Sound from the

film will still be audible and video images will

be shown again when the vehicle stops.

Navigating in a DVD's menus

Buttons in the center console control panel,

shown above, are used to navigate in a DVD's

menus.

Changing chapters or title

TurnTUNE to access the list of chapters and

navigate in this list (the film will pause if it is

currently playing). Press OK/MENU to choose

a chapter and return to the normal view in the

display (if a film was playing, it will resume).

Press EXIT to access the list of titles.

In the list of titles, turn TUNE to make a selec-

tion and press OK/MENU to confirm. This also

returns you to the list of chapters. Press EXIT

to cancel and return to the normal view (without

having made a selection).

It is also possible to change chapters by press-

ing / on the center console control

panel or on the steering wheel keypad.

Advanced settings

Angle

If the DVD supports this function, it is possible

to select a camera angle for a certain scene.

This can be done in DVD mode under DVD disc

menu Advanced settings Angle.

DivX



Video On Demand

The media player can be registered to play

DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or

USB. The registration code can be found by

pressing the MY CAR button, and going to

Settings Information DivX® VOD

code. See page 191 for more information

about the menu system.

4Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only.

06 Infotainment

Media player

237

See also www.divx.com/vod for more informa-

tion.

Screen settings

Screen settings can be made (when the vehicle

is not moving) for:

•Brightness

•Contrast

1. Press OK/MENU and choose Image

settings and confirm by pressing OK/

MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to the desired setting and

press OK/MENU.

3. Change the setting by turning TUNE and

confirm the change by pressing OK/

MENU.

Press OK/MENU or EXIT to return to the

screen settings list.

To return to the factory settings, select Reset .

Compatible formats

The media player can play a number of differ-

ent types of files and disc formats, and is com-

patible with the formats listed in the following

table.

NOTE

Dual format (double-sided discs) such as

DVD Plus or CD-DVD are thicker than nor-

mal discs and may not play in your infotain-

ment system.

If a disc containing both CDDA and MP3

tracks is played, all MP3 tracks will be

ignored.

Audio

formats

CD-Audio, mp3, wma,

aac, m4a

Video for-

mats

CD-Video, DVD-Video, divx,

avi, asf

06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

238

Connecting external devices

Sockets for auxiliary devices in the storage com-

partment between the front seats

An auxiliary device, such as an iPod or MP3

player can be connected to the infotainment

system via one of the sockets in the center

console storage compartment. A device con-

nected to the USB socket can be operated

using the vehicle's infotainment system con-

trols.

An iPod or an MP3 player with rechargeable

batteries will also be charged if the device is

connected to the USB socket (if the vehicle's

ignition is on or if the engine is running).

To connect a device:

1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to select the

desired source (iPod, USB or AUX). Press

OK/MENU.

> For example, if a USB device has been

selected, the text Connect USB will be

displayed.

2. Connect the device to one of the sockets

in the center console storage compartment

(see the illustration).

The text Reading USB will be displayed while

the system reads the device's folders. This may

take a short time, depending on the folder

structure and the number of files.

When this information has been loaded, track

information will be displayed and a track can

be selected.

NOTE

•The system supports a number of

iPod models produced in 2005 or later.

•In order to help avoid damage to the

USB socket, it will be switched off if

there is a short circuit or if the con-

nected device uses too much current

(which can happen if the device does

not comply with the USB standard). The

USB socket will reactivate the next time

the ignition is switched on if the problem

no longer exists. If the problem persists,

contact a trained and authorized Volvo

service technician.

Media menu selections can be made from the

center console or the steering wheel keypad,

see page 216 for more information.

Navigating and playing tracks

Turn TUNE to access the device's playlist and

to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to

either select a sub-folder or confirm a choice

and begin playback. Press EXIT to cancel and

exit the playlist or to go back in the folder struc-

ture. Press and hold EXIT to go to the highest

level in the playlist.

1USB and iPod



only

06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

239

The / buttons on the center console or

steering wheel keypad can also be used to

change tracks/files.

The following symbols are used in the display:

•- audio files

•- video files

•- folders

When a file has been played, the player will

continue to play the rest of the files (of the same

type) in the current folder. When all of the files

in the folder have been played, the player will

automatically go to the next folder1 (unless

Repeat folder is activated) and play the files

in it.

The system automatically detects and changes

settings if a device containing only audio or

only video files is connected to the USB socket

and will play these files. However, the system

will not change settings if the device contains

both audio and video files and will continue to

play the current type of file.

Fast forward/reverse

For information, see page 235.

Scan

For information, see page 235.

Random

For information, see page 235.

The keypad in the center console can be used

to search for a file in the currently selected

folder.

Start the search by either turning TUNE (to

access the folders) or by pressing one of the

character keys to enter a letter/number. Pos-

sible search results will be displayed as char-

acters are entered.

Play the file by pressing OK/MENU.

Repeat

This function makes it possible to play files in

a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been

played, the first file will begin again. For infor-

mation, see page 236.

Pause

When the infotainment system volume is

turned off completely or the sound is muted,

the player will pause. It will resume playing

when the volume is turned up again or if the

sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via

the menu system, select Play/Pause.

External sound sources

USB flash drive

To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is

advisable to only store music files on the drive.

It will take considerably longer for the system

to index the files on the drive if it contains any-

thing other than compatible music files.

NOTE

•The system supports removable media

that uses the USB 2.0 standard and the

FAT32 file system. It can index up to

1,000 folders and a maximum of 254

sub-folders/files for each folder. How-

ever, the highest folder level can sup-

port up to 1,000 sub-folders/files.

•When using a longer type of USB

device, connecting it with a USB

adapter cable will help reduce mechan-

ical wear on the USB socket and on the

device.

USB hub

A USB hub can be connected to the USB

socket, making it possible to connect several

USB devices at the same time. To select one

of the devices, go to the menu USB menu

Select USB device

1USB and iPod only

2USB only

06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

240

MP3 player

Many MP3 players have a file indexing system

that is not supported by the vehicle's infotain-

ment system. In order to use an MP3 player,

the system must be set to USB Removable

device/Mass Storage Device.

iPod



An iPod receives current and its battery is

charged through the USB cable.

The system will only play audio files from an

iPod.

NOTE

When an iPod is used as a sound source,

the vehicle's infotainment system has a

menu structure similar to the one in the

iPod. See the iPod's manual for detailed

information.

Compatible file formats via the USB

socket

The following audio and video files are suppor-

ted by the system when playing a device con-

nected to the USB socket.

Audio formats mp3, wma, aac,

m4a

Video formats divx, avi, asf

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth



media

241

Introduction

The vehicle's media player is equipped with

Bluetooth and can play streaming audio files

from a Bluetooth device such as a cell phone

or mp3 player. Navigation and control of the

device can be done through the vehicle's cen-

ter console control panel or the steering wheel

keypad. On certain external devices, it is also

possible to change tracks from the device.

NOTE

Any Bluetooth cell phones used must sup-

port Audio/Video Remote Control Profile

(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution

Profile (A2DP). The phone must use AVRCP

version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older versions

of these standards are used, certain fea-

tures (e.g., scan or random) may not func-

tion.

Not all cell phones are fully compatible with

the vehicle's Bluetooth system. A list of

compatible phones is available at you Volvo

retailer or at www.volvocars.us.

Menu navigation

Choices can be made in the Bluetooth menus

from the center console control panel or the

steering wheel keypad. For additional informa-

tion about navigating the various menus, see

page 216.

The vehicle's media player can only play audio

files through the Bluetooth function.

Overview

Center console control panel

VOL: Volume control

MEDIA button, the most recently used

active source will start when MEDIA is

pressed. Pressing this key from Media

mode's main view will display a shortcut

menu.

TUNE: Turn to navigate among menu alter-

natives and folders shown in the display.

OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec-

tion or access the menus.

EXIT: Press to go back in the menu struc-

ture or cancel a function.

Left/right arrow keys: Short press: change

tracks. Long press: fast forward/reverse

within a track. The arrow keys on the steer-

ing wheel keypad can be used in the same

way.

Pairing and connecting an external

device

Before an external device can be connected, it

must be paired to the infotainment system. The

procedure for connecting an external device

varies, depending whether or not the device

has previously been paired to the infotainment

system. A maximum of 10 external devices can

be paired and each device only needs to be

paired once. To pair a device, see page 244.

Automatic connection

When the Bluetooth function is active and the

most recently used device is within range, it is

automatically connected. When the infotain-

ment system searches for the most recently

used device, its name is shown in the display.

To connect another paired device, press EXIT.

See the following section for information about

switching to another device.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth



media

242

Switching to another device

It is possible to switch among paired

Bluetooth devices that are in the vehicle. To

do so:

1. Press MEDIA,scroll to Bluetooth and

press the thumb wheel on the steering

wheel keypad or OK/MENU.

2. Be sure the Bluetooth device is discover-

able (refer to its user manual if necessary).

3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

4. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to Change

device and confirm by pressing the thumb

wheel or OK/MENU.

> After several seconds, the names of any

paired external devices will be dis-

played.

5. Scroll to the device to be connected and

press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

> The device will be connected.

Audio files can now be selected using the

/ buttons in the center console or on

the steering wheel keypad.

Disconnecting an external device

The external device is automatically discon-

nected from the infotainment system if it is

moved out of range.

Removing a paired device

1. In Bluetooth mode, press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to Remove Bluetooth device and

press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

3. Scroll to the device to be removed by turn-

ing the thumb wheel or TUNE and confirm

by pressing the thumb wheel or OK/

MENU.

> A question asking if you would like to

remove the device will be displayed.

4. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU to

confirm or EXIT to cancel.

Random1

This function plays the audio files on the exter-

nal device in random order (shuffle). This func-

tion can be activated/deactivated under:

Bluetooth menu Random

Press the / buttons on the center con-

sole or steering wheel keypad to change

tracks.

Scanning audio files on an external

device1

This function plays the first ten seconds of

each audio file. This function can be activated/

deactivated under: Bluetooth menu Scan.

Scanning can be canceled by pressing EXIT.

Bluetooth



version information

This feature offers information about the

Bluetooth version installed in the vehicle's

infotainment system. This information can be

found under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth

software version in car.

1Function is not supported on all cell phones.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

243

Introduction

This feature makes it possible to set up a wire-

less connection between a Bluetooth-ena-

bled cell phone or other device and the vehi-

cle’s infotainment system. This enables the

infotainment system to function as a hands-

free connection and allows you to remote-con-

trol a number of the phone’s functions. The

microphone used by this system is located

near the driver's side sun visor (2). The buttons

and other controls on the cell phone can

always be used regardless of whether or not

the phone is connected to the hands-free sys-

tem.

NOTE

Not all cell phones are fully compatible with

the hands-free system. A list of compatible

phones is available at your Volvo retailer or

at www.volvocars.us

WARNING

Never use the hands-free feature or any

other device in your vehicle in a way that

distracts you from the task of driving safely.

Distraction can lead to a serious accident.

Compliance

FCC/IC common sentence

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules

and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation of

this device.

USA: FCC ID A269ZUA130

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

IC RSS-Gen

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled

equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency

(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to

OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency

(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very

low levels of RF energy that it deemed to com-

ply without maximum permissive exposure

evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it

should be installed and operated with at least

8 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator

and person’s body (excluding extremities:

hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

Canada: IC 700BIAM2101

Menu navigation

TEL menu selections can be made from the

center console or the steering wheel keypad.

For additional information about navigating the

various menus, see page 216.

System overview

Cell phone

Location of the microphone

Steering wheel keypad

Center console control panel and display

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

244

Bluetooth® functions in the center

console control panel

Control panel in the center console.

Keypad containing letters and numbers for

dialing numbers, adding phone book

entries, etc.

TEL: Press this button to activate/deacti-

vate the Bluetooth function. If TEL is

already active, pressing this button again

will display a shortcut menu with com-

monly used functions.

TUNE: From TEL mode's normal view, turn

clockwise to display the phone book or

counterclockwise for the phone list. It can

also be used for navigating in displayed

menus. The thumb wheel in the steering

wheel keypad can be used in the same

way.

OK/MENU: Press to answer an incoming

call, confirm your selection or access the

phone menus. Incoming calls can also be

answered by pressing the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad.

EXIT: Press to end or reject calls, erase

characters that have been entered, end an

ongoing function and goes back in the

menus. This button on the steering wheel

keypad can also be used in the same way.

Getting started

Use the controls on the steering wheel keypad

and in the center console to access, navigate

and make selections in the hands-free sys-

tem’s menus.

Activation

A short press on the TEL button in the center

console activates the Bluetooth® hands-free

system. If the system is already activated when

the button is pressed, a shortcut menu will be

displayed. The symbol at the upper right

of the display indicates that the hands-free

system is active.

Pairing (connecting) external

Bluetooth

devices

A maximum of 10 cell phones or other devices

can be paired with the hands-free system. Pair-

ing only needs to be done once for each phone.

After pairing, the cell phone no longer needs to

be in sight or discoverable.

Two Bluetooth® devices (e.g., a phone and an

iPod®) can be active at the same. However, two

phones cannot be used at the same time to

make calls.

There are two ways of pairing a cell phone to

the hands-free system for the first time:

Method 1: Search for the external device using

the infotainment menus

1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth func-

tion to make it discoverable (refer to the

phone’s user manual if necessary) or go to

www.volvocars.com

2. Press TEL.

> The infotainment system will search for

previously paired devices.

3. Press the thumb wheel on the steering

wheel keypad or OK/MENU and select

Add phone.1

1Select Change phone if the cell phone or device has already been paired with the infotainment system. If several phones or devices have already been paired, their names will also be displayed.

Scroll to the device to be connected and press the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad or OK/MENU.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

245

4. With the cell phone in discoverable mode,

press OK/MENU.

> The infotainment system will search for

cell phones or devices that are in range,

which takes approximately 30 seconds.

Any phones detected will be displayed

using their Bluetooth names. The

hands-free system’s Bluetooth name

will appear in the cell phone’s display as

My Volvo Car.

5. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to select

one of the cell phones shown in the center

console display and press the thumb wheel

or OK/MENU.

6. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the

digits (PIN code) shown in the center con-

sole display and press the button on the

cell phone used to confirm a choice.

The external device is now paired and can be

controlled from the infotainment system.

If the connection failed: Press EXIT and con-

nect with method 2 below.

Method 2: Search for the vehicle using the

external device’s Bluetooth function.

1. Press TEL. If a phone or external device is

already connected, disconnect it.

>The Bluetooth function will search for

previously paired devices.

2. Make the vehicle discoverable by pressing

the thumb wheel or OK/MENU and select-

ing Phone settings Discoverable.

3. Search for the vehicle using the phone or

external device's Bluetooth function.

Refer to its user manual if necessary.

4. Select My Volvo Car on the phone or

external device’s screen and follow the

directions provided.

5. Enter a PIN code of your choice in the

external device and press its button to pair

the device. When prompted, enter the

same PIN code in the vehicle using the

center console keypad.

6. Pair My Volvo Car from the external

device.

When the external device has been paired, its

Bluetooth name appear in the center console

display. This device can now be controlled

from the infotainment system.

Connect automatically

When the hands-free system is active and the

most recently connected cell phone is within

range, it will be connected automatically. If this

phone is not within range, the hands-free sys-

tem will attempt to connect one of the other

paired cell phones. When the infotainment sys-

tem searches for the most recently connected

phone, its name appears in the display.

Connect manually

To connect a phone other than the one that

was most recently connected or to switch

between cell phones that are already paired

with the hands-free system, go to Phone

menu Change phone.

Changing phones or devices

More than one device can be used in the vehi-

cle as long as this device has been paired. To

do so, see page 244.

Changing devices:

1. Check that the external device is discov-

erable.

2. Press TEL and select Change phone.

> The infotainment system will search for

previously paired devices. Those that

are detected will be displayed on the

screen.

3. Select the desired device by turning the

thumb wheel or TUNE and confirm by

pressing the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

> The device will be connected.

Making a call

1. Ensure that is shown at the top of the

center console display and that the hands-

free function is in telephone mode.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

246

2. Dial the desired phone number using the

center console keypad or use the speed

dial function (see page 250). In normal

view (see page see page 215 for informa-

tion about the various display views), it is

also possible to turn TUNE clockwise to

access the phone book and then counter-

clockwise for the call list. See page 250 for

more information about the phone book.

3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

End or reject a call by pressing EXIT.

Disconnecting the cell phone

The cell phone is automatically disconnected

from the infotainment system if it is moved out

of range.

The cell phone can be manually disconnected

from the hands-free system by pressing and

holding TEL or in phone mode, going to Phone

menu Disconnect phone. See also page

247 for more information about connections.

The hands-free system is also deactivated

when the ignition is switched off (or if the

driver’s door is opened).

When the cell phone is disconnected from the

hands-free system, a call in progress can be

continued using the cell phone’s own speaker

and microphone.

Even if the cell phone has been disconnected

manually, some phones may reconnect auto-

matically, for example when a new call is initi-

ated.

Removing a paired device

A paired phone or device can be removed from

the list. To do so:

1. Press TEL.

2. Select Phone menu Remove

Bluetooth device.

Handling calls

Incoming calls

–Press OK/MENU (or the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad) to answer a

call, even if the infotainment system is cur-

rently in another mode (e.g., RADIO or

MEDIA).

Press EXIT to reject a call.

Auto answer

This function means that incoming calls will be

answered automatically. Activate or deactivate

the function in the menu system under Phone

menu Call options Auto answer.

Call settings

While a call is in progress, press OK/MENU or

the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad

to access the following functions:

•Mute: mute the infotainment system’s

microphone.

•Mobile phone: transfer the call from

hands-free to the cell phone. On certain

cell phones, the connection will be broken,

which is normal. The hands-free function

will ask if you would like to reconnect.

•Dial number: dial a third party during an

ongoing call using the keypad (the current

call will be put on hold).

Call lists

Call lists are copied to the hands-free function

each time a cell phone is connected and the

lists are updated while the phone is connected.

In normal view, turn TUNE counter-clockwise

to see the All calls list.

In phone mode, the various call lists can be

displayed in Phone menu Call lists:

•All calls

•Missed calls

•Answered calls

•Dialled calls (certain cell phones show

this list in reverse order)

•Call duration

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

247

If no number has been stored, this menu can

be accessed by pressing and holding 1.

Voice mail

In normal view, a speed dial number for voice

mail can be programmed and accessed by

pressing and holding 1.

The number for voice mail can be changed in

phone mode in Phone menu Call options

Voicemail number Change number.

Sound settings

Call volume

Call volume can be only be adjusted during a

call. Use the buttons in the steering wheel key-

pad or the infotainment system’s VOL control.

Infotainment system volume

If no phone call is in progress, volume for the

infotainment system can be adjusted in the

normal way with the infotainment system's

VOL control or from the steering wheel keypad.

Infotainment system sound can be automati-

cally muted when a phone call is received in

Phone menu Phone settings Sounds

and volume Mute radio/media.

Ringing volume

In phone mode, go to Phone menu Phone

settings Sounds and volume Ring

volume and adjust the volume by turning

VOL. Save the setting by pressing EXIT.

Ringing tones

The hands-free system’s integrated ringing

tones can be selected in Phone menu

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring signals Ring signal 1, etc.

NOTE

The connected cell phone’s ring tone may

not be switched off when one of the hands-

free system's ringing tones is used.

If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s

ring tone2, go to Phone menu Phone

settings Sounds and volume Ring

signals Mobile phone ring signal.

Phone book

The hands-free system uses two phone books

(one with the cell phone's list of contacts and

one with contacts saved directly in the info-

tainment system), which are combined to form

one phone book.

•The infotainment system downloads the

phone book from a connected cell phone.

This phone book will only be displayed

when this cell phone is connected to the

hands-free system.

•The infotainment system also has an inte-

grated phone book made up of contacts

that have been saved in the system,

regardless of which cell phone is currently

connected when the contact is saved.

These contacts will be displayed regard-

less of the cell phone that is connected. If

a contact has been saved in the infotain-

ment system, the symbol will be dis-

played next to it.

2Not supported by all cell phones.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

248

NOTE

Changes made from the infotainment sys-

tem to a contact in the cell phone's phone

book will result in a new contact being

added to the infotainment system's phone

book. However, this contact will not be

saved in the cell phone's phone book. The

infotainment system's display will show

duplicate contacts with different icons.

Please also note that if a speed dial number

is saved or if a contact's information is edi-

ted, this will result in a new contact in the

infotainment system's phone book.

The symbol must be displayed before

the phone book can be used and the hands-

free function must be in phone mode.

The infotainment system saves a copy of each

paired cell phone's phone book. This phone

book can be copied each time the phone is

connected.

–Activate/deactivate this function in phone

mode in Phone menu Phone settings

Download phone book.

If the phone book contains information about

someone who is trying to call you, this infor-

mation will be shown in the display.

Contact shortcuts

A quick way of searching the phone book for

contacts in normal view is to turn TUNE clock-

wise to access the phone book and then coun-

ter-clockwise to select a contact from the list.

Press OK/MENU to call.

Each name in the phone book has a default

phone number. If the symbol is displayed to

the right of it, this indicates that there are addi-

tional phone numbers for this contact. To use

a phone number other than the default one,

press the button on the center console

control panel. Turn TUNE to select a different

phone number and press OK/MENU to call.

It is also possible to search for a contact by

using the center console keypad to enter the

first letter(s) of the contact's name (see also the

following table "Buttons in the center console"

for each button's function).

The list of contacts can also be accessed from

normal view by pressing and holding the button

on the center console keypad with the first let-

ter of the contact's name. For example, press-

ing and holding button 6 would provide direct

access to the section of the list with contacts

whose names begin with M.

Buttons in the center console

Button Function

Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1

A B C Å Ä Æ À Ç 2

D E F È É 3

G H I Ì 4

J K L 5

M N O Ö Ø Ñ Ò 6

P Q R S ß 7

T U V Ü Ù 8

W X Y Z 9

Shift between upper and lower

case

+ 0 p w

# *

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

249

Searching for contacts

Searching for contacts using the text wheel

List of characters

Switch between character entry modes

(see the following table)

Phone book (list of contacts)

To search for or edit a contact in phone mode,

go to Phone menu Phone book

Search.

1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press

OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter

keys on the center console can also be

used.

2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The results

of the search will be displayed in the phone

book (3).

3. To switch from letter entry mode to the

entry mode for numbers or special charac-

ters, or to go to the phone book, turn

TUNE to one of the selections (see the

explanation in the following table) in the list

for switching character entry mode (2) and

press OK/MENU.

Character entry modes

123/

ABC

Toggle between letters and num-

bers by pressing OK/MENU.

More Switch to special characters by

pressing OK/MENU.

This leads to the phone book (3).

Turn TUNE to select a contact

and press OK/MENU to display

the contact's information.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character.

Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the char-

acters that have been entered.

If a number button on the center console is

pressed while the text wheel is displayed, a list

of characters (1) will be displayed. Briefly press

the button once to enter its first letter, twice to

enter the second letter, etc. Continue to press

the button to display other characters. Con-

tinue with the next character, etc.

To enter a number, press and hold the button.

Adding a new contact

Enter the name of a new contact

Switch between character entry modes

(see the following table)

Character entry field

New contacts can be added in phone mode in

Phone menu Phone book New

contact.

1. When Name is highlighted, press OK/

MENU to go to the character entry mode

(see the illustration).

2. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press

OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter

keys on the center console can also be

used.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth

hands-free connection

250

3. Continue to the next letter, etc. The name

entered will be displayed in the character

entry field (2).

4. To switch from letter entry mode to the

entry mode for numbers or special charac-

ters, or to toggle between upper and lower

case letters, etc., turn TUNE to one of the

selections (see the explanation in the fol-

lowing table) in the list (1) and press OK/

MENU.

When you have finished entering the name,

select OK in the list in the display (1) and press

OK/MENU. Continue by entering the phone

number in the same way.

When you have entered the phone number,

press OK/MENU and select a tag for the num-

ber (Mobile phone, Home, Work or General).

Press OK/MENU to confirm.

When all of the contact's information has been

entered, select Save contact in the menu to

save.

123/

ABC

Toggle between letters and num-

bers by pressing OK/MENU.

More Switch to special characters by

pressing OK/MENU.

OK Save and return to Add contact

by pressing OK/MENU.

Toggle between upper and lower

case letters by pressing OK/

MENU.

Press OK/MENU and the cursor

will move to the character entry

field (2) at the top of the display.

The cursor can now be moved by

turning TUNE to a position where

new characters can be entered

or deleted by pressing EXIT. In

order to add characters, return to

text entry mode by pressing OK/

MENU.

Speed dial

Speed dial numbers can be added in phone

mode in Phone menu Phone book

Speed dial.

To use speed dial to make a call in phone

mode, press a button on the center console

keypad followed by OK/MENU. If a contact

has not been saved on the speed dial number

used, you will be prompted to save a contact

on the number selected.

Accept vCards

vCards from other cell phones can be added to

the infotainment system's phone book. To ena-

ble this feature, put the infotainment system in

discoverable mode for Bluetooth. The feature

is activated in Phone menu Phone book

Receive vCard.

Memory status

In phone mode, the memory status of the info-

tainment system's phone book and the con-

nected cell phone's phone book can be seen

in Phone menu Phone book Memory

status.

Clearing the phone book

In phone mode, all entries in the infotainment

system's phone book can be cleared in Phone

menu Phone book Clear phone book.

NOTE

Clearing the entries in the infotainment sys-

tem's phone book does not delete entries in

the cell phone's phone book.

Bluetooth



version information

For information about the Bluetooth version

installed in the vehicle, go to Phone menu

Phone settings Bluetooth software

version in car.

06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

251

Introduction

The infotainment system's voice control fea-

ture1 enables the driver to voice-activate cer-

tain functions in a Bluetooth-connected cell

phone or the navigation system.

NOTE

•The information in this section applies

to using voice commands to operate a

Bluetooth



-connected cell phone.

See also the section "Bluetooth

hands-free connection" beginning on

page 243 for detailed information about

using a cell phone with the vehicle's

infotainment system.

•The navigation system has a separate

user's guide containing information

about voice commands for operating

that system.

Voice commands offer convenience and help

avoid distractions so that you can concentrate

on driving and focus your attention on road and

traffic conditions.

WARNING

As the driver, you have full responsibility for

operating the vehicle safely and adhering to

all applicable traffic regulations.

The voice control feature provides access to a

number of functions in the Bluetooth hands-

free and navigation systems while allowing you

to keep your hands on the steering wheel. Input

is in dialogue form using spoken commands

from the user and verbal prompts from the sys-

tem. Voice control uses the same microphone

as the Bluetooth hands-free system (see the

illustration on page 243) and system prompts

are provided through the infotainment sys-

tem's front speakers.

Languages

List of languages.

Voice control is not available for all languages.

The available languages are indicated by the

icon. The language can be changed in the

MY CAR menu system under MY CAR

Settings System options Language.

1Available in vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System only

06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

252

Getting started

Voice control button (1) on the steering wheel.

Activating the system

Before any phone voice commands can be

used, a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must

be paired with the infotainment system. If a

phone command is given, the system will

inform you If there is no cell phone paired. See

page 244 for information on pairing a cell

phone.

Press the voice control button (1 in the illustra-

tion) to activate the system and initiate a com-

mand dialogue. The system will display com-

monly used commands on the screen when the

button has been pressed.

While using the voice control system, keep the

following points in mind:

•When giving commands, speak at your

usual speed and in a normal tone of voice

after the tone

•The vehicle's doors, windows and moon-

roof should be closed when using the voice

control system

•Avoid background noises in the cabin

when using the system

NOTE

If you are uncertain of the commands that

you can use, saying "help" will prompt the

system to provide a number of commands

that can be used in a specific situation.

Voice control commands can be cancelled

by:

•Saying "cancel"

•Not speaking

•Pressing and holding the voice control

button

•Pressing EXIT or one of the mode but-

tons (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.).

Voice control support feature

•Tutorial: A feature that helps acquaint you

with the system and the procedure for giv-

ing commands.

This feature can be accessed by pressing the

MY CAR button in the center console and turn-

ing TUNE.

Tutorial

The tutorial feature can be started in two ways:

NOTE

The tutorial feature can only be started when

the vehicle is parked and the parking brake

is applied.

•By pressing the voice control button and

saying "Voice tutorial."

•By pressing MY CAR and going to

Settings Voice settings Voice

tutorial. Press OK/MENU to begin the

tutorial lesson.

The tutorial is divided into three lessons, which

take a total of approximately 5 minutes to com-

plete.

By default, the system will begin with the first

lesson. To skip to the next lesson, press the

voice control button and say "next." Go back

to a previous lesson by saying "previous."

Press and hold the voice control button to exit

the tutorial.

06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

253

Voice output volume

Press MY CAR and go to Settings Voice

settings Voice output volume. Press OK/

MENU and turn TUNE to raise or lower the

volume. Press EXIT to save the change and

exit the menu.

Using voice commands

The driver initiates a voice command dialogue

by pressing the voice control button (see the

illustration on page 252).

When a dialogue has been initiated, commonly

used commands will be shown in the display.

Grayed-out texts or texts in parentheses are

not part of the spoken command.

Once you become familiar with the system, you

can speed up the command dialogue by briefly

pressing the voice control button to skip

prompts from the system.

Commands can be given in several ways.

For example, the command "Phone call con-

tact" can be spoken as:

•"Phone > Call contact"—say "Phone," wait

for a system response, and then continue

by saying "Call contact."

•"Phone call contact"—give the entire com-

mand at one time

The following is a list of features that can be

voice-controlled with a Bluetooth-connected

cell phone.

Shortcuts

Shortcut commands for using the phone can

be found in the MY CAR menu system, under

Settings Voice settings Voice

command list Phone commands and

General commands. See page 191 for more

information on the menu system.

Dialing a number

The system understands the digits zero to nine.

These numbers can be spoken individually, in

groups of several digits at a time, or the entire

number can be given at once. Numbers above

nine will not be recognized.

The following is an example of a voice com-

mand dialogue. The system's response may

vary depending on the situation.

The user initiates the dialogue by saying:

Phone > dial number

Phone dial number

System response

Number please

User action

Begin saying the digits in the phone number. If

you say several digits and pause, the system

will repeat them and prompt you by saying

"Continue."

Continue saying the digits. When you have fin-

ished, complete the command by saying

"Dial."

•You can also change the number by using

the commands "Correction" (which dele-

tes the last group of digits spoken) or

"Delete" (which will erase the entire phone

number).

Dialing from a call list

The dialogue below enables you make a call

from one of your cell phone's call lists.

The user initiates the dialogue by saying:

Phone > dial from call list

Phone dial from call list

Continue by responding to the system's

prompts.

Calling a contact

The dialogue below enables you to call the pre-

defined contacts in your cell phone. See the

phone's user's guide if necessary.

06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

254

The user initiates the dialogue by saying:

Phone > call contact

Phone call contact

Continue by responding to the system's

prompts.

When calling contacts, keep the following in

mind:

•If there are several contacts with similar

names, they will be presented in the dis-

play in numbered lines and the system will

prompt you to pick a line number

•If there are more lines in the list than can

be displayed at one time, saying "Down"

will enable you to scroll downward in the

list (and saying "up" will take you back up

through the list).

Dialing voice mail

The dialogue below enables you to call your

voice mail to check any messages that you

may have received. Your voice mail phone

number must be registered in the Bluetooth

function, see page 247.

The user initiates the dialogue by saying:

Phone > dial voice mail

Phone dial voice mail

Continue by responding to the system's

prompts.

06 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255

Overview

Screen: channel A (left), channel B (right)

Headphone socket

On/Off button

A/V-AUX socket

Remote control

Headphones

IR transceiver

Introduction

The RSE system1 provides entertainment for

the rear seat passengers by making it possible

to e.g., watch a film, play music, listen to the

radio or connect an external device such as a

game console.

RSE is fully integrated into the vehicle's info-

tainment system and can be used at the same

time as other infotainment features.

For example, if a rear seat passenger is using

A/V-AUX and headphones, the driver and front

seat passenger can still use the vehicle's radio

or media player. However, only one disc can be

played in the media player at a time. You can

listen to music from e.g., an iPod or from

streaming audio files using the Bluetooth

function.

The RSE system can be controlled from the

front screen (parental control).

Different media can be played or viewed from

different sources on the various screens (front

center console and/or the respective screens

in the rear seat). It is also possible to play or

view media from the same source on one or

1This system may not be available as an option on all markets.

06 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

256 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

more of the screens. However, it is not possible

to play a film from USB while a CD or DVD is

being played.

CAUTION

When transporting large objects in the rear

seat, be sure that there is adequate space

between the object(s) and the RSE screens

to help avoid scratching or damaging these

screens.

If necessary, cover the screens with a suit-

able material.

NOTE

•The RSE screens and remote control

may not function in very low or very high

cabin temperatures. They will become

operable again after the climate control

system has created a comfortable tem-

perature in the cabin.

•Keep the IR transceivers' lenses clean

by wiping them regularly with a damp

cloth. A dirty lens could affect the func-

tion of the remote control.

Ignition modes and electrical current to

RSE

RSE can be activated with the ignition in

modes I or II (and when the engine is running).

See page 84 for detailed information about the

various ignition modes. If a film is being played,

it will stop momentarily while the engine is

being started and will resume when the engine

is running.

NOTE

Using RSE for more than approx.

10 minutes when the engine is not running

will drain the vehicle's battery and may

make the engine difficult or impossible to

start.

A message will be displayed on the screen

if the battery's charge level becomes too

low.

Using the system's menus

Selections in the RSE menus are made using

the remote control. See page 261 for more

information about the RSE menus.

Remote control

A remote control is included with the RSE sys-

tem, which can be used to control both screens

in the rear seat as well as other infotainment

system functions.

See page 264 for more detailed information

about the remote control.

Cordless headphones

Switch for selecting channel A (CH.A) or

channel B (CH.B)

On/Off button

Volume

On/Off indicator light

Two sets of cordless headphones are included

with the RSE system.

The cordless headphones are activated using

the On/Off button (2). The indicator light (4) will

illuminate when the headphones are on. Select

CH.A (channel A) or CH.B (channel B) with

switch (1). Use control (3) to adjust the volume.

06 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257

NOTE

The headphones will switch off automati-

cally after approx. 3 minutes if they are not

used.

Replacing batteries in the headphones

The headphones use two AAA batteries.

It is advisable to have extra batteries on hand

during long trips.

Battery cover and retaining screw

1. Unscrew the retaining screw and remove

the battery cover.

2. Remove the old batteries and insert new

ones in the directions indicated by the

symbols in the battery holder.

3. Put the cover back in place and tighten the

retaining screw.

Disposing of old batteries

Worn out batteries should be disposed of in an

environmentally responsible manner.

Headphone socket

External headphones can be connected to the

3.5 mm headphone socket on the side of the

head restraint (see the illustration on page

255 for the location of this socket). Adjust the

volume with the remote control.

A/V-AUX socket, 12-volt socket

This A/V-AUX socket is used to connect exter-

nal devices to the RSE system. When connect-

ing an external device, always follow the

instructions provided with the device. Devices

connected through the A/V-AUX socket can

use the screens, cordless headphones, the

3.5 mm headphone socket and the infotain-

ment system's speakers.

CAUTION

Please be aware that external devices con-

nected through the A/V-AUX socket may

cause interference in the RSE system.

Connecting a device to the A/V-AUX

socket

The A/V-AUX socket is located under the center

armrest in the tunnel console

1. Connect the device's video cable to the

yellow connector.

2. Connect the left audio cable to the white

connector and the right audio cable to the

red one.

3. If the device is designed to use 12-volt cur-

rent, connect its power cable to the 12-volt

socket (see page 210 for the location of this

socket).

Always follow the device's instructions when

connecting it to the RSE system.

06 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Audio/video playback through the A/V-

AUX socket

1. Switch on one of the rear screens by press-

ing its On/Off button.

2. Use the remote control's button to

select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front

screen, or R: right rear screen). Point the

remote control toward the selected

screen's IR transceiver and press the

button several times to come to A/V

AUX . Release the button and wait several

seconds to confirm your choice.

3. Switch on the connected device and press

PLAY (or the device's equivalent button).

Input volume

Adjust the input volume in the RSE menu,

under A/V AUX input volume.

Activating RSE

The RSE system can be activated using con-

trols on the front or rear screens.

From the front seat, press MEDIA (see the fol-

lowing illustration) and select RSE.

From the rear seat, press the screen's On/Off

button. Use the remote control's button

to select a screen (L: left rear screen or R: right

rear screen). Point the remote control toward

the selected screen's IR transceiver and con-

tinue by pressing the or button on

the remote control to select a source such as

Disc, etc.

Settings made from the front center

control panel

MEDIA

TUNE

OK/MENU

EXIT

Selecting a source for the rear screens

from the front center control panel

An audio/video source for the rear screen(s)

can be selected from the front center control

panel. The same source can be selected for

both rear screens or different sources can be

selected for the respective screens.

1. Press MEDIA several times to come to

RSE on the front screen. Wait several sec-

onds for your selection to be confirmed.

2. Turn TUNE to select one or both of the rear

screens and confirm by pressing OK/

MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to select RADIO, MEDIA (or

RSE settings). Press OK/MENU to con-

firm.

4. Turn TUNE to the desired source (for

example, Disc) and confirm by pressing

OK/MENU. The selected source will begin

playing automatically (if there is a disc in

the media player).

Cancel and return by pressing EXIT.

Settings can also be made with the remote

control. See page 264 for more detailed infor-

mation.

Muting

Audio for the rear screens can be muted from

the front center control panel. This function can

be activated under RSE settings Mute as

explained in points 2-4 in the section "Select-

ing a source for the rear screens from the front

center control panel."

06 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259

Switching off the rear screens

Both of rear screens can be switched off from

the front center control panel. This function can

be activated under RSE settings Display

off as explained in points 2-4 in the section

"Selecting a source for the rear screens from

the front center control panel" on page 258.

Press one of the remote control's number keys

(0 - 9) to switch the screens on again. The

screens will also be switched on when the igni-

tion is switched on.

Disabling the remote control (front)

The IR transceiver for the front screen can be

switched off, which means that the remote

control cannot be used on the front screen.

This function can be activated under RSE

settings Disable remote control (front) as

explained in points 2-4 in the section "Select-

ing a source for the rear screens from the front

center control panel" on page 258.

Rear screen settings2

When watching a video file, a pop-up menu can

be displayed by pressing on the remote

control. The content of this menu will vary,

depending on the what is being played/viewed.

Day/Night mode

The screens can be set for three different light-

ing conditions: Auto, Day or Night.

Press on the remote control and change

the setting under Day/Night mode on the

screen. See also page 261 for additional infor-

mation about the RSE menus.

Image settings

Screen settings can be made for brightness,

contrast, tint and color.

Press on the remote control and change

the setting under Image settings on the

screen. See also page 261 for additional infor-

mation about the RSE menus.

Screen aspect ratio

Three screen aspect ratios can be set: Normal,

Zoom 1 and Zoom 2.

Normal: The image on the screen is presented

at the normal aspect ratio (usually 4:3 or 16:9).

Zoom 1: Full-screen image, but parts of the

image will not be viewable.

Zoom 2: Full-screen image, but the aspect

ratio will be slightly distorted.

Unless otherwise indicated, the aspect ratio

will be Normal.

Press on the remote control and change

the setting under Aspect ratio on the screen.

See also page 261 for additional information

about the RSE menus.

Source menu

The content of each source's pop-up menu will

vary, depending on what is being played/

viewed, for example: CD/DVD data menu or

USB menu. See also page 261 for additional

information about the RSE menus.

DVD menu

If a DVD video is being viewed, this selection

will appear in the pop-up menu. See also page

261 for additional information about the RSE

menus.

2Applies only when watching video files.

3Applies only to video DVDs.

06 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Rear screen menu settings

See also page 261 for additional information

about the RSE menus.

Random

See page 235 for additional information.

Repeat folder

See page 236 for additional information.

DivX



Video On Demand

The media player can be registered to play

DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or

USB. The registration code can be found by

pressing the MY CAR button, and going to

Settings Information DivX® VOD

code. Go to www.divx.com/vod for additional

information.

USB hub

A USB hub can be connected to the USB

socket (see page 239 for additional informa-

tion).

Music, video and radio

Listening to music

Music from disc tracks/audio files can be

played through the media player's USB/AUX

sockets or from streaming audio files coming

from a Bluetooth-connected cell phone.

For more information about the media player,

see page 236, see page 238 for information

about the AUX/USB sockets and see page

241 for information about Bluetooth media.

1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select

CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the

right screen.

2. Use the remote control's button to

select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front

screen, or R: right rear screen). Point the

remote control toward a screen's IR trans-

ceiver and press one or more times

to come to the desired source (Disc, USB,

AUX, etc.), release the button and wait

several seconds for your selection to be

accepted.

3. Insert a CD in the infotainment system's

media player, or connect an external

device to the vehicle's USB/AUX sockets

or via Bluetooth.

Playback and navigating in playlists

Navigate using the remote control's scroll

wheel (see the illustration on page 264) to

select the desired playlist or folder structure.

Use to confirm the choice of a sub-folder

or to begin playing the selected track/audio file.

Tracks/audio files can also be played by press-

ing on the remote control and change

tracks/audio files by pressing / .

Stop playback by pressing .

See page 236 for more information about the

media player.

Watching a video

Video tracks/files can be viewed via the vehi-

cle's media player or the USB socket.

For more information about the media player,

see page 236 or page 238 for information about

the USB socket.

1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select

CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the

right screen.

2. Use the remote control's button to

select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front

screen, or R: right rear screen). Point the

remote control toward a screen's IR trans-

ceiver and press one or more times

4Applies to CD audio, CDs/DVDs, USB and iPod



5Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only.

06 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261

to select the desired source (Disc or USB),

release the button and wait several sec-

onds for your selection to be accepted.

3. Insert a DVD in the infotainment system's

media player, or connect an external

device to the vehicle's USB socket.

Playback and navigation

Play a video track/video file by pressing

on the remote control and change tracks/video

files by pressing / . Stop playback

by pressing . See page 235 for more

information about playback and navigation on

video DVDs and page 236 for information

about playing video files.

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the / buttons to fast

forward/reverse. Fast forward/reverse can be

done at several speeds for video files by briefly

pressing these buttons to increase the speed.

Fast forward/reverse is done at one speed for

audio files. Stop fast forward/reverse by press-

ing , or the / buttons.

Listening to the radio

You can also listen to the infotainment sys-

tem's radio through the RSE system.

1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select

CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the

right screen.

2. Point the remote control toward a screen's

IR transceiver and press one or more

times to come to the desired source (AM,

FM1, SAT1*, etc.), release the button and

wait several seconds for your selection to

be accepted.

3. Select a station using one of the preset

buttons (0 - 9) on the remote control or

press / to search for the next/

previous available station.

See page 225 for more information about the

radio.

RSE menus

Introduction

Settings in the RSE menus can be made from

the front center console control panel or by

using the remote control in the rear seat. A

source for one of the rear screens can be acti-

vated from the front center control panel and

certain settings for the rear screens can also be

made from this panel.

RSE front screen menus

To access this menu, begin by selecting RSE

under MEDIA by pressing this button on the

front center console (or by using the remote

control or the steering wheel keypad). Continue

by pressing OK/MENU to access the menu.

Turn TUNE to the desired selection and con-

firm by pressing OK/MENU.

Settings can be made for the left or right rear

screen separately or for both screens (Left

RSE screen menu, Right RSE screen

menu and Both RSE screen menus):

Power off/Power on

RADIO

MEDIA

RSE settings

Mute

Display off

Disable remote control (front)

Reset all RSE settings

06 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

RSE pop-up menu6

Press on the remote control while a video

file is playing to display the pop-up menu. Use

the scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote

to make menu selections. See page 264 for

detailed information about the remote control.

Screen aspect ration

Image settings

Day/Night mode

Source menu7

DVD disc menu8

RSE rear screen menus

Press on the remote control when a

source (e.g., Disc) has been selected to access

the RSE-menus for the rear screens.

Use the scroll wheel and the buttons on the

remote to make menu selections. See page

264 for detailed information about the remote

control.

RADIO

The menus for AM, FM1, FM2, SAT1* and

SAT2* are:

Day/Night mode

Display off

Reset all RSE settings

MEDIA

RSE CD Audio menu

Disc menu

Random

Day/Night mode

Display off

Reset all CD settings

RSE CD/DVD Data menu

Disc menu

Random

Repeat folder

DivX® VOD code

Day/Night mode

Display off

Reset all CD/DVD settings

RSE DVD Video menu

DVD Video Menu

DVD disc menu

Subtitles

Audio tracks

Advanced settings

Day/Night mode

Display off

Reset all DVD settings

RSE USB menu

USB menu

Random

Repeat folder

DivX® VOD code

Select USB device

Day/Night mode

Display off

Reset all USB settings

6Applies only when a video file is playing.

7The content of the menu will vary according to what is being played, for example CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.

8Applies to DVD videos only

06 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263

RSE AUX menu

AUX menu

AUX input volume

Day/Night mode

Display off

Reset all AUX settings

RSE A/V-AUX menu

A/V AUX menu

A/V AUX input volume

Day/Night mode

Display off

Reset all A/V-AUX settings

RSE iPod menu

iPod menu

Random

Day/Night mode

Display off

Reset all iPod settings

RSE Bluetooth



Bluetooth menu

Random

Day/Night mode

Display off

Reset all Bluetooth settings

06 Infotainment

Remote control*

264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control1

The remote control included with the Rear Seat

Entertainment system (RSE)* can be used to

control all of the infotainment system's func-

tions.

To use the remote, begin by pressing its

button to select a screen (L: left rear

screen, F: front screen, or R: right rear screen).

Continue by pointing the remote toward the

selected rear screen's IR transceiver (see the

illustration on page 255) or to the front screen's

IR transceiver located to the right of the INFO

button on the center console.

To control one of the rear RSE screens, select

L (left)/R (right) using the remote's but-

ton. Continue by pointing the remote at the

selected screen's IR transceiver (see the illus-

tration on page 255 for its location).

WARNING

To help avoid the risk of injuries in the event

of sudden braking or a collision, always

stow loose objects such as the remote con-

trol, cell phones, cameras, etc. in the glove

compartment or other storage compart-

ments when not in use.

The scroll wheel has the same function as

TUNE in the center console control panel.

NOTE

Avoid exposing the remote control to strong

sunlight, for instance by leaving it on the

dashboard. This could cause problems with

its batteries.

Button Function

Select a screen (L: left rear), (F:

front) or (R: right rear)

Switch to the optional Volvo Nav-

igation system

Select one of the infotainment

system's radio wavebands (AM,

FM1, etc.)

Select one of the infotainment

system's sources (Disc, USB,

etc.)

Select the Bluetooth hands-free

feature

Fast reverse, change tracks/

songs

Play/pause

1Vehicles with the optional Rear Seat Entertainment system only.

06 Infotainment

Remote control*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265

Button Function

Stop

Fast forward, change tracks/

songs

DVD menu

Go back one step in a menu, can-

cel a function or delete entered

characters

Navigate up/down

Navigate right/left

Confirm a selection or go to the

current source's main menu

Reduce volume

Increase volume

0-9 Use to select preset channels or

enter characters

Button Function

One-button access to frequently

used functions (which must be

programmed into the button, see

page 220

Information about the current

film, song, etc., or to display

information not currently shown

on the screen

Select language for audio tracks

Subtitles, select subtitle lan-

guage

Not in use

Replacing batteries

The remote control runs on four AA/LR6 bat-

teries.

NOTE

The batteries' normal service life ranges

from 1-4 years, depending on how often the

remote is used. If the remote is not working

properly, try replacing the four AA/LR6 bat-

teries.

It is advisable to have extra batteries on long

trips.

1. Press down on the battery cover and slide

it in the direction indicated in the illustra-

tion.

2. Remove the old batteries and insert new

ones in the directions indicated by the

symbols in the battery holder.

3. Slide the cover back into place.

Worn out batteries should be disposed of in an

environmentally responsible manner.

266

Driving recommendations..................................................................... 268

Refueling............................................................................................... 271

Loading................................................................................................. 276

Cargo area ........................................................................................... 280

Towing a trailer...................................................................................... 283

Emergency towing................................................................................ 286

DURING YOUR TRIP

07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

268

General information

Economical driving conserves natural

resources

Better driving economy may be obtained by

thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops

and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to

immediate traffic conditions.

Observe the following rules:

•Bring the engine to normal operating tem-

perature as soon as possible by driving

with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for

the first few minutes of operation. A cold

engine uses more fuel and is subject to

increased wear.

•Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle

for driving short distances. This does not

allow the engine to reach normal operating

temperature.

•Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration

and hard braking.

•Use the transmission's Drive (D) position

as often as possible and avoid using kick-

down.

•Using the transmission's Sport mode1 may

increase fuel consumption somewhat. Use

the transmission's Drive (D) position as

often as possible. See page 122 for addi-

tional information about Sport mode.

•Do not exceed posted speed limits.

•Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra

load) in the vehicle.

•Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire

pressure regularly (when tires are cold).

•Remove snow tires when threat of snow or

ice has ended.

•Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,

increase air resistance and also fuel con-

sumption.

•At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-

tion will be lower with the air conditioning

on and the windows closed than with the

air conditioning off and the windows open.

•Using the onboard trip computer's fuel

consumption modes can help you learn

how to drive more economically.

Other factors that decrease gas mileage

are:

•Dirty air cleaner

•Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter

•Dragging brakes

•Incorrect front end alignment

Some of the above mentioned items and others

are checked at the standard maintenance

intervals.

WARNING

Driving with the tailgate open: Driving with

the tailgate open could lead to poisonous

exhaust gases entering the passenger com-

partment. If the tailgate must be kept open

for any reason, proceed as follows:

•Close the windows

•Set the ventilation system control to air

flow to floor, windshield and side win-

dows and the blower control to its high-

est setting.

Weight distribution affects handling

At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a

tendency to understeer, which means that the

steering wheel has to be turned more than

might seem appropriate for the curvature of a

bend. This ensures good stability and reduces

the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that

these properties can alter with the vehicle load.

The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less

the tendency to understeer.

Handling, roadholding

Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure

all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check

that the tires are inflated to the recommended

pressure according to the vehicle load. See the

"Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis-

1Models with the T6 turbo engine only.

07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

269

tributed so that capacity weight or maximum

permissible axle loads are not exceeded.

Driving through water

•The vehicle can be driven through water up

to a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm),

at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).

•Take particular care when driving through

flowing water.

•Clean the electrical connections for trailer

wiring after driving in mud or water.

•When driving through water, maintain low

speed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING

After driving through water, press lightly on

the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes

are functioning normally. Water or mud can

make the brake linings slippery, resulting in

delayed braking effect.

CAUTION

•Engine damage will occur if water is

drawn into the air cleaner.

•If the vehicle is driven through water

deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may

enter the differential and the transmis-

sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating

capacity and may shorten the service

life of these components.

•Do not allow the vehicle to stand in

water up to the door sills longer than

absolutely necessary. This could result

in electrical malfunctions.

•If the engine has been stopped while the

vehicle is in water, do not attempt to

restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of

the water.

Engine and cooling system

Under special conditions, for example when

driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with

heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and

cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol-

lows to avoid overheating the engine.

•Maintain a low speed when driving with a

trailer up long, steep hills.

•Do not turn the engine off immediately

when stopping after a hard drive.

WARNING

The cooling fan may start or continue to

operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine

has been switched off.

•Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of

the grille when driving in hot weather con-

ditions.

•Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm

if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil

temperature could become too high.

Conserving electrical current

Keep the following in mind to help minimize

battery drain:

•When the engine is not running, avoid

using ignition mode II. Many electrical sys-

tems (the audio system, the optional navi-

gation system, power windows, etc) will

function in ignition modes 0 and I. These

modes reduce drain on the battery.

•Please keep in mind that using systems,

accessories, etc., that consume a great

deal of current when the engine is not run-

ning could result in the battery being com-

pletely drained. Driving or having the

engine running for approximately

15 minutes will help keep the battery

charged.

•The optional 12 volt socket in the cargo

area provides electrical current even with

07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

270

the ignition switched off, which drains the

battery.

Before a long distance trip

It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle

checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician before driving long distances.

Your retailer will also be able to supply you with

bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for

your use in the event that problems occur.

As a minimum, the following items should be

checked before any long trip:

•Check that engine runs smoothly and that

fuel consumption is normal.

•Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.

•Have the transmission oil level checked.

•Check condition of drive belts.

•Check state of the battery's charge.

•Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as

well), and replace those that are worn.

Check tire pressures.

•The brakes, front wheel alignment, and

steering gear should be checked by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian only.

•Check all lights, including high beams.

•Reflective warning triangles are legally

required in some states/provinces.

•Have a word with a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician if you intend to

drive in countries where it may be difficult

to obtain the correct fuel.

•Consider your destination. If you will be

driving through an area where snow or ice

are likely to occur, consider snow tires.

Cold weather precautions

If you wish to check your vehicle before the

approach of cold weather, the following advice

is worth noting:

•Make sure that the engine coolant contains

50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture

will reduce freeze protection. This gives

protection against freezing down to

–31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" anti-

freeze is not approved by Volvo. Different

types of antifreeze must not be mixed.

•Volvo recommends using only genuine

Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.

•Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this

helps prevent the formation of condensa-

tion in the tank. In addition, in extremely

cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to

add fuel line de-icer before refueling.

•The viscosity of the engine oil is important.

Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves

cold-weather starting as well as decreas-

ing fuel consumption while the engine is

warming up. 0W-30 oil is recommended for

driving in areas with sustained low temper-

atures.

•The load placed on the battery is greater

during the winter since the windshield wip-

ers, lighting, etc., are used more often.

Moreover, the capacity of the battery

decreases as the temperature drops. In

very cold weather, a poorly charged bat-

tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there-

fore advisable to check the state of charge

more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil

on the battery posts.

•Volvo recommends the use of snow tires

on all four wheels for winter driving, see

page 304.

•To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from

freezing, add washer solvents containing

antifreeze. This is important since dirt is

often splashed on the windshield during

winter driving, requiring the frequent use of

the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer

Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down

to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and

4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part

washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to

0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and

2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C):

1 part washer solvent and 1 part water.

•Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.

•Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can

cause damage to the locks.

07 During your trip

Refueling

271

Fuel requirements

Deposit control gasoline (detergent

additives)

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-

oline to control engine deposits. Detergent

gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and

intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit

control gasolines will help ensure good driva-

bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure

whether the gasoline contains deposit control

additives, check with the service station oper-

ator.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of exter-

nal fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel

Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter

and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and

Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv-

ering unleaded gasoline be labeled "UNLEA-

DED". Only these pumps have nozzles which

fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis-

pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled

"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline

damages the three-way catalytic converter and

the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated

use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-

ness of the emission control system and could

result in loss of emission warranty coverage.

State and local vehicle inspection programs

will make detection of misfueling easier, pos-

sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis-

fueled vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain

an octane enhancing additive called methyl-

cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission

Control System performance may be affec-

ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc-

tion indicator light) located on your instru-

ment panel may light. If this occurs, please

return your vehicle to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for service.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,

"Oxygenated fuels"

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or

ethers. In some areas, state or local laws

require that the service pump be marked indi-

cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,

there are areas in which the pumps are

unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is

alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check

with the service station operator. To meet sea-

sonal air quality standards, some areas require

the use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen-

ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed

on page 272 must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol

Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume

may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to

as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to

15% MTBE may be used.

Methanol

Do not use gasolines containing methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice

can result in vehicle performance deterioration

and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys-

tem. Such damage may not be covered under

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

07 During your trip

Refueling

272

Octane rating

Minimum octane

G028920

Typical pump octane label

Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per-

formance, but using 87 octane1 or above will

not affect engine reliability.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as oper-

ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,

or driving for extended periods at higher alti-

tudes than normal, it may be advisable to

switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to

change gasoline brands to fully utilize your

engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos-

sible operation.

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel or

changing gasoline brands, it may be neces-

sary to fill the tank more than once before a

difference in engine operation is noticeable.

Fuel Formulations

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a

knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.

Besides damaging the exhaust emission con-

trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been

strongly linked to certain forms of cancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.

Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to

certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area

where you must fill your own gas tank, take

precautions. These may include:

•standing upwind away from the filler nozzle

while refueling

•refueling only at gas stations with vapor

recovery systems that fully seal the mouth

of the filler neck during refueling

•wearing neoprene gloves while handling a

fuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives

With the exception of gas line antifreeze during

winter months, do not add solvents, thicken-

ers, or other store-bought additives to your

vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.

Overuse may damage your engine, and some

of these additives contain organically volatile

chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself

to these chemicals.

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switched

on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone

rings, this may cause a spark that could

ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and

injury.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,

and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust

gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes

inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger

compartment is ventilated, and immediately

return the vehicle to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for correction.

1AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

07 During your trip

Refueling

273

Opening/closing the fuel filler door

The fuel filler door is located on the right rear

fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel

tank symbol on the information display )

With the ignition switched off, press and

release the button on the lighting panel to

unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the

fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the

vehicle begins to move forward. An audible

click will be heard when the fuel filler door

relocks.

•If you intend to leave your vehicle while it

is being refueled, this feature enables you

to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving the

fuel filler door unlocked.

•You can also keep the vehicle locked if you

remain inside it during refueling. The cen-

tral locking button does not lock the fuel

filler door.

•Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed

and is completely closed after refueling.

•Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot

weather.

Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click

indicates that it is closed.

CAUTION

•Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.

In addition to causing damage to the

environment, gasolines containing

alcohol can cause damage to painted

surfaces, which may not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty.

Manually opening the fuel filler door

If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened

manually:

1. Open the side hatch in the cargo compart-

ment (on the same side as the fuel filler

door).

2. Grasp the green cord with a handle.

3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until

the fuel filler door clicks open.

07 During your trip

Refueling

274

Opening/closing the fuel cap

Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the

filler cap slowly.

After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turn-

ing it clockwise until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

•Do not refuel with the engine running2.

Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the

ignition is on, an incorrect reading could

occur in the fuel gauge.

•Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not

press the handle on the filler nozzle

more than one extra time. Too much fuel

in the tank in hot weather conditions can

cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling

could also cause damage to the emis-

sion control systems.

Emission controls

Three-way catalytic converter

•Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain

engine malfunctions, particularly involving

the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition

systems, may cause unusually high three-

way catalytic converter temperatures. Do

not continue to operate your vehicle if you

detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of

power or other unusual operating condi-

tions, such as engine overheating or back-

firing. A properly tuned engine will help

avoid malfunctions that could damage the

three-way catalytic converter.

•Do not park your vehicle over combustible

materials, such as grass or leaves, which

can come into contact with the hot exhaust

system and cause such materials to ignite

under certain wind and weather condi-

tions.

•Excessive starter cranking (in excess of

one minute), or an intermittently firing or

flooded engine can cause three-way cata-

lytic converter or exhaust system over-

heating.

•Remember that tampering or unauthorized

modifications to the engine, the Engine

Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille-

gal and can cause three-way catalytic con-

verter or exhaust system overheating. This

includes: altering fuel injection settings or

components, altering emission system

components or location or removing com-

ponents, and/or repeated use of leaded

fuel.

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with

three-way catalytic converters.

2If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's

performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

07 During your trip

Refueling

275

Heated oxygen sensors

The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy-

gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings

are fed into a control module that continuously

monitors engine functions and controls fuel

injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine

is continuously adjusted for efficient combus-

tion to help reduce harmful emissions.

07 During your trip

276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is

determined by factors such as the number of

passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight

of any accessories that may be installed, etc.

To increase loading space, the rear seat back-

rests can be folded down, see page 89.

When loading the cargo area, keep the follow-

ing in mind:

•Load objects in the cargo area against the

backrest whenever possible.

•Unstable loads can be secured to the load

anchoring eyelets with straps or web lash-

ings to help keep them from shifting.

•Stop the engine and apply the parking

brake when loading or unloading long

objects. The gear selector can be knocked

out of position by long loads, which could

set the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

•Stop the engine, put the gear selector in

P, and apply the parking brake when

loading or unloading long objects.

•The vehicle's driving characteristics

may change depending on the weight

and distribution of the load.

•A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a

force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a

head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).

•The cargo area and rear seat should not

be loaded to a level higher than 2 in.

(5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear

side windows. Objects placed higher

than this level could impede the func-

tion of the Inflatable Curtain.

Power tailgate*

G031965

Power tailgate closing button

Automatic opening

The power tailgate can be opened automati-

cally in the three ways:

•By pressing and holding the but-

ton on the lighting panel until the tailgate

begins to open.

•By pressing and holding the button

on the remote key until the tailgate begins

to open.

•By pressing the rubber-covered button

under the outer handle on the tailgate.

The taillights illuminate automatically when the

automatic open function is used.

07 During your trip

277

CAUTION

Be sure that there is adequate space above

and behind the vehicle before opening the

tailgate automatically.

The vehicle should not be driven or moved

with the tailgate in the open position. How-

ever, if the vehicle is moved with the tailgate

in the open position, the automatic closing

function will be inoperative until one of the

following occurs:

•The tailgate is closed manually

•The ignition is switched off and the key

is removed for approximately 10

minutes (the tailgate will function again

after restart).

NOTE

If the tailgate has been opened and closed

continuously for more than 60 seconds, the

automatic function will be deactivated to

avoid overloading the electrical system. The

automatic function can be used again after

approximately 10 minutes.

If the vehicle's battery has been discharged

or disconnected, the tailgate must be

opened and closed once manually to reset

the system.

Programming the tailgate opening angle

The tailgate's maximum opening angle can be

programmed, which can be useful, for exam-

ple, if the tailgate has to be opened in a garage

with a low ceiling.

To do so:

•Open the tailgate manually, hold it at the

desired maximum opening angle and

press the tailgate's closing button for at

least 3 seconds. When the tailgate is

released, programming is complete.

•To remove this programming, open the tail-

gate manually to a higher opening angle.

Automatic closing

The power tailgate can be closed by pressing

the button on the tailgate (see the illus-

tration) or by pressing it down.

NOTE

If the tailgate is pressed down e.g., by the

weight of snow or strong wind, it will close

automatically.

WARNING

Be sure that no one is near the tailgate when

it is opened or closed automatically. The

tailgate should never be obstructed in any

way when it is operated.

Interrupting automatic opening/closing

Automatic opening or closing the tailgate can

be interrupted in four ways:

•By pressing the button on the

lighting panel.

•By pressing the button on the

remote key.

•By pressing the button on the lower edge

of the tailgate.

•By pressing the rubber-covered button

under the outer handle on the tailgate.

If one of these actions is taken, the tailgate will

stop and reopen.

Pinch protection

If the tailgate is obstructed while it is being

operated, the pinch protection function is acti-

vated.

•If the tailgate is being opened, the electri-

cal function will be switched off and the

tailgate will be released from the electrical

system.

•If the tailgate is being closed, it will stop

and reopen.

Operating the tailgate manually

The power tailgate can be disconnected from

the vehicle’s electrical system by quickly pull-

07 During your trip

278 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

ing the outer handle twice. The tailgate can

then be opened/closed manually.

Folding down the rear seat backrests

The rear seat backrests can be folded down for

additional loading space, see page 91.

Load anchoring eyelets

The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the

vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to help

anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING

•Cover sharp edges on long loads to help

prevent injury to occupants. Secure the

load to help prevent shifting during sud-

den stops.

•Always secure large and heavy objects

with a seat belt or cargo retaining

straps.

•Always secure the load to help prevent

it from moving in the event of sudden

stops.

•Switch off the engine, apply the parking

brake and put the gear selector in P

when loading and unloading the vehicle.

Grocery bag holder*

G017745

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo

area

The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags

in place.

1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo

area.

2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

07 During your trip

279

Roof loads

Using load carriers

Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso-

ries. Observe the following points when in use:

•To avoid damaging your vehicle and to

achieve maximum safety when driving, we

recommend using the load carriers that

Volvo has developed especially for your

vehicle.

•Volvo-approved removable roof racks are

designed to carry the maximum allowable

roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).

For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man-

ufacturer's weight limits for the rack.

•Never exceed the rack manufacturer's

weigh limits and never exceed the maxi-

mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).

•Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads

evenly.

•Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the

load.

•Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-

ate tie-down equipment.

•Check periodically that the load carriers

and load are properly secured.

•Remember that the vehicle's center of

gravity and handling change when you

carry a load on the roof.

•The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel con-

sumption will increase with the size of the

load.

•Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast

cornering and hard braking.

07 During your trip

Cargo area

280 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Steel cargo grid*

G031978

Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid

that helps prevent objects in the cargo area

from moving forward into the passenger com-

partment.

Folding the grid up/down

Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it

rearward/upward, or push it downward/for-

ward.

NOTE

If the steel grid is to be used with the

optional cargo area cover, the grid must be

folded down before the cargo area cover is

put in place.

Installing the steel cargo grid

For information about the necessary tools and

procedures for installing/removing the steel

cargo grid, please refer to the assembly

instructions1 that were included when the grid

was purchased.

Cargo area cover*

G031977

Use

•Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it

into the holes in the rear cargo area pillars.

•To retract (roll up) the cover, release it from

the holes and guide it toward the rear seat

backrest.

Installing the cover

1. Press the end piece on one side of the

cargo area cover into the retaining bracket

in the side panel of the cargo area .

2. Do the same on the opposite side .

3. Press both sides of the cover until they

click into place . The red mark will no

longer be visible.

4. Check that both ends of the cover are

securely locked in place.

Removing the cover

1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover

inward.

2. Pull the cover carefully upward and out-

ward. The other end will release automati-

cally from its retaining bracket.

Folding down the cargo area cover's rear

flap

The cargo area cover's rear flap points hori-

zontally when the cover is retracted (rolled up).

To fold it down:

–Pull the flap slightly rearward past its sup-

ports and fold it down.

1Assembly instruction no. 30715972.

07 During your trip

Cargo area

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 281

NOTE

On models equipped with this cover, it

should be removed before a child seat is

attached to the child restraint anchors.

Cargo net*

G034213

Cargo net mounted in rear position

Your vehicle can be equipped with a cargo net

made of strong nylon fabric that helps prevent

objects in the cargo area from moving forward

into the passenger compartment.

The net can be attached in two different places:

•Rear position: behind the rear seat back-

rest

•Front position: behind the front seat back-

rests

WARNING

•Be sure that the cargo net's upper

attachment hooks are properly inserted

in the brackets and that the lower straps

are correctly attached and pulled taut.

•A damaged cargo net should never be

used.

•Objects in the cargo area should be

securely anchored, even if the cargo net

is correctly installed and in use.

Mounting the cargo net

The cargo net is easiest to put in place through

one of the rear doors.

1. Fold out the cargo net and be sure that the

upper hinged rod is straight and locked in

position.

2. Insert one end of the rod into the front or

rear bracket (near the ceiling). Be sure that

the lock on the lower strap is facing toward

you.

3. Insert the other end of the rod in the oppo-

site bracket.

– Be sure to press the end hooks on the rod

as far forward as possible in the brackets.

Cargo net in rear position

4. Mounting in the rear position: With the net's

rod attached to the rear upper brackets,

hook the lower straps in the floor eyelets in

the cargo area. Pull the net strap taut.

07 During your trip

Cargo area

282

Cargo net in front position

Mounting in the front position: With the

net's rod attached to the front upper brack-

ets, hook the lower straps in the eyelets in

the front seat rails. Attaching the net is eas-

ier if the front seat backrests are upright

and the seats are moved slightly forward.

If the front seats are moved rearward, they

should not press hard against the net.

CAUTION

Pressure from the front seats against the

cargo net could damage the net and/or its

brackets.

5. Pull the net strap taut.

Removing and storing the cargo net

Press the release buttons on the locks on

the straps and pull out a small section of

the strap.

Press in the catches on the straps' hooks

and remove the hooks from the eyelet.

Fold up the net's rod at the center and roll

up the net.

When not in use, the cargo net can be stored

under floor of the cargo area.

07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

283

Introduction

Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer

hitches that are specially designed for the vehi-

cle.

NOTE

See page 361 for the maximum trailer and

tongue weights recommended by Volvo.

•Observe the legal requirements of the

state/province in which the vehicles are

•All Volvo models are equipped with

energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump-

ers. Trailer hitch installation should not

interfere with the proper operation of this

bumper system.

Trailer towing does not normally present any

particular problems, but take into considera-

tion:

•Increase tire pressure to recommended full

pressure. See the tire inflation table on

page 297.

•When your vehicle is new, avoid towing

heavy trailers during the first 620 miles

(1,000 km).

•Maximum speed when towing a trailer:

50 mph (80 km/h).

•Engine and transmission are subject to

increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant

temperature should be closely watched

when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain.

Use a lower gear and turn off the air con-

ditioner if the temperature gauge needle

enters the red range.

•If the automatic transmission begins to

overheat, a message will be displayed in

the text window.

•Avoid overload and other abusive opera-

tion.

•Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-

ity, and economy.

•It is necessary to balance trailer brakes

with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a

safe stop (check and observe state/local

regulations).

•Do not connect the trailer's brake system

directly to the vehicle's brake system.

•More frequent vehicle maintenance is

required.

•Remove the ball holder when the hitch is

not being used.

•Volvo recommends the use of synthetic

engine oil when towing a trailer over long

distances or in mountainous areas.

WARNING

•Bumper-attached trailer hitches must

not be used on Volvos, nor should

safety chains be attached to the

bumper.

•Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle

rear axle must not be used.

•Never connect a trailer's hydraulic

brake system directly to the vehicle

brake system, nor a trailer's lighting

system directly to the vehicle lighting

system. Consult your nearest author-

ized Volvo retailer for correct installa-

tion.

•When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety

wire must be correctly fastened to the

hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch

on the vehicle. The safety wire should

never be fastened to or wound around

the drawbar ball.

07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

284

NOTE

•When parking the vehicle with a trailer

on a hill, apply the parking brake before

putting the gear selector in P. Always

follow the trailer manufacturer's recom-

mendations for wheel chocking.

•When starting on a hill, put the gear

selector in D before releasing the park-

ing brake. See also page 128 for more

detailed information about starting off

on a hill while towing a trailer.

•If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift

positions while towing a trailer, make

sure the gear you select does not put

too much strain on the engine (using too

high a gear).

•The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may

be rated for trailers heavier than the

vehicle is designed to tow. Please

adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer

weights.

•Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of

more than 15%.

Trailer cable

An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer

hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has

7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by

Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on

the ground.

Detachable trailer hitch (accessory)

G010496

Ball holder

Locking bolt

Cotter pin

Hitch assembly

Safety wire attachment

Installing the ball holder

1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from

the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt

out of the hitch assembly.

2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem-

bly.

3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one

in the hitch assembly.

4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch

assembly/ball holder.

5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end

of the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt

and slide the locking bolt out of the ball

holder/hitch assembly.

2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem-

bly.

NOTE

A cover for the hitch assembly is also

included in the kit.

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)

Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to

help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer

when the vehicle and trailer have begun to

sway and is part of the Dynamic Stability and

Traction Control system (DSTC). See page

134 for information on DSTC.

Function

A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for

various reasons. Normally this only occurs at

high speeds but, for example, if the trailer is

overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed

in the trailer, there is risk of swaying at speeds

07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

285

between approximately 45-55 mph (70-90 km/

h).

Swaying may be caused by factors such as:

•The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden,

strong crosswind

•The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an

uneven road surface or drive over a bump

•Sudden movements of the steering wheel

Facts about TSA

•TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi-

mately 40 mph (60 km/h)

•The DSTC symbol ( ) in the instru-

ment panel will flash when TSA is working

•If the driver switches off the DSTC sys-

tem's Spin Control function, TSA will also

be switched off (but will be on again the

next time the engine is started)

•TSA may not intervene when the vehicle

and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries

to compensate for the swaying motion by

moving the steering wheel rapidly

How TSA works

Once swaying has begun, it can be very diffi-

cult to stop, which makes it difficult to control

the vehicle and trailer.

The TSA system continuously monitors the

vehicle's movements, particularly lateral

movement. If the system detects a tendency to

sway, the brakes are applied individually on the

front wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on

the vehicle and trailer. This is often enough to

enable the driver to regain control of the vehi-

cle.

If this is not adequate to stop the swaying

motion, the brakes are applied to all of the

wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is

equipped with brakes, and engine power is

temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion

begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer have

once again become stable, TSA will no stop

regulating the brakes/engine power and the

driver regains control of the vehicle.

07 During your trip

Emergency towing

286

Towing eyelet

Location of the towing eyelet

Attaching the towing eyelet

The towing eyelet is located under the floor

of the cargo area, with the spare tire and

may be partially concealed. This eyelet

must be screwed into the positions provi-

ded on the right sides of either the front or

rear bumper (see illustration).

There are two different types of covers over

the openings for the towing eyelet and they

have to be opened differently.

•If the cover has a notch, insert a coin,

etc., into the notch and pry open the

edge of the cover. Open the cover com-

pletely and remove it.

•If the cover has a mark along one edge

or in a corner, press the mark while pry-

ing out the opposite side/corner using a

coin, etc. Open the cover and remove it.

Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand

and then using the tire iron until it is securely in

place.

After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet

should be removed and returned to its storage

location.

Press the cover for the attachment point back

into position.

NOTE

On certain models equipped with a trailer

hitch, the towing eyelet cannot be screwed

into the hole in the rear bumper. The towing

rope should be attached to the trailer hitch

instead. For this reason, the detachable

section of the trailer hitch should be safely

stowed in the vehicle at all times.

07 During your trip

Emergency towing

287

WARNING

•When the vehicle is being towed, the

ignition should be in mode II (in mode I,

all of the vehicle's airbags are deacti-

vated). See page 85 for more informa-

tion about ignition modes.

•Never remove the remote key from the

ignition slot when the vehicle is being

towed. For vehicles with keyless drive,

the remote key must remain inside the

vehicle.

•The power brakes and power steering

will not function when the engine is not

running. Approximately 5 times more

pressure will be required on the brake

pedal and the steering wheel will be

considerably harder to turn.

•The towing eyelets must not be used for

pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for

any similar purpose involving severe

strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to

pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow

truck.

Towing the vehicle

1. With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot1, press START/STOP

ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds to

activate ignition mode II.

2. The remote key must remain in the ignition

slot2 for the entire time that the vehicle is

being towed.

3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing

vehicle slows down by applying light pres-

sure on the brake pedal. This will help pre-

vent jarring movements of the vehicle

being towed.

4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop the

vehicle being towed.

CAUTION

General towing precautions:

•Please check with state and local

authorities before attempting this type

of towing, as vehicles being towed are

subject to regulations regarding maxi-

mum towing speed, length and type of

towing device, lighting, etc.

•If the vehicle's battery is dead, attach

jumper cables (see page 119) to provide

current for releasing the electric parking

brake and to move the gear selector

from the P position to N. If this is not

possible, see page 123 for information

about manually overriding the shiftlock

system to move the gear selector from

P to N.

•Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do

not exceed the maximum allowable

towing speed.

•Maximum distance with front wheels on

ground: 50 miles (80 km).

•The vehicle should only be towed in the

forward direction.

1Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

2For vehicles with the the optional keyless dirive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.

07 During your trip

Emergency towing

288 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Having the vehicle towed by a tow

truck

Call for professional help from an authorized

towing company.Volvo recommends the use of

flat bed equipment.

CAUTION

•The vehicle should always be towed in

the forward direction.

•Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)*

that are being towed with the front

wheels off the ground should not be

towed at a speed above approx. 45 mph

(70 km/h) and should not be towed far-

ther than 30 miles (50 km).

•If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed

truck, the towing eyelet must not be

used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat

bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat

bed. Consult the tow truck operator.

07 During your trip

289

290

General information .............................................................................. 292

Tire inflation........................................................................................... 295

Inflation pressure ................................................................................. 297

Tire designations .................................................................................. 298

Glossary of tire terminology ................................................................. 300

Vehicle loading ..................................................................................... 301

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................................................... 303

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires ............................................... 304

Temporary Spare ................................................................................. 305

Tire Sealing System.............................................................................. 306

Changing a wheel ................................................................................ 312

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............................................. 316

WHEELS AND TIRES

08 Wheels and tires

General information

292

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with tires according

to the vehicle's tire information placard on the

B-pillar (the structural member at the side of

the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door

opening).

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with an

Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com-

bination designed to provide maximum dry

pavement performance with consideration

for hydroplaning resistance. They may be

more susceptible to road hazard damage

and, depending on driving conditions, may

achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles

(30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped

with Volvo’s advanced AWD or DSTC sys-

tem, these tires are not designed for winter

driving, and should be replaced with winter

tires when weather conditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteris-

tics and offer good handling on dry and wet

surfaces. It should be noted however that the

tires have been developed to give these fea-

tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.

Most models are equipped with "all-season"

tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree

of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires

without the "all-season" rating. However, for

optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered

roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on

all four wheels.

When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires

are the same size designation, type (radial) and

preferably from the same manufacturer, on all

four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering

the car's roadholding and handling characte-

ristics.

New Tires

Remember that tires are perishable goods. As

of 2000, the manufacturing week and year

(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)

will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1510 means

that the tire illustrated was manufactured dur-

ing week 15 of 2010).

Tire rotation

Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire

wear is affected by a number of factors such

as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving

style, etc.

NOTE

•If the tires are rotated, they should only

be moved from front to rear or vice

versa. They should never be rotated left

to right/right to left.

•Ideally, tire rotation should be done the

first time after approximately 3,000

miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at

6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. Some

customers find that tire rotation may

help to get extra mileage from tire life.

•Tire rotation should only be performed

if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and

tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they are

not being used. It is recommended that tires

generally be replaced after 6 years of normal

service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent

high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.)

exposure can accelerate the aging process.

The temporary spare1 should also be replaced

1Option or accessory on some models

08 Wheels and tires

General information

293

at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been

used.

A tire's age can be determined by the DOT

stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration

should be replaced immediately.

Tread wear indicator

G021829

The tires have wear indicator strips running

across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI

are printed on the side of the tire. When

approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the

tread, these strips become visible and indicate

that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less

than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac-

tion.

When replacing worn tires, it is recommended

that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size

as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the

same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera-

tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

Improving tire economy

•Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire

inflation table on page 297.

•Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard

braking and tire screeching.

•Tire wear increases with speed.

•Correct front wheel alignment is very

important.

•Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy

and driving comfort.

•Tires must maintain the same direction of

rotation throughout their lifetime.

•When replacing tires, the tires with the

most tread should be mounted on the rear

wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer

during hard braking.

•Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the

tires and/or wheels permanently.

Summer and winter tires

G021778

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the

tire

•When switching between summer and

winter tires, mark the tires to indicate

where they were mounted on the car, e.g.,

LF = left front, RR = right rear

•Tires with tread designed to roll in only one

direction are marked with an arrow on the

sidewall.

•Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's

braking properties and ability to force

aside rain, snow and slush.

•The tires with the most tread should always

be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid-

ding).

•Contact a Volvo workshop if you are

unsure about the tread depth.

08 Wheels and tires

General information

294

Storing wheels and tires

When storing complete wheels (tires mounted

on rims), they should be suspended off the

floor or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on

their sides or standing upright, but should not

be suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,

dry, dark place, and should never be stored

in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,

etc.

WARNING

•The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo

are specified to meet stringent stability

and handling requirements. Unap-

proved wheel/tire size combinations

can negatively affect your vehicle's sta-

bility and handling.

•Any damage caused by installation of

unapproved wheel/tire size combina-

tions will not be covered by your new

vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no

responsibility for death, injury, or

expenses that may result from such

installations.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

295

Inflation placard

G032521

Tire inflation placard

Tire inflation

Check tire inflation pressure regularly.

See the tire inflation table on page 297. A tire

inflation pressure placard is also located on the

driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at

the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's

door opening). This placard indicates the des-

ignation of the factory-mounted tires on your

vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation pres-

sure.

NOTE

•The placards shown indicate inflation

pressure for the tires installed on the

vehicle at the factory only.

•A certain amount of air seepage from

the tires occurs naturally and tire pres-

sure fluctuates with seasonal changes

in temperature. Always check tire pres-

sure regularly.

•Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation

pressure, including the spare, at least once

a month and before long trips. You are

strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pres-

sure gauge, as automatic service station

gauges may be inaccurate.

•Use the recommended cold inflation pres-

sure for optimum tire performance and

wear.

•Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause

uneven treadwear patterns.

WARNING

•Under-inflation is the most common

cause of tire failure and may result in

severe tire cracking, tread separation,

or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of

vehicle control and increased risk of

injury.

•Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-

rying capacity of your vehicle.

When weather temperature changes occur, tire

inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree

temperature drop causes a corresponding

drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check

your tire pressures frequently and adjust them

to the proper pressure, which can be found on

the vehicle's tire information placard or certifi-

cation label.

Checking tire pressure

Cold tires

Inflation pressure should be checked when the

tires are cold.

The tires are considered to be cold when

they have the same temperature as the sur-

rounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after the

vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

296

After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile

(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If

you have to drive farther than this distance to

pump your tire(s), check and record the tire

pressure first and add the appropriate air pres-

sure when you get to the pump.

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,

never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires

are hot from driving and it is normal for pres-

sures to increase above recommended cold

pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended

cold inflation pressure could be significantly

under-inflated.

To check inflation pressure:

1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,

then firmly press the tire gauge onto the

valve.

2. Add air to reach the recommended air

pressure.

3. Replace the valve cap.

4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there

are no nails or other objects embedded

that could puncture the tire and cause an

air leak.

5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are

no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular-

ities.

6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ-

ing the spare.

NOTE

•If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the center

of the valve. Then recheck the pressure

with your tire gauge.

•Some spare tires require higher inflation

pressure than the other tires. Consult

the tire inflation pressure table on page

297 or see the inflation pressure plac-

ard.

Tire ratings

Speed ratings

The speed ratings in the table translate as fol-

low:

Speed ratings

M 81 mph (130 km/h)

Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

Speed ratings

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

Load ratings

See page 298 for an explanation of the load

rating on the sidewall of the tire.

08 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure

297

Tire inflation pressure table

The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 295 for its location) for information

specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory.

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to five persons

Front

psi (kPa)

Rear

psi (kPa)

235/65 R17

235/60 R18

235/55 R19

255/45 R20

35 (240) 35 (240)

Temporary spare tire

T125/80R17

61 (420) 61 (420)

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts

department for the most up-to-date speci-

fications.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

298

Information on the sidewall

5 6 7 89

G010753

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers

place standardized information on the sidewall

of all tires (see the illustration).

The following information is listed on the tire

sidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tire des-

ignation is an example only and that this

particular tire may not be available on your

vehicle.

1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)

from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The

larger the number, the wider the tire.

2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width

in percent.

3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the

symbol indicate that the vehicle is

equipped with optional self-supporting run

flat tires1. See page 318 for more informa-

tion about these tires).

4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in

inches).

5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a

load index of 95 equals a maximum load of

1521 lbs (690 kg).

6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum

speed at which the tire is designed to be

driven for extended periods of time, carry-

ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and

with correct inflation pressure. For exam-

ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph

(210 km/h).

NOTE

The tire's load index and speed rating may

not appear on the sidewall because they are

not required by law.

7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All

Terrain, AS = All Season

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"

and indicates that the tire meets all federal

standards. The next two numbers or letters

are the plant code where it was manufac-

tured, the next two are the tire size code

and the last four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built. For exam-

ple, 1510 means that the tire was manu-

factured during week 15 of 2010. The num-

bers in between are marketing codes used

at the manufacturer's discretion. This infor-

mation helps a tire manufacturer identify a

tire for safety recall purposes.

9. Tire Ply Composition and Material

Used: Indicates the number of plies indi-

cates or the number of layers of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate the

ply materials in the tire and the sidewall,

which include steel, nylon, polyester, and

others.

1Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

08 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

299

10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum

load in pounds and kilograms that can be

carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire

information placard located on the B-Pillar

for the correct tire pressure for your vehi-

cle.

11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature

grades: see page 303 for more informa-

tion.

12. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air pres-

sure that should ever be put in the tire. This

limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

08 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

300

Terms

The tire suppliers may have additional mark-

ings, notes or warnings such as standard load,

radial tubeless, etc.

•Tire information placard: A placard

showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire

sizes, recommended inflation pressure,

and the maximum weight the vehicle can

carry.

•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-

ber on the sidewall of each tire providing

information about the tire brand and man-

ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-

ufacturer.

•Inflation pressure: A measure of the

amount of air in a tire.

•Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met-

ric tires designed to carry a maximum load

at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].

Increasing the inflation pressure beyond

this pressure will not increase the tires load

carrying capability.

•Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric

tires designed to carry a heavier maximum

load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric

tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure

beyond this pressure will not increase the

tire's load carrying capability.

•kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-

sure.

•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard

unit of air pressure.

•B-pillar: The structural member at the side

of the vehicle behind the front door.

•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next

to the rim.

•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the

bead area and the tread.

•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-

eter of the tire that contacts the road when

mounted on the vehicle.

•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or

a tire and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

•Maximum load rating: a figure indicating

the maximum load in pounds and kilo-

grams that can be carried by the tire. This

rating is established by the tire manufac-

turer.

•Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air pres-

sure that should ever be put in the tire. This

limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

•Recommended tire inflation pressure:

inflation pressure, established by Volvo,

which is based on the type of tires that are

mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This

information can be found on the tire infla-

tion placard(s) located on the driver's side

B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this

chapter.

•Cold tires: The tires are considered to be

cold when they have the same temperature

as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-

perature is normally reached after the vehi-

cle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

08 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

301

Loads

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-

mum return of vehicle design performance.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself

with the following terms for determining your

vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a

trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/

CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-

tion placard:

Curb weight

The weight of the vehicle including a full tank

of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not

include passengers, cargo, or optional equip-

ment.

Capacity weight

All weight added to the curb weight, including

cargo and optional equipment. When towing,

trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo

weight.

NOTE

For trailer towing information, please refer to

the section "Towing a trailer" on page 283.

Permissible axle weight

The maximum allowable weight that can be

carried by a single axle (front or rear). These

numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/

CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must

never exceed its maximum permissible weight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-

gers.

NOTE

•The location of the various labels in your

vehicle can be found on page 358.

•A table listing important weight limits for

your vehicle can be found on page

361.

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

1. Locate the statement "the combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-

cle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver

and passengers from XXX kilograms or

XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount

equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage

load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750

(5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage

and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.

That weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to your

vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine

how this reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

1See page 283.

08 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

302

WARNING

•Exceeding the permissible axle weight,

gross vehicle weight, or any other

weight rating limits can cause tire over-

heating resulting in permanent defor-

mation or catastrophic failure.

•Do not use replacement tires with lower

load carrying capacities than the tires

that were original equipment on the

vehicle because this will lower the vehi-

cle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the

correct load carrying capacity. Consult

your Volvo retailer for information.

08 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

303

Quality grading information

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST

CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE

GRADES

Quality grades can be found, where appli-

cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire gra-

ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)

times as well on the government course as a

tire graded 100. The relative performance of

tires depends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and many depart signifi-

cantly from the norm due to variation in driving

habits, maintenance practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test sur-

faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance. The trac-

tion grade assigned to this tire is based on

braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is

not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on braking (straight-ahead) traction

tests and is not a measure of cornering

(turning) traction.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds

to a minimum level of performance that all pas-

senger vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-

eral Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of performance

on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-

lished for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-

inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can cause heat

buildup and tire failure.

08 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

304

Winter driving conditions

Snow chains

Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with

the following restrictions:

•Snow chains should be installed on front

wheels only. Use only Volvo approved

snow chains.

•If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires

and wheels are installed and are of a size

different than the original tires and wheels,

chains in some cases CANNOT be used.

Sufficient clearances between chains and

brakes, suspension and body components

must be maintained.

•Some strap-on type chains will interfere

with brake components and therefore

CANNOT be used.

•All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains

should only be installed on the front

wheels.

•Certain size tires may not allow the assem-

bly of snow chains/traction devices.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow

chain information.

CAUTION

•Check local regulations regarding the

use of snow chains before installing.

•Use single-sided snow chains only.

•Always follow the chain manufacturer's

installation instructions carefully. Install

chains as tightly as possible and

retighten periodically.

•Never exceed the chain manufacturer's

specified maximum speed limit. (Under

no circumstances should you exceed

31 mph (50 km/h).

•Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns

when driving with snow chains.

•The handling of the vehicle can be

adversely affected when driving with

chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well

as locked wheel braking.

Snow tires, studded tires

Tires for winter use:

•Owners who live in or regularly commute

through areas with sustained periods of

snow or icy driving conditions are strongly

advised to fit suitable winter tires to help

retain the highest degree of traction.

•It is important to install winter tires on all

four wheels to help retain traction during

cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-

ure to do so could reduce traction to an

unsafe level or adversely affect handling.

•Do not mix tires of different design as this

could also negatively affect overall tire road

grip.

•Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads

in warm weather. They should be removed

when the winter driving season has ended.

•Studded tires should be run-in

300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during

which the vehicle should be driven as

smoothly as possible to give the studs the

opportunity to seat properly in the tires.

The tires should have the same rotational

direction throughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE

Please consult state or provincial regula-

tions restricting the use of studded winter

tires before installing such tires.

1Where permitted

08 Wheels and tires

Temporary Spare

305

Spare tire

The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Tem-

porary Spare".

Recommended tire pressure (see the placard

on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should

be maintained irrespective of which position on

the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on.

In the event of damage to this tire, a new one

can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the

"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem-

porary replacement for a punctured tire. It

must be replaced as soon as possible by a

standard tire. Road holding and handling

may be affected with the "Temporary

Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph

(80 km/h).

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be driven with wheels

of different dimensions or with a spare tire

other than the one that came with the vehi-

cle. The use of different size wheels can

seriously damage your car's transmission.

1Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

306 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Location

Introduction

Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing

system* that enables you to temporarily seal a

hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,

or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.

The system consists of an air compressor, a

container for the sealing compound, wiring to

connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical

system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a

hose used to connect the system to the tire’s

inflation valve.

NOTE

The tire sealing system's compressor has

been tested and approved by Volvo.

The 12-volt sockets are located in the front

tunnel console, on the rear side of the center

console in the rear seat and in the cargo area*,

see page 210.

Accessing the tire sealing system

The tire sealing system is stowed under the

floor of the cargo area. To access it:

1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.

2. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

•The tire sealing system is only intended

to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not

the sidewall.

•Tires with large holes or tears cannot be

repaired with the tire sealing system.

•After use, stow the tire sealing system

properly to help prevent rattling.

WARNING

•After using the tire sealing system, the

vehicle should not be driven farther than

approximately 120 miles (200 km).

•Have the tire inspected by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician as

soon as possible to determine if it can

be permanently repaired or must be

replaced.

•The vehicle should not be driven faster

than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire

that has been temporarily repaired with

the tire sealing system.

•After using the tire sealing system, drive

carefully and avoid abrupt steering

maneuvers and sudden stops.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

307

Tire sealing system–overview

Speed limit sticker

On/Off switch

Electrical wire

Bottle holder (orange cover)

Protective hose cover

Air release knob

Hose

Bottle with sealing compound

Air pressure gauge

WARNING

Please keep the following points in mind

when using the tire sealing system:

•The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in

the illustration) contains 1) rubber latex,

natural and 2) ethanediol. These sub-

stances are harmful if swallowed.

•The contents of this bottle may cause

allergic skin reactions or otherwise be

potentially harmful to the respiratory

tract, the skin, the central nervous sys-

tem, and the eyes.

Precautions:

•Keep out of reach of children.

•Do not ingest the contents.

•Avoid prolonged or repeated contact

with the skin.

•Wash thoroughly after handling.

First aid:

•Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with

soap and water. Get medical attention

if symptoms occur.

•Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least

15 minutes, occasionally lifting the

upper and lower eyelids. Get medical

attention if symptoms occur.

•Inhalation: Move the exposed person to

fresh air. If irritation persists, get medi-

cal attention.

•Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting

unless directed to do so by medical per-

sonnel. Get medical attention.

•Disposal: Dispose of this material and

its container to a hazardous or special

waste collection point.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. This

occurs automatically when the bottle is

screwed into the holder.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

308

Tire sealing system–temporarily

repairing a flat tire

G014338

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two

stages:

•Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping

sealing compound into the tire. The car is

then driven a short distance to distribute

the sealing compound in the tire.

NOTE

Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,

etc.) from the tire before using the sealing

system.

•Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is

checked and adjusted if necessary.

WARNING

•Never leave the tire sealing system

unattended when it is operating.

•Keep the tire sealing system away from

children.

•Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off

the road and away from moving traffic.

•Apply the parking brake.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.

2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it

to the steering wheel hub where it will be

clearly visible to the driver.

3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi-

tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be

pressed down).

WARNING

Contact with the sealing compound may

cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash

the affected area immediately with soap and

water.

4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle

holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle

of sealing compound.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. This

occurs automatically when the bottle is

screwed into the holder.

5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

WARNING

The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep

it securely in place and help prevent sealing

compound leakage. Once in place, the bot-

tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done

by a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-

tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys-

tem’s hose connector onto the valve as

tightly as possible by hand.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

309

7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

NOTE

Be sure that none of the other 12-volt sock-

ets is being used while the compressor is in

operation.

8. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

The vehicle´s engine should be running

when the tire sealing system is used to avoid

battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle

is parked in a well ventilated place, or out-

doors, before using the system.

9. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor

by pressing the on/off switch to position I.

WARNING

•Never stand next to the tire being inflated

when the compressor is in operation.

•If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,

switch off the compressor immediately.

•If there is visible damage to the sidewall

or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.

The vehicle should not be driven if this

occurs. Contact a towing service or

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if

applicable.

NOTE

The air pressure gauge will temporarily

show an increase in pressure to approxi-

mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com-

pound is being pumped into the tire. The

pressure should return to a normal level

after approximately 30 seconds.

10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to

between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch

off the compressor briefly to get a clear

reading from the pressure gauge.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

WARNING

If the pressure remains below 22 psi

(1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes,

turn off the compressor. In this case, the

hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle

should not be driven.

11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect

the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.

12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation

valve and reinstall the valve cap.

13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-

mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed

of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-

ing compound in the tire.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

310

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the

use of the sealing compound may lead to

incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare

cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.

Use the tire sealing system to check and

adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.

NOTE

•Safely stow the tire sealing system in a

convenient place as it will soon be used

again to check the tire’s inflation pres-

sure.

•The empty bottle of sealing compound

cannot be removed from the bottle

holder. Consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician to have the

bottle removed and properly disposed

of.

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering

behavior, or noises should occur while driv-

ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a

safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,

cracks, or other visible damage, and

recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure

is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue

driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure

1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri-

bed in stage 1.

2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this

chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If

the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire

sealing system’s compressor. If neces-

sary, release air from the tire by turning the

air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

WARNING

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1

hour, check the inflation pressure in the

damaged tire again before continuing.

Replacing the sealing compound

container

The sealing compound container must be

replaced if:

•the tire sealing system has been used to

repair a tire

•the container’s expiration date has passed

(see the date on decal).

NOTE

•After use, the sealing compound bottle,

the hose, and certain other system

components must be replaced. Please

consult your Volvo retailer for replace-

ment parts.

•If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-

ration date has passed, please take it to

a Volvo retailer or a recycling station

that can properly dispose of harmful

substances.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

311

Inflating tires

The tire sealing system can be used to inflate

the tires. To do so:

1. Park the car in a safe place.

2. The compressor should be switched off.

Ensure that the on/off switch is in position

0 (the 0 side of the switch should be

pressed down).

3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.

4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-

tion valve and screw the hose connector

onto the valve as tightly as possible by

hand.

5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

•The vehicle’s engine should be running

when the tire sealing system is used to

avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure

the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated

place, or outdoors, before using the sys-

tem. The parking brake should be

securely applied and the gear selector

should be in the P (park) position.

•Children should never be left unattended

in the vehicle when the engine is running.

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the

gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to

get a clear reading from the pressure

gauge.

8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this chap-

ter for the correct inflation pressure. If the

tire needs to be inflated, start the tire seal-

ing system’s compressor (press the on/off

switch to position I). If necessary, release

air from the tire by turning the air release

knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off

switch to position 0) when the correct infla-

tion pressure has been reached.

10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation

valve and reinstall the valve cap.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the

12-volt socket.

08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

312 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Removing a wheel

Location of jack*, towing eyelet1 and tools*

Spare wheel

The spare wheel is only intended for temporary

use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as

possible. The car's handling may be altered by

the use of the spare wheel. The correct tire

pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tire

pressure table on page 297 and in the tire infla-

tion placard on the driver's side door jamb at

the rear of the driver's door opening.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the

“Temporary Spare” tire other than as a tem-

porary replacement for a punctured tire. It

must be replaced as soon as possible by a

standard tire. Road holding and handling

may be affected with the “Temporary

Spare” in use.

CAUTION

The vehicle must never be driven with more

than one temporary spare wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel

well with the rim side down. There are two foam

blocks, one under the spare wheel and one

over/inside. The upper one contains all tools.

The same bolt runs through to secure the spare

wheel and the foam blocks.

Taking out the spare wheel

1. Open the floor hatch.

2. Undo the retaining bolt.

3. Lift out the foam block.

4. Lift out the spare wheel.

The other two blocks can remain in the spare

wheel well.

After use

The foam block and spare wheel must be

replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow

on the upper foam block. It should point for-

ward.

Changing a wheel

1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear

selector in P.

2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the towing

eyelet and the wheel cover removal tool*

stowed under the floor of the trunk.

3. Remove the wheel cover (where applica-

ble) using the removal tool or remove the

wheel cover by hand.

4. Block the wheels that are on the ground

with wooden blocks or large stones.

1The towing eyelet may be partially concealed under the rear edge of the cargo area. See the illustration on page 286 for its location.

08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

313

Lug wrench and towing eyelet

5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug

wrench as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

The towing eyelet must be screwed into the

lug wrench as far as possible.

6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the

lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the

wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting down-

ward (counterclockwise) pressure.

Jack attachment points

7. There are two jack attachment points on

each side of the vehicle. Position the jack

correctly in the attachment (see the illus-

tration) and crank while simultaneously

guiding the base of the jack to the ground.

The base of the jack must be flat on a level,

firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising

the vehicle, check that the jack is still cor-

rectly positioned in the attachment.

08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

314

WARNING

There are two attachment points near the

rear of the vehicle. Only the rear-most

attachment point is intended for the jack

(see the illustration).

8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be

changed is lifted off the ground.

9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and

remove the wheel.

WARNING

•The jack must correctly engage the jack

attachment.

•Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-

slippery surface.

•Never allow any part of your body to be

extended under a vehicle supported by

a jack.

•Use the jack intended for the vehicle

when changing a tire. For any other job,

use stands to support the vehicle.

•Apply the parking brake and put the

gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•Block the wheels standing on the

ground, use rigid wooden blocks or

large stones.

•The jack should be kept well-greased

and clean, and should not be damaged.

•No objects should be placed between

the base of jack and the ground, or

between the jack and the attachment

bar on the vehicle.

NOTE

The jack provided with your vehicle is

intended to be used only in temporary sit-

uations such as changing wheels in the

event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came

with your particular model should be used

to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be

lifted more frequently or for a prolonged

period, using a garage jack or hoist is rec-

ommended. Always follow this device’s

instructions for use.

Re-installing the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel

and hub.

2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

Tighten the lug nuts

08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

315

3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-

tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-

wise until all nuts are snug.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-

nately tighten the bolts crosswise to

103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).

5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).

The opening in the wheel cover for the tire's

inflation valve must be positioned over the

valve.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

316

Introduction

NOTE

USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses sen-

sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla-

tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov-

ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit

inflation pressure data to a receiver located in

the vehicle.

When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS

will light up the tire pressure warning light

() (also referred to as a telltale) in the

instrument panel and will display one of the

following messages in the text window: Tire

pressure low or

Tire needs air now.

NOTE

If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure

warning light will flash for approximately

1 minute and Tire press. syst Service

required will be displayed.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-

sure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel

efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute

for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-

er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not reached

the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low

tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain

continuously illuminated. This sequence will

continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as

long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may

occur for a variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS

from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one

or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires

and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

1Not available in all markets or in all models.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317

NOTE

TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does

not replace normal tire maintenance. For

information on correct tire pressure, please

refer to the tire inflation pressure table in this

chapter or consult your Volvo retailer.

Erasing warning messages

When a low tire pressure warning message has

been displayed, and the tire pressure warning

light has come on:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the

inflation pressure of all four tires.

2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure

(consult the tire pressure placard or the

inflation pressure table on page 297.

3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to

drive the vehicle for several minutes at a

speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This

will erase the warning text and the warning

light will go out.

WARNING

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire

failure, resulting in a loss of control of the

vehicle.

Changing wheels with TPMS

Please note the following when changing or

replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/

tires on the vehicle:

•Only the factory-mounted wheels are

equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.

•If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary

spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS

sensor.

•If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun-

ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST

SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed

each time the vehicle is driven above

25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.

•Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,

the warning message should not reappear.

If the message is still displayed, drive the

vehicle for several minutes at a speed of

20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the

message.

•Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be

fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.

Volvo does not recommend moving sen-

sors back and forth between sets of

wheels.

CAUTION

When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press

the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the

valve to help avoid bending or otherwise

damaging the valve.

NOTE

•If you change to tires with a different

recommended inflation pressure, the

TPMS system must be recalibrated to

these tires. On U.S. models, this must

be done by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician. On Canadian mod-

els, see the following section "Recali-

brating TPMS."

•If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen-

sor is moved to another wheel, the sen-

sor's seal, nut, and valve core should be

replaced.

•When installing TPMS sensors, the

vehicle must be parked for at least

15 minutes with the ignition off. If the

vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a

TPMS error message will be displayed.

Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models

only)*

In certain cases, it may be necessary to reca-

librate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom-

mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

318 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

tion pressure table on page 297), for example,

if higher inflation pressure is necessary when

transporting heavy loads, etc.

This is done in the vehicle's menu system. See

page 191 for a description of the menu system.

To recalibrate:

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and

put the ignition in mode I or II (see page

85 for additional information).

3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con-

sole control panel and select Settings

Car settings Tyre pressure

4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tyre

pressure and press OK/MENU again.

5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above 25 mph

(40 km/h) continuously for at least

10 minutes.

> When the calibration message is no

longer displayed, TPMS has been reca-

librated to the new inflation pressure.

Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian

models only)*

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see page

85 for additional information).

3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con-

sole control panel and select Settings

Car settings Tyre pressure

4. Select Tyre pressure system and press

OK/MENU to turn the system on or off.

Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)*

Self-supporting run flat tires are available as

optional equipment. The vehicle must be

equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) if tires of this type are installed.

Tires of this type have specially reinforced

sidewalls that make it possible to continue

driving to a limited extent even though the tire

has lost some or all of its inflation pressure.

These tires are mounted on special rims (nor-

mal tires can also be mounted on these rims).

If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yel-

low TPMS symbol illuminates in the instrument

panel and a text message is also displayed. If

this happens, reduce speed to not more than

50 mph (80 km/h). The tire should be replaced

as soon as possible.

Drive carefully; it may be difficult to determine

which tire is damaged. To find the damaged

tire, check the inflation pressure in all four tires.

WARNING

•SST tires should only be mounted by

service technicians who are familiar

with tires of this type.

•SST tires may only be mounted on vehi-

cles equipped with TPMS.

•Do not drive faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h) if TPMS indicates that a tire

has lost inflation pressure.

•Do not drive farther than 50 miles

(80 km) before replacing a damaged

SST tire.

•Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hard

braking or fast turns.

•SST tires must be replaced if they are

damaged. A tire of this type cannot be

repaired.

08 Wheels and tires

319

320

Volvo maintenance................................................................................ 322

Maintaining your car............................................................................. 323

Hood and engine compartment............................................................ 325

Engine oil............................................................................................... 326

Fluids..................................................................................................... 328

Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 330

Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 337

Battery................................................................................................... 339

Fuses..................................................................................................... 342

Vehicle care........................................................................................... 350

MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS

09 Maintenance and specifications

Volvo maintenance

322

Introduction

Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance

program outlined in the Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet. This mainte-

nance program contains inspections and serv-

ices necessary for the proper function of your

vehicle. The maintenance services contain

several checks that require special tools and

training, and therefore must be performed by a

qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top

condition, specify time-tested and proven

Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.

The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle

manufacturers to furnish written instructions to

the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper

servicing and function of the components that

control emissions. These services, which are

listed in the "Warranty and Service Records

Information" booklet, are not covered by the

warranty. You will be required to pay for labor

and material used.

Maintenance

Your Volvo passed several major inspections

before it was delivered to you, in accordance

with Volvo specifications. The maintenance

procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv-

ice Records Information booklet, many of

which will positively affect your vehicle's emis-

sions, should be performed as indicated. It is

recommended that receipts for vehicle emis-

sion maintenance be retained in case ques-

tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec-

tion and maintenance should also be per-

formed anytime a malfunction is observed or

suspected.

Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada

In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana-

dian regulations, the following list of warranties

is provided.

•New Vehicle Limited Warranty

•Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

•Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

•Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tems Limited Warranty

•Emission Design and Defect Warranty

•Emission Performance Warranty

These are the federal warranties; other warran-

ties are provided as required by state/provin-

cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and

Service Records Information booklet for

detailed information concerning each of the

warranties.

Periodic maintenance helps minimize

emissions

Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi-

cle running well. Your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet provides a com-

prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up

to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main-

tenance. The schedule includes components

that affect vehicle emissions. This page

describes some of the emission-related com-

ponents.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car

323

Owner maintenance

Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-

vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty

and Service Records Information booklet.

The following points can be carried out

between the normally scheduled maintenance

services.

Each time the car is refueled:

•Check the engine oil level.

•Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,

headlights, and taillights.

Monthly:

•Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect

the tires for wear.

•Check that engine coolant and other fluid

levels are between the indicated "min" and

"max" markings.

•Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass

cleaner and soft paper towels.

•Wipe driver information displays with a soft

cloth.

•Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-

rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-

minal connector, or a battery near the end

of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo

retailer for additional information.

As needed:

Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to

reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup

of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt

residues.

Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at

the base of the windshield, and from other pla-

ces where they may collect.

NOTE

Complete service information for qualified

technicians is available online for purchase

or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.

Hoisting the vehicle

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the

two jack attachments points should be used.

They are specially reinforced to bear the weight

of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed

under the front of the engine support frame.

Take care not to damage the splash guard

under the engine. Ensure that the jack is posi-

tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it.

Always use axle stands or similar structures.

If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the

front and rear lift arm pads should be centered

under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard

edge of the sill rail (see illustration).

Emission inspection readiness

What is an Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II)?

OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized

engine management system. It stores diagnos-

tic information about your vehicle's emission

controls. It can light the Check Engine light

(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A

"fault" is a component or system that is not

performing within an expected range. A fault

may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will

store a message about any fault.

How do states use OBD II for emission

inspections?

Many states connect a computer directly to a

vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can

then read "faults." In some states, this type of

09 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car

324

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission

test.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission

inspection?

Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-

tion for any of the following reasons.

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your

vehicle may fail inspection.

•If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,

but went out without any action on your

part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.

Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending

on the inspection practices in your area.

•If you had recent service that required dis-

connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic

information may be incomplete and "not

ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not

ready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II

emission inspection?

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or

was lit but went out without service, have

your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,

serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

•If you recently had service for a lit Check

Engine light, or if you had service that

required disconnecting the battery, a

period of driving is necessary to bring the

OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A

half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-

way driving is typically needed to allow

OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo

retailer can provide you with more infor-

mation on planning a trip.

•Maintain your vehicle in accordance with

your vehicle's maintenance schedule.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Hood and engine compartment

325

Opening and closing the hood

G031911

Pull the lever located under the left side of

the dash to release the hood lock. An infor-

mation symbol will illuminate when the

hood is open.

Lift the hood slightly. Press the release

control (located under the right front edge

of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood.

WARNING

Check that the hood locks properly when

closed.

Engine compartment, overview

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Dipstick-engine oil

Filler cap-engine oil

Cover over brake fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay/fuse box

Washer fluid reservoir

The appearance of the engine compartment

may vary depending on engine model.

WARNING

The cooling fan (located at the front of the

engine compartment, behind the radiator)

may start or continue to operate (for up to

6 minutes) after the engine has been

switched off.

WARNING

Before performing any operations in the

engine compartment, the ignition should

always be completely switched off (in mode

0, see page 85) and there should be no

remote keys in the passenger compartment.

The gear selector should be in the P (park)

position. If the engine has been running,

wait until it has cooled before touching any

components in the engine compartment.

The distributor ignition system operates at

very high voltages. Special safety precau-

tions must be followed to prevent injury.

Always turn the ignition off when:

•Replacing distributor ignition compo-

nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc.

•Do not touch any part of the distributor

ignition system while the engine is run-

ning. This may result in unintended

movements and body injury.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil

326

Checking the engine oil

The oil level should be checked at regular inter-

vals, particularly during the period up to the

first scheduled maintenance service.

•See page 363 for oil specifications.

•Refer to the Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet for information on the

oil change intervals.

CAUTION

•Not checking the oil level regularly can

result in serious engine damage if the oil

level becomes too low.

•Oil that is lower than the specified qual-

ity can damage the engine.

•Volvo does not recommend the use of

oil additives.

•Always add oil of the same type and

viscosity as already used.

•Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This

could cause an increase in oil consump-

tion.

•Oil changes should be carried out by a

trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

Checking and adding oil

Location of the filler cap and dipstick

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products

NOTE

Before checking the oil:

•The car should be parked on a level sur-

face.

•If the engine is warm, wait for at least

10 – 15 minutes after the engine has

been switched off.

G021737

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks on the dipstick

Checking the oil

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint-

free rag.

2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check

the oil level. The level must be between the

MIN and MAX marks.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil

327

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to

the MIN mark, add approximately

0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.

4. Recheck the level and add more oil if nec-

essary until the level is near the MAX mark.

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into

contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids

328

Coolant

Location of the coolant reservoir

Normally, the coolant does not need to be

changed. If the system must be drained, con-

sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

See page 364 for information on cooling sys-

tem capacities.

CAUTION

•If necessary, top up the cooling system

with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze

only (a 50/50 mix of water and anti-

freeze).

•Different types of antifreeze/coolant

may not be mixed.

•If the cooling system is drained, it

should be flushed with clean water or

premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled

with the correct mixture of water/anti-

freeze.

•The cooling system must always be

kept filled to the correct level, and the

level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there

can be high local temperatures in the

engine which could result in damage.

Check coolant regularly!

•Do not top up with water only. This

reduces the rust-protective and anti-

freeze qualities of the coolant and has a

lower boiling point. It can also cause

damage to the cooling system if it

should freeze.

•Do not use chlorinated tap water in the

vehicle's cooling system.

WARNING

•Never remove the expansion tank cap

while the engine is warm. Wait until the

engine cools.

•If it is necessary to top off the coolant

when the engine is warm, unscrew the

expansion tank cap slowly so that the

overpressure dissipates.

Brake fluid

Location of the brake fluid reservoir

Checking the level

The fluid reservoir is concealed under the

round cover at the rear of the engine compart-

ment. The round cover must be removed first

before the reservoir cap can be accessed.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids

329

The brake fluid should always be between the

MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res-

ervoir. Check, without removing the cap, that

there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F

(280 °C), P/N 9437433

Replace: The fluid should be replaced accord-

ing to the intervals specified in the Warranty

and Service Records Information booklet.

When driving under extremely hard conditions

(mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to

replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

Always entrust brake fluid changing to a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

•If the fluid level is below the MIN mark

in the reservoir or if a brake-related

message is shown in the information

display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician and have the brake

system inspected.

•Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any

other type of brake fluid.

Filling

1. Turn and open the cover.

2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.

The level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks.

Power steering fluid

Check the level frequently. The fluid does not

require changing. The fluid level must be

between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-

ties and recommended fluid grade, see

page 364.

WARNING

If a problem should occur in the power

steering system or if the vehicle has no elec-

trical current and must be towed, it is still

possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep

in mind that greater effort will be required to

turn the steering wheel.

CAUTION

Keep the area around the power steering

fluid reservoir clean when checking.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

330 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

All bulb specifications are listed on page 336.

The following bulbs should only be replaced by

a trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian:

•Dome lighting, reading lights

•Glove compartment lighting

•Footwell lighting

•Turn signals in the door mirrors

•Approach lighting in the door mirrors

•Brake lights/rear fog light/taillights

•Rear parking lights

•Active Bending Lights

•LED bulbs

NOTE

For information regarding any other bulbs

not mentioned in this section, please con-

tact your Volvo retailer or a trained and

authorized Volvo service technician.

WARNING

•The engine should not be running when

changing bulbs.

•If the engine has been running just prior

to replacing bulbs in the headlight hous-

ing, please keep in mind that compo-

nents in the engine compartment will be

hot.

WARNING

•Active Bending Lights* – due to the high

voltage used by these headlights, these

bulbs should only be replaced by a

trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

•Turn off the lights and remove the

remote key from the ignition before

changing any bulbs.

Headlight housing

The entire headlight housing must be lifted out

when replacing all front bulbs.

CAUTION

Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin-

gers. Grease and oils from your fingers

vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit

on the reflector, which will damage it.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

331

NOTE

•Always switch off the ignition before

starting to replace a bulb.

•The optional Active Bending Light bulbs

contain trace amounts of mercury.

These bulbs should always be disposed

of by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician.

Removing the headlight housing

1. Switch off the ignition by briefly pressing

the START/STOP ENGINE button.

2. Remove the remote key from the ignition

slot1.

3. (Upper illustration under "Headlight hous-

ing")

Withdraw the headlight housing's lock-

ing pins.

Pull the headlight housing straight out.

CAUTION

When disconnecting the connector, pull on

the connector itself and not on the wiring.

4. (Lower illustration under "Headlight hous-

ing")

Unplug the wiring connector by holding

down the clip with your thumb.

Pull out the connector with the other

hand.

5. Lift out the housing and place it on a soft

surface to avoid scratching the lens.

6. Replace the defective bulb(s).

Reinserting the headlight housing

When reinserting the housing, be sure that the

long locking pin (to the left in the illustration) is

securely in place in both of its retaining clamps.

1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into

place.

2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking

pins. Check that they are correctly

inserted. The headlight housing must be

properly inserted and secured in place

before the lighting is switched on or the

remote key is inserted into the ignition slot.

3. Check that the lights function properly.

The headlight wiring must be connected and

the housing must be securely in place before

the ignition is switched on.

Removing the cover to access the

bulbs

1Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

332

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 330.

1. Open the retaining clamps by pressing

them to the sides.

2. Pull the cover straight out.

Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.

Low beam, Halogen

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 330).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see

page 331).

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder

downward.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket until it

snaps into place. It can only be secured in

one position.

6. Put the cover back into position and rein-

stall the headlight housing.

High beam, Halogen

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 330).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see

page 331).

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter-

clockwise and pulling it straight out.

4. Remove the connector from the bulb.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn

it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be

secured in one position.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight

housing.

7. Put the cover back into position and rein-

stall the headlight housing.

Extra high beam2

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 330).

2Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

333

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see

page 331).

3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the

bulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the headlight

housing by pulling it straight out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the holder until it snaps

in place. It can only be inserted in one way.

6. Press the bulb holder into position in the

headlight housing.

7. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb

holder.

8. Put the cover back into position and rein-

stall the headlight housing.

Turn signals

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 330).

2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-

terclockwise and pulling it out of the head-

light housing.

3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb.

4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it

in slightly and turning it counterclockwise.

5. Press the new bulb into the holder and turn

it clockwise.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight

housing and turn it clockwise.

7. Reinstall the headlight housing.

Side marker lights

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 330.

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 330).

2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-

terclockwise and pulling it out of the head-

light housing.

3. Pull out the burned out bulb and install a

new one. It can only be inserted in one

position.

4. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight

housing and turn it clockwise.

5. Reinstall the headlight housing.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

334

Rear fog light

The rear fog light (located on the driver's side

of the vehicle) can be reached from behind the

bumper

1. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-

terclockwise.

2. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it

in and turning it counterclockwise.

3. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it

clockwise.

4. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clock-

wise.

Location of taillight bulbs

Taillight lens, right side

Parking/side marker lights (LED)

Side reflector

Brake light

Backup light

Turn signal

Brake lights (LED)

NOTE

If an error message remains in the display

after a faulty bulb has been replaced, con-

tact an authorized Volvo workshop.

Brake lights and taillights

The brake lights and taillights are replaced from

inside the cargo area.

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 330.

1. Open the panel.

2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-

terclockwise.

3. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it

in and turning it counterclockwise.

4. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it

clockwise.

5. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clock-

wise.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

335

License plate lighting

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing

and pull it out.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and

tighten the screws.

Cargo area lighting

G031942

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 330.

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that

the bulb housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press

it back into the bulb housing.

Vanity mirror lighting

Removing the mirror glass

1. Insert a flat screwdriver under the glass

and carefully exert upward pressure to

release the retaining lugs.

2. Snap out the lens.

3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb

straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do

not exert too much pressure on the bulb

with the pliers to help avoid damaging it.

Reinstalling the mirror glass

1. Put the lens back into position.

2. Press it into place.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

336 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Bulb specifications

Lighting

function

Wattage Bulb

Extra high

beam (models

with Active

Bending

Lights*)

55 H7 LL

Low beam

(halogen)

55 H11 LL

High beam

(halogen)

65 H9

Front turn sig-

nals

21 PY21W

License plate

lighting

5 C5W LL

Vanity mirror 2 W2x4.6d

type T5

Front side

marker lights

5 W3W LL

Glove com-

partment

lighting

5 SV8.5

(length

43mm)

Rear fog light 21 P21W LL

Lighting

function

Wattage Bulb

Backup lights 21 P21W LL

Brake lights 21 P21W LL

Cargo area

lighting

10 SV8.5

(length

43mm)

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts

department for the most up-to-date speci-

fications.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

337

Wiper blades

The windshield wiper blades are different

lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longer

than the one on the passenger side.

Service position

Wiper blades in service position

The wiper blades must be in the vertical (serv-

ice) position for replacement, washing or to lift

them away from the windshield when e.g.,

removing ice or snow. To put them in this posi-

tion:

CAUTION

Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in

position before attempting to move them to

the service position.

1. Insert the remote key into the ignition

slot1 and press the START/STOP

ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in

mode I (see page 85 for detailed informa-

tion about the ignition modes).

2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button

again briefly to switch the ignition off.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering

wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 sec-

ond.

> The wipers will then move to the vertical

(service) position on the windshield.

NOTE

After the wiper arms have been in the serv-

ice position, the wipers must be switched on

and off at least once before the service posi-

tion can be used again.

The wipers can be returned to the normal posi-

tion by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE

button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (or

by starting the engine).

CAUTION

If the wiper arms have been folded out from

the windshield while in the service position,

fold them back against the windshield

before returning the wipers to the normal

position to help avoid scratching the paint

on the hood.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

1Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

338

With the wipers in the service position, fold

out the wiper arm from the windshield.

Press the button on the wiper blade attach-

ment and pull the wiper blade straight out,

parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks

into place.

Check that the blade is securely in place.

4. Press the wipers back against the wind-

shield.

To return the wipers from the service position

to the normal position, fold the wipers back

against the windshield and press the START/

STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition

in mode I (or start the engine).

Cleaning

Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean

helps improve visibility and prolongs the serv-

ice life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper

blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm

soap solution or car washing detergent.

Replacing the tailgate wiper blade

G032770

1. Fold the wiper arm outward.

2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at

the arrow).

3. Pull out the blade to release it from the

wiper arm.

4. Press the new wiper blade into place and

check that it seats securely.

5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate

window.

Filling washer fluid

Location of the washer fluid reservoir

The windshield and headlight washers share a

common reservoir.

The washer fluid reservoir is located on the

driver's side of the engine compartment. Dur-

ing cold weather, the reservoir should be filled

with windshield washer solvent containing

antifreeze. For capacities, see page 364.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

339

Warning symbols on the battery

Wear protective goggles.

Keep away from children.

Avoid smoking, open flames,

and/or sparks.

See the owner's manual.

Contains corrosive acid.

Risk of explosion

Recycle properly

NOTE

A used battery should be disposed of in an

environmentally responsible manner. Con-

sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to

a recycling station.

Handling

•Check that the battery cables are correctly

connected and tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running (for example, when

replacing the battery).

•If the battery is fully discharged a number

of times, this may shorten its service life.

•The service life of a battery is affected by

factors such as the number of starts, driv-

ing conditions and climate. Extreme cold

may also further decrease the battery’s

starting capacity.

•Because the battery’s starting capacity

decreases with time, it may be necessary

to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for

an extended period of time or if the vehicle

is usually only driven short distances.

•Never use a quick charger to charge the

battery.

CAUTION

The infotainment system's energy-saving

feature may not function correctly or at all,

and/or a message may be displayed if a

battery charger or jumper cables are not

connected properly.

•The negative terminal on the battery

must never be used to connect a

jumper cable or a battery charger. Only

the ground point on the chassis may be

used.

See page 119 for an illustration and addi-

tional information.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

340

WARNING

•Never expose the battery to open flame

or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-

tact occurs, flush the affected area

immediately with water. Obtain medical

help immediately if eyes are affected.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it

becomes discharged repeatedly.

Maintenance

•Use a screw driver to open the caps or

cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

•If necessary, add distilled water. The level

should never be above the indicator.

•The fluid level should be checked if the

battery has been recharged.

•After inspection, be sure the cap over each

battery cell or the cover is securely in

place.

•Check that the battery cables are correctly

connected and properly tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running, or when the key is in the

ignition. This could damage the vehicle's

electrical system.

•The battery should be disconnected from

the vehicle when a battery charger is used

directly on the battery.

•To help keep the battery in good condition,

the vehicle should be driven for at least 15

minutes a week or connected to a charger

with an automatic charging function.

•If the battery is fully discharged a number

of times, this may shorten its service life.

Keeping the battery fully charged helps

prolong its service life.

•The service life of a battery is affected by

factors such as driving conditions and cli-

mate. Extreme cold may also further

decrease the battery’s starting capacity.

•Because the battery’s starting capacity

decreases with time, it may be necessary

to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for

an extended period of time or if the vehicle

is usually only driven short distances.

CAUTION

•Always use distilled or deionized water

(battery water).

•Never fill above the level mark in the cell.

Changing

09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

341

WARNING

Connect and disconnect the positive and

negative cables in the correct sequence.

Removal

Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key

from the ignition slot and wait at least 5 minutes

before disconnecting the battery so that all

information in the vehicle's electrical system

can be stored in the control modules.

Open the clips on the front cover and

remove the cover.

Release the rubber molding so that the rear

cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable

Detach the ventilation hose from the

battery

Loosen the screw holding the battery

clamp.

Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the state of California

to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

Installation

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side

until it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Tighten the clamp that secures the battery.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.

> Be sure that it is correctly connected to

the battery and the vent in the vehicle's

body.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).

8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal).

9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with

the clips. (See Removal).

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

342

Replacing fuses

There are relay/fuse boxes located in the

engine compartment, the passenger compart-

ment, and the cargo area.

If an electrical component fails to function, this

may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way

to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.

To do so:

1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult

to remove, a special fuse removal tool is

located on the inside of the engine com-

partment fuse box cover.

2. From the side, examine the curved metal

wire in the fuse to see if it is intact.

If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the

same color and amperage (written on the fuse).

If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical

system inspected by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

WARNING

Never use metal objects or fuses with higher

amperage than those stated on the follow-

ing pages. Doing so could seriously damage

or overload the vehicle's electrical system.

Location of the fuse boxes

Engine compartment

Under the glove compartment

Cargo area

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

343

Engine compartment

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

344 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

Positions

These fuses are all located in the engine com-

partment box. Fuses in are located under

NOTE

•Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be

changed at any time when necessary.

•Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/

circuit breakers and should only be

removed or replaced by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•There is a special fuse removal tool on

the underside of the cover.

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker 50

Circuit breaker 60

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker 60

–

Headlight washers* 20

Windshield wipers 30

–

Climate system blower 40

–

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

–

Active Bending Lights-

headlight leveling*

Central electrical module 20

ABS 5

Speed-dependent steering

force*

Pos Function A

Engine Control Module

(ECM), transmission, SRS

Heated washer nozzles* 10

Lighting panel 5

Engine compartment box 5

Auxiliary lights* 20

Horn 15

Engine Control Module

(ECM)

Control module, automatic

transmission

Compressor A/C 15

Relay coils 5

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

345

Pos Function A

Starter motor relay 30

Ignition coils 20

Engine Control Module 10

Injection system, mass air

meter, engine control mod-

ule

A/C compressor, engine

valves, engine control mod-

ule (6-cyl.), solenoids (6-

cyl. non-turbo only)

EVAP valve, heated oxygen

sensor

Fuel leakage detection 5

–

Cooling fan 80

Electro-hydraulic power

steering

100

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

346 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Under the glove compartment

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse

boxes.

1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.

2. The fuses are accessible.

Positions-fuse box A

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker for the info-

tainment system and for

fuses 16-20

Pos Function A

12-volt socket (cargo area) 15

Controls in driver's door 20

Pos Function A

Controls in front passeng-

er's door

Controls in right rear pas-

senger's door

Controls in left rear pas-

senger's door

Keyless drive* 20

Power driver's seat* 20

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 347

Pos Function A

Power front passenger's

seat*

Folding rear seat head

restraints*

Infotainment control mod-

ule

Infotainment system, Sir-

iusXM൅ satellite radio*

Infotainment system 15

Bluetooth hands-free sys-

tem

Rear Seat Entertainment

system (RSE)*

7.5

Laminated panoramic roof*

Courtesy lighting, climate

system sensor

12-volt sockets 15

Heated rear seat* (pas-

senger's side)

Heated rear seat* (driver's

side)

Pos Function A

Heated front passenger's

seat*

Heated driver's seat* 15

Park assist*, trailer hitch

control module*, park

assist camera*

All Wheel Drive* control

module

Active chassis system* 10

Positions-fuse box B

Pos Function A

Tailgate wiper 15

Front courtesy lighting,

driver's door power win-

dow controls, power

seat(s)*, HomeLInk® Wire-

less Control System*

7.5

Instrument panel informa-

tion display

Pos Function A

Adaptive cruise control/

collision warning*

Courtesy lighting, rain sen-

sor*

7.5

Steering wheel module 7.5

Cental locking: fuel filler

door

Tailgate window washer 15

Windshield washer 15

Tailgate unlock 10

Electrical folding rear seat

outboard head restraints*

Fuel pump 20

Climate system control

panel

Alarm movement sensor*

Alarm, On-board diagnos-

tic system

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

348 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Pos Function A

Airbag system, occupant

weight sensor

Collision warning system* 5

Throttle pedal, auto-dim

mirror function, heated rear

seats*

7.5

Brake lights 5

Laminated panoramic roof* 20

Immobilizer 5

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 349

Cargo area

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions

Pos Rear fuse box A

Electric parking brake (left

side)

Electric parking brake (right

side)

Heated rear window 30

Trailer socket 2* 15

Pos Rear fuse box A

Power tailgate* 30

Pos Rear fuse box A

Trailer socket 1* 40

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts

department for the most up-to-date speci-

fications.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

350

Washing the car

The following points should be kept in mind

when washing and cleaning the car:

•The car should be washed at regular inter-

vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots

adhere to the paint and may cause dam-

age. To help prevent corrosion, it is partic-

ularly important to wash the car frequently

in the wintertime.

•Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.

Doing so may cause detergents and wax

to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid

scratching, use lukewarm water to soften

the dirt before you wash with a soft

sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.

•Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork

as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish

may be permanently damaged.

•A detergent can be used to facilitate the

softening of dirt and oil.

•Dry the car with a clean chamois and

remember to clean the drain holes in the

doors and rocker panels.

•Tar spots can be removed with tar remover

after the car has been washed.

•A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy

water can be used to clean the wiper

blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-

shield and wiper blades improves visibility

considerably and also helps prolong the

service life of the wiper blades.

•Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel

housings, fenders, etc).

•In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-

quent washing is recommended.

NOTE

When washing the car, remember to remove

dirt from the drain holes in the doors and

sills.

CAUTION

•During high pressure washing, the

spray mouthpiece must never be closer

to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not

spray into the locks.

•Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can

reduce lighting capacity considerably.

Clean the headlights regularly, for

example when refueling.

Special laminated panoramic roof cau-

tions:

•Always close the laminated panoramic

roof and sun shade before washing your

vehicle.

•Never use abrasive cleaning agents on

the laminated panoramic roof.

•Never use wax on the rubber seals

around the laminated panoramic roof.

Exterior components

Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning

products, available at your Volvo retailer, for

cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental

components such as chromed strips on the

exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for

using these products should be followed care-

fully. Solvents or stain removers should not be

used.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

351

CAUTION

•Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-

ber components

•Polishing chromed strips can wear

away or damage the surface

•Polishes containing abrasive sub-

stances should not be used

Automatic car wash

•We do NOT recommend washing your car

in an automatic wash during the first few

months (because the paint will not have

hardened sufficiently).

•An automatic wash is a simple and quick

way to clean your car, but it is worth

remembering that it may not be as thor-

ough as when you yourself go over the car

with sponge and water. Keeping the under-

body clean is most important, especially in

the winter. Some automatic washers do

not have facilities for washing the under-

body.

CAUTION

•Before driving into an automatic car

wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to

avoid damaging the windshield wipers.

•Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil-

iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any

antenna(s) are retracted or removed.

Otherwise there is risk of the machine

dislodging them.

•Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-

plated wheels using the same deter-

gents used for the body of the vehicle.

Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can

permanently stain chrome-plated

wheels.

WARNING

•When the vehicle is driven immediately

after being washed, apply the brakes,

including the parking brake, several

times in order to remove any moisture

from the brake linings.

•Engine cleaning agents should not be

used when the engine is warm. This

constitutes a fire risk.

Exterior lighting

Condensation may form temporarily on the

inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as

headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor-

mal and the lights are designed to withstand

moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi-

pate after the lights have been on for a short

time.

Polishing and waxing

•Normally, polishing is not required during

the first year after delivery, however, wax-

ing may be beneficial.

•Before applying polish or wax the vehicle

must be washed and dried. Tar spots can

be removed with kerosene or tar remover.

Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing

compound.

•After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

•Several commercially available products

contain both polish and wax.

•Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-

ishing a dull surface.

•A wide range of polymer-based waxes can

be purchased today. These waxes are easy

to use and produce a long-lasting, high-

gloss finish that protects the bodywork

against oxidation, road dirt and fading.

•Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct

sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should

not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

352

CAUTION

Volvo does not recommend the use of long-

life or durable paint protection coatings,

some of which may claim to prevent pitting,

fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have

not been tested by Volvo for compatibility

with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them

may cause the clear coat to soften, crack,

or cloud. Damage caused by application of

paint protection coatings may not be cov-

ered under your vehicle's paint warranty.

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-

ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly

and follow the instructions included with the

car care product.

Upholstery care

Fabric

Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For

more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,

shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric

stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Alcantera

suede-like material

Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a

soft cloth and mild soap solution.

Leather care

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured

with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,

sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the

protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and

fading can result.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy

leather care kit formulated to clean and beau-

tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the

protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner

removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream

protectant restores a barrier against soil and

sunlight.

Volvo also offers a special leather softener that

should be applied after the cleaner and pro-

tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and

reduces friction between leather and other fin-

ishes in the vehicle.

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and

conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four

times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about

Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-

ener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery

1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge

and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the

sponge with circular movements.

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the

sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,

do not rub.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a

towel, and allow the leather to dry com-

pletely.

Protecting leather upholstery

1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on

a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream

to the upholstery with light circular move-

ments.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining and

protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

353

CAUTION

•Under no circumstances should gaso-

line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents

be used on the plastic or the leather

since these can cause damage.

•Take extra care when removing stains

such as ink or lipstick since the coloring

can spread.

•Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-

vent can damage the seat padding.

•Start from the outside of the stain and

work toward the center.

•Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a

pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing

may damage the textile upholstery.

•Clothing that is not colorfast, such as

new jeans or suede garments, may stain

the upholstery.

Cleaning a leather-covered steering

wheel

•Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp

sponge and a neutral soap solution.

•Leather should be allowed to breath. Never

cover the steering wheel with a plastic pro-

tector.

•Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting

and conditioning the steering wheel with

Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and

Leather Softener 943 7429.

If there are stains on the steering wheel:

Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)

–Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the wheel

with a solution with 5% ammonia. For

blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) of

water and one ounce (25g) of salt and wipe

the stain.

Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)

1. Same procedure as for type I stains.

2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbent

paper or a towel.

Type 3 (dry soil or dust)

1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush.

2. Same procedure as for type I stains.

CAUTION

Sharp objects, such as rings, could damage

the leather on the steering wheel.

Cleaning the seat belts

Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild

soap solution.

Cleaning floor mats

The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed

clean regularly, especially during winter when

they should be taken out for drying. Spots on

textile mats can be removed with a mild deter-

gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo rec-

ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats.

Consult your Volvo retailer.

Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood

surfaces

Cleaning interior plastic components should

be done with a cleaning agent specially

designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo

retailer.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

354

Touching up paintwork

Paint code on the model plate1

Paint damage requires immediate attention to

avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish

regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.

Touch-up if necessary.

Paint repairs require special equipment and

skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any exten-

sive damage.

Minor scratches can be repaired by using

Volvo touch-up paint.

Color code

Make sure you have the right color. The color

code number is stated on the model plate.

Minor stone chips and scratches

Material:

•Primer – can

•Paint – touch-up pen

•Brush

•Masking tape

If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare

metal and an undamaged color coat remains,

you can add paint immediately after removing

dirt.

NOTE

When touching up the vehicle, it should be

clean and dry. The surface temperature

should be above 60 °F (15 °C).

Minor scratches on the surface

If the stone chip has not penetrated down to

the metal and an undamaged layer of paint

remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as

soon as the spot has been cleaned.

Repairing stone chips

G021832

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-

aged surface. Pull the tape off so that any

loose flakes of paint adhere to it.

2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with

a small brush.

3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint

can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint

thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats

and let dry after each application.

4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want

to protect surrounding paint by masking it

off

5. After a few days, polish the touched-up

areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount

of polish.

1see page 358 for the location of the model plate.

09 Maintenance and specifications

355

356

Label information.................................................................................. 358

Specifications........................................................................................ 360

Overview of information and warning symbols..................................... 366

Volvo programs..................................................................................... 369

SPECIFICATIONS

10 Specifications

Label information

358

Location of labels

10 Specifications

Label information

359

List of labels

Model

plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Codes for color and upholstery, etc. The

model plate is located on the rear side of

the B-pillar (the pillar between the front and

rear passenger doors) and the rear pas-

senger's door must be open in order to see

it.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Min-

istry of Transport (CMVSS) standards

(Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet

all applicable safety standards, as evi-

denced by the certification label on the

driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-

ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of

the driver's door opening). For further infor-

mation regarding these regulations, please

consult your Volvo retailer.

Tire inflation

pressures. This label indicates the correct

inflation pressures for the tires that were on

the vehicle when it left the factory. Cana-

dian models have the upper decal; U.S.

models have the lower one.

Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top

left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN) should always

be quoted in all correspondence concern-

ing your vehicle with the retailer and when

ordering parts.

Vehicle Emission Control Information.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-

cable emission standards, as evidenced by

the certification label on the underside of

the hood. For further information regarding

these regulations, please consult your

Volvo retailer.

10 Specifications

Specifications

360

Dimensions

Dimension In (mm)

A Wheelbase 109.2 (2774)

B Length 182.2 (4627)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 70.4 (1789)

D Load length, floor 38.3 (972)

E Height 67.4 (1713)

F Load height 31.6 (802)

G Track, front 64.3 (1632)

10 Specifications

Specifications

361

Dimension In (mm)

H Track, rear 62.4 (1586)

I Load width, floor 42.9 (1090)

J Width 74.4 (1891)

K Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 83.5 (2120)

L Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 74.4 (1891)

Weights

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight 6-cyl. FWDA: 5200 lbs

6-cyl. AWDB: 5355 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 5380 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 2360 kg

6-cyl. AWD:2430 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD:2440 kg

Capacity weight 950 lbs (all models) 430 kg (all models)

Permissible axle weights, front 6-cyl. FWD: 2740 lbs

6-cyl. AWD: 2800 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2840 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 1245 kg

6-cyl. AWD:1270 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD:1290 kg

Permissible axle weights, rear 6-cyl. FWD: 2545 lbs

6-cyl. AWD: 2640 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2645 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 1155 kg

6-cyl. AWD:1200 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD:1200 kg

Curb weight 3870 - 4220 lbs 1750 - 1910 kg

10 Specifications

Specifications

362

Category USA Canada

Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs

With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs

Without brakes: 750 kg

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg

With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

AFWD = Front Wheel Drive

BAWD = All Wheel Drive

Engine specifications

Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA

Engine designation B6324S5 B6324S4 B6304T4

Output (kW/rps) 179/107 171/108 224/93

Output (hp/rpm) 240/6400 230/6500 300/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 320/53 300/55 440/35 – 70

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 236/3200 221/3300 325/2100 – 4200

No. of cylinders 6 6 6

Bore (in/mm) 3.3/84 3.3/84 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.78/96 3.78/96 3.67/93.2

10 Specifications

Specifications

363

Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA

Displacement 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.3:1 9.3:1

AThis engine may not be available on all markets

Oil specifications

Engine oil must meet the minimum

ACEA A5/B5. Lower quality oils may not offer

the same fuel economy, engine performance,

or engine protection.

Oil additives must not be used.

Oil viscosity

Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life

under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

good fuel economy and engine protection. See

the viscosity chart.

Viscosity chart

Extreme engine operation

SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 require-

ments is recommended for driving in areas with

sustained low temperatures.

Oil volume

Engine model Volume (incl. filter)

3.2 (6-cyl.) B6324S4/S5 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

3.0T (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

10 Specifications

Specifications

364

Other fluids and lubricants

Fluid System Volume Specification

Transmission oilAAutomatic (TF-80SC) 7.4 US qts (7 liters) Transmission fluid AW-1

Coolant 3.2 (6-cyl.) 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) Coolant with corrosion inhibitor

mixed with water (50/50 mix), see

packaging.

3.0T 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters)

Air conditioning All models 1.7 lbs (770 g) Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a),

PAG oil

Brake fluid 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) DOT 4+

Power steering 1.26 US qts (1.2 liters) Power steering fluid WSS

M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters)

4.7 US qts (4.5 litersB)

Use a washer antifreeze recom-

mended by Volvo, mixed with

water.

Fuel tank volume 3.0T/3.2 6 cyl. 18.5 US gallons (70 liters)

AUnder normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

BModels without headlight washers

10 Specifications

Specifications

365

Electrical system

General information

12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-

nator. Single pole system in which the chassis

and engine block are used as conductors. The

negative terminal is connected to the chassis.

Performance, battery

Engine 3.2 6-cyl./3.0T

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacity (A) 520 – 700

Reserve capacity (min) 100 – 135

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the state of California

to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

If the battery is replaced, replace it with a

battery of the same cold start capacity and

reserve capacity as the original (see the

decal on the battery).

10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

366 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The symbols in the vehicle's various displays

are divided into three main categories:

•Warning symbols

•Indicator symbols

•Information symbols

The following tables list the most common

symbols, their meaning and the pages in this

manual that provide more detailed information.

Warning symbol

The red warning symbol lights up to

indicate a problem related to safety and/or

drivability. A message will also appear in the

main instruments panel's display.

Information symbol

The information symbol lights up and a

text message is displayed to provide the driver

with necessary information about one of the

vehicle's systems.

Symbols in the main instrument panel

Warning symbols

Symbol Description P.

no.

Low oil pressure 80

Parking brake 80

SRS airbags 80

Seat belt reminder 81

Generator not charg-

ing

Fault in the brake sys-

tem

Warning symbol 81

ACanadian models

Indicator symbols

Symbol Description P.

no.

Fault in the Active

Bending Light

(ABL)*system

Malfunction indicator

light

Anti-lock brake sys-

tem (ABS)

Rear fog light on 79

Stability system

(DSTC), Hill Descent

Control, Trailer Stabil-

ity Assist*

Tire pressure monitor-

ing sensor (TPMS)

Low fuel level 79

10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 367

Symbol Description P.

no.

Information symbol,

see text in information

display

High beam indicator 78

Left turn signal indica-

tor

Right turn signal indi-

cator

ACanadian models

Other information symbols

Symbol Description P.

no.

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *

142,

149

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *

142,

149

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *, Distance Alert*

142,

149,

151

Symbol Description P.

no.

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *, Distance Alert*

142,

149,

151

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *

142,

149

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *, Distance Alert*

142,

149,

151

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *, Distance Alert*

142,

149,

151

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol*

142,

149

Radar sensor* 146

Camera*

Laser sensor*

164

Symbol Description P.

no.

Collision Warning with

Full Auto-brake and

Pedestrian Detection*

166

Driver Alert System* 168

Active Bending Lights

(ABL)*

Fuel filler door (arrow

indicates it is on right

side of vehicle)

Rain sensor* 102

Driver Alert System* 169

Driver Alert System*,

Lane Departure Warn-

ing*

171

10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

368 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Description P.

no.

Driver Alert System*,

Lane Departure Warn-

ing*

171

Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol *

142,

149

Information symbols in the center

console display

Symbol Description P.

no.

Audio files 235

CD folder 235

Video files 235

Bluetooth-connected

cell phone

244

BluetoothTM hands-

free

244

HD radio 227

Park Assist* 174

Information symbols in the ceiling

console

Symbol Description P.

no.

Seat belt reminder 19

Occupant Weight

Sensor

10 Specifications

Volvo programs

369

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON

CALL roadside assistance. Additional informa-

tion, features, and benefits are described in a

separate information package in your glove

compartment.

If you require assistance, dial:

In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-

VOLVO)

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-

ports certification by the National Institute for

Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi-

fied technicians have demonstrated a high

degree of competence in specific areas.

Besides passing exams, each technician must

also have worked in the field for two or more

years before a certificate is issued. These pro-

fessional technicians are best able to analyze

vehicle problems and perform the necessary

maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at

peak operating condition.

11 Index

370

1, 2, 3 ...

12-volt sockets........................................ 210

ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 125

Accessory installation warning.................. 13

Active chassis system............................. 207

Active high beams..................................... 96

Active yaw control................................... 134

Adaptive brake lights............................... 124

Adaptive cruise control.................... 140, 142

Airbags

disconnecting the front passenger’s

side................................................. 26, 27

front...................................................... 22

inflatable curtain................................... 32

side impact........................................... 30

Air conditioning........................................ 202

Air distribution.......................................... 198

Air distribution table................................. 204

Air vents................................................... 199

All Wheel Drive......................................... 123

Anti-freeze....................................... 270, 328

Anti-lock brake system

warning light......................................... 78

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 125

Approach lighting.............................. 59, 101

Audio system

AUX/USB sockets............................... 238

Bluetooth devices............................. 241

Bluetooth hands-free system........... 243

Bluetooth streaming audio................. 241

getting started.................................... 215

HD digital radio................................... 227

introduction......................................... 214

media player....................................... 234

overview.............................................. 214

radio functions.................................... 225

Rear seat entertainment..................... 255

SiriusXM൅ satellite radio.................... 229

sound settings.................................... 220

steering wheel keypad........................ 216

voice control....................................... 251

Auto-dim rearview mirror......................... 108

Automatic locking retractor....................... 38

Automatic transmission

Geartronic........................................... 122

general description..................... 121, 122

oil........................................................ 364

shiftlock override................................ 123

Axle weight.............................................. 301

Battery

changing..................................... 340, 341

maintenance....................................... 340

remote key, replacing........................... 62

specifications...................................... 365

warning symbols................................. 339

Blind Spot Information System

(BLIS)....................................... 182, 183, 184

Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 243

Booster cushion, integrated...................... 49

Booster cushions....................................... 46

Brake lights.............................................. 124

Brake system

ABS..................................................... 125

Brake pad inspection.......................... 124

checking fluid level............................. 328

emergency brake assistance.............. 125

fluid..................................................... 364

general information............................. 124

11 Index

371

Hill Descent Control............................ 130

warning light......................................... 80

Bulbs

cargo area lighting.............................. 335

headlights........................... 330, 331, 332

introduction......................................... 330

license plate lights.............................. 335

side marker lights............................... 333

specifications...................................... 336

taillight................................................ 334

Camera, Park Assist................................ 178

Capacity weight....................................... 301

Cargo area

changing bulbs................................... 335

steel grid............................................. 280

Cargo area cover..................................... 280

Cargo area net......................................... 281

Catalytic converter................................... 274

Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 243

Cell phone voice control.......................... 251

Central locking system, introduction......... 56

Chains...................................................... 304

Check engine light..................................... 78

Check Engine warning light....................... 79

Child restraints

recalls and registration......................... 39

Child restraint systems.............................. 40

booster cushions.................................. 46

convertible seats.................................. 44

infant seats........................................... 42

ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ 47

top tether anchors................................ 48

Child safety................................................ 37

booster cushions.................................. 46

child restraint systems.......................... 40

convertible seats.................................. 44

infant seats........................................... 42

Child safety locks...................................... 52

City Safety™............................................ 154

Climate system........................................ 202

air distribution............................. 198, 204

air vents.............................................. 199

Interior Air Quality System.................. 198

introduction......................................... 197

passenger compartment filter............ 197

refrigerant........................................... 197

Clock, setting............................................. 82

Cold weather driving................................ 270

Collision warning system................. 160, 161

Compass in rearview mirror..................... 109

Conserving electrical current................... 269

Controls, center console.......................... 215

Convertible seats....................................... 44

Coolant............................................ 328, 364

Cooling system, general information....... 269

Courtesy lighting...................................... 100

Crash event data......................................... 9

Crash mode............................................... 36

Cruise control.................................. 138, 139

adaptive.............................................. 140

Curb weight............................................. 301

Current, conserving................................. 269

Defroster.................................................. 202

Detachable key blade................................ 61

Dimensions.............................................. 360

Disconnecting the front passenger’s air-

bag....................................................... 26, 27

Dome lighting........................................... 100

11 Index

372

Door mirrors............................................. 107

Driver alert............................................... 168

Driver distraction warning.......................... 13

Driving economically................................ 268

Driving in cold weather............................ 270

Driving through water.............................. 269

ECC................................................. 202, 203

Economical driving.................................. 268

Electric parking brake.............................. 127

Electronic Climate Control....... 200, 202, 203

air distribution table............................ 204

Interior Air Quality System.................. 203

Emergency locking retractor...................... 38

Emergency starting.................................. 119

Emergency towing................................... 286

Emission inspection readiness................ 323

Engine

overheating........................................... 81

specifications...................................... 362

starting................................................ 116

switching off....................................... 119

Engine compartment overview................ 325

Engine Drag Control (EDC)...................... 134

Engine oil................................................. 363

checking............................................. 326

low pressure warning light.............. 79, 80

volumes.............................................. 363

Engine remote start (ERS)........................ 118

Environment............................................... 12

Eyelets for anchoring loads..................... 278

Federal Clean Air Act............................... 322

Flat tires

repairing with tire sealing system....... 306

Floor mats

cleaning.............................................. 353

placing correctly................................. 116

Fluid specifications.................................. 364

Fog lights

front/rear............................................... 98

rear...................................................... 334

Four C (active chassis system)................ 207

Front airbags.............................................. 22

disconnecting passenger’s side air-

bag.................................................. 26, 27

Front park assist.............................. 174, 176

Front seats........................................... 86, 88

Fuel filler cap........................................... 274

Fuel filler door, opening........................... 273

Fuel level warning light.............................. 79

Fuel requirements............................ 271, 272

Fuel tank volume..................................... 364

Fuses............................... 342, 343, 346, 349

Garage door opener

HomeLink® Wireless Control System. 113

Gasoline requirements............................. 272

Gas tank volume...................................... 364

Gauges...................................................... 77

Geartronic................................................ 122

Geartronic automatic transmission.......... 122

Generator warning light............................. 80

Glossary of tire terminology..................... 300

11 Index

373

Grocery bag holder.................................. 278

Gross vehicle weight............................... 301

Hazard warning flashers............................ 99

HD digital radio........................................ 227

Headlights

Active Bending Lights........................... 97

active high beams................................. 96

changing bulbs........................... 331, 332

high/low beams.................................... 94

high beam flash.................................... 95

tunnel detection.................................... 97

Headlight washers................................... 103

Headphones............................................ 256

Head restraints, rear seat.................... 89, 90

Heated oxygen sensors........................... 275

Heated rear seats.................................... 201

High beams................................................ 94

active.................................................... 96

indicator light........................................ 79

Hill Descent Control................................. 130

Hoisting the vehicle................................. 323

HomeLink® Wireless Control System...... 113

Home safe lighting........................... 100, 101

Hood, opening/closing............................ 325

Horn........................................................... 93

Ignition modes........................................... 84

Immobilizer................................................ 58

Important information.................................. 6

Indicator lights......................... 77, 78, 79, 80

Infant seats................................................ 42

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 32

Inflation pressure..................................... 295

Inflation pressure table............................ 297

Information and warning symbols, table

of.............................................................. 366

Information lights..................... 77, 78, 79, 80

Information symbol.................................... 79

Infotainment

Menu navigation................................. 218

Infotainment system................................ 214

AUX/USB sockets............................... 238

Bluetooth devices............................. 241

Bluetooth® hands-free system........... 243

getting started.................................... 215

media player....................................... 234

menus......................................... 215, 218

radio functions.................................... 225

rear seat entertainment....................... 255

rear seat entertainment system, remote

control................................................. 264

sound settings.................................... 220

voice control....................................... 251

Inspection readiness................................ 323

Instrument lighting..................................... 94

Instrument overview............................ 76, 77

Instrument panel...................................... 189

Integrated two-stage booster cushion...... 49

Interior Air Quality System....................... 198

Interior lighting......................................... 100

iPod connector (audio system)............. 238

ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 47

11 Index

374

Jack

attaching............................................. 312

location of........................................... 312

Jump starting........................................... 119

Key blade....................................... 56, 61, 64

Keyless drive

general description............................... 64

starting the vehicle............................. 116

Labels

list of................................................... 359

location of........................................... 358

Laminated panoramic roof...................... 110

LATCH anchors......................................... 47

Leather care............................................. 352

Lighting panel............................................ 94

Load anchoring eyelets........................... 278

Loading the vehicle.......................... 276, 301

roof loads............................................ 279

Locking...................................................... 67

tailgate.................................................. 68

Locking the vehicle.................................... 59

Locks, child safety..................................... 52

Low beams................................................ 94

Low fuel level warning light........................ 79

Low oil pressure warning light................... 80

Main instrument panel............................. 189

Maintenance............................................ 322

hoisting the vehicle............................. 323

performed by the owner..................... 323

Malfunction indicator light......................... 79

Media player (infotainment system)......... 234

Menu........................................................ 191

Messages in the instrument panel........... 189

Mirrors

defroster............................................. 108

power door......................................... 107

rearview, auto-dim function................ 108

retractable........................................... 107

vanity.................................................. 210

Motor oil

checking............................................. 326

volumes.............................................. 363

MY CAR................................................... 191

Net in cargo area..................................... 281

Occupant safety........................................ 16

Occupant weight sensor...................... 26, 27

Octane recommendations....................... 272

Odometer, trip........................................... 82

Oil

checking............................................. 326

volumes.............................................. 363

Oil quality................................................. 363

OK button................................................ 189

On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 369

11 Index

375

Overhead courtesy lighting...................... 100

Overheating, engine................................... 81

Oxygen sensors, heated.......................... 275

Paint, touching up.................................... 354

Park assist....................................... 174, 176

Park Assist Camera................................. 178

Parking brake

electric, applying/releasing................. 127

warning light......................................... 80

Parking lights............................................. 98

Personal Car Communicator, unique func-

tions........................................................... 60

Polishing.................................................. 351

Power front seat

memory function................................... 87

with keyless drive................................. 88

Power mirrors.......................................... 107

defroster............................................. 108

Power steering

fluid..................................................... 329

speed-dependent............................... 207

Power steering fluid................................. 364

Power tailgate.......................................... 276

Power windows....................................... 105

laminated glass................................... 106

Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 20

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 119, 341, 365

Radio

SiriusXM൅ satellite radio.................... 229

Radio functions........................................ 225

HD digital radio................................... 227

Rain sensor.............................................. 102

Rear fog light..................................... 98, 334

Rear park assist............................... 174, 176

Rear seat entertainment.......................... 255

Rear seat entertainment (option)

headphones........................................ 256

menus................................................. 261

remote control.................................... 264

Rear seat head restraints........................... 90

Rear seats

center head restraint............................. 89

folding................................................... 89

heated................................................. 201

Rearview mirror

auto-dim function............................... 108

compass............................................. 109

Rear window defroster............................ 108

Recalls, child restraints.............................. 39

Refrigerant............................................... 364

Refueling.......................................... 271, 272

fuel filler cap....................................... 274

fuel filler door...................................... 273

fuel tank volume................................. 364

Registering child restraints........................ 39

Remote control........................................ 264

replacing batteries.............................. 265

Remote key................................................ 56

approach lighting.................................. 59

immobilizer........................................... 58

key blade........................................ 56, 61

locking the vehicle................................ 59

Personal Car Communicator.......... 59, 60

replacing the battery............................. 62

unlocking the vehicle............................ 59

11 Index

376

Remote key/PCC

common functions................................ 59

Reporting safety defects............................ 17

Roadside Assistance............................... 369

Road sign information (RSI)..................... 136

Rollover Protection System (ROPS).......... 35

Roll Stability Control (RSC)........................ 35

Roof loads............................................... 279

Safety, occupant........................................ 16

Safety defects, reporting........................... 17

Seat belt

reminder................................................ 19

Seat belts

Automatic locking retractor/Emergency

locking retractor.................................... 38

buckling................................................ 18

maintenance......................................... 18

pretensioners........................................ 18

reminder................................................ 18

reminder warning light.......................... 80

securing child restraint systems 42, 44, 46

unbuckling............................................ 18

use during pregnancy........................... 20

using..................................................... 18

Seats, front.......................................... 86, 87

Sensus..................................................... 188

Shiftlock....................................................... 9

override............................................... 123

Side door mirrors..................................... 107

Side impact airbags................................... 30

Side marker lights, changing bulbs......... 333

Sign information (RSI).............................. 136

SiriusXM൅ satellite radio......................... 229

Snow chains............................................ 304

Snow tires................................................ 304

Spare tire................................................. 305

Speed-dependent steering...................... 207

Spin control............................................. 134

SRS............................................................ 21

Stability system............................... 134, 135

Engine Drag Control (EDC)................. 134

indicator light........................................ 79

Starting the engine.................................. 116

remote start........................................ 118

with keyless drive............................... 116

Starting the vehicle

after a crash (crash mode).................... 36

Start inhibitor (immobilizer)........................ 58

Steel grid in cargo area............................ 280

Steering wheel

adjusting............................................... 93

horn....................................................... 93

keypad.................................. 93, 191, 216

Stone chips, touching up......................... 354

Storage spaces........................................ 208

Studded tires........................................... 304

Sunroof

laminated panoramic roof................... 110

Supplemental restraint system.................. 21

warning light......................................... 80

Symbols, overview................................... 366

Tailgate

driving with it open............................. 268

locking/unlocking.................................. 68

opening manually................................. 69

11 Index

377

power operated.................................. 276

wiper/washer...................................... 103

Tailgate wipers......................................... 338

Taillights, changing bulbs........................ 334

Temporary spare tire............................... 305

Three-way catalytic converter................. 274

Tire designations..................................... 298

Tire inflation pressure.............................. 297

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 316, 317

indicator light........................................ 79

Tires......................................................... 292

age...................................................... 292

changing from summer to winter........ 293

glossary of terms................................ 300

improving economy............................ 293

inflation pressure................................ 295

inflation pressure table....................... 297

load ratings......................................... 296

rotation............................................... 292

Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)..... 318

snow................................................... 304

spare................................................... 305

specifications...................................... 296

speed ratings...................................... 296

storing................................................. 294

studded............................................... 304

tire pressure monitoring system......... 316

tire sealing system.............................. 306

tread wear indicator............................ 293

uniform tire quality grading................. 303

Tire sealing system.................................. 306

Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-

tems).......................................................... 48

Touching up paint.................................... 354

Towing a trailer................................ 283, 284

trailer hitch.......................................... 284

Towing the vehicle................................... 286

Traction control........................................ 134

Trailer towing................................... 283, 284

trailer hitch.......................................... 284

Transmission

general description..................... 121, 122

oil........................................................ 364

shiftlock override................................ 123

Tread wear indicator................................ 293

Trip computer.......................................... 205

Trip odometers.......................................... 82

Trips, long distance................................. 270

Tunnel detection........................................ 97

Turn signals............................................... 99

changing bulbs................................... 333

indicator lights...................................... 79

Two-stage booster cushion....................... 49

Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 303

Unlocking the tailgate................................ 68

Unlocking the vehicle.......................... 59, 67

Upholstery care....................................... 352

Vanity mirror............................................ 210

changing bulbs................................... 335

Vehicle dimensions.................................. 360

Vehicle Event Data....................................... 9

Vehicle loading................................ 276, 301

roof loads............................................ 279

Vehicle maintenance................................ 322

performed by the owner..................... 323

Vehicle weights........................................ 361

11 Index

378

Voice control

cell phones......................................... 251

Volvo and the environment........................ 12

Volvo maintenance.................................. 322

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 369

Volvo programs....................................... 369

Volvo Sensus........................................... 188

Warning flashers, hazard........................... 99

Warning lights.......................... 77, 78, 79, 80

Warning symbol......................................... 81

Warning system, collision................ 160, 161

Warranties................................................ 322

Washer fluid..................................... 338, 364

Washers

headlight............................................. 103

windshield........................................... 102

Water, driving through............................. 269

Waxing..................................................... 351

Weights.................................................... 361

Wheels..................................................... 292

changing............................................. 312

storing................................................. 294

Whiplash Protection System..................... 33

Windows

power.................................................. 105

Windshield

rain sensor.......................................... 102

washers.............................................. 103

wipers/washers................................... 102

Windshield washer fluid................... 338, 364

Windshield wipers.................................... 337

service position................................... 337

Wiper blades

replacing............................................. 337

replacing tailgate wiper...................... 338

Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc5164"$BOBEB"51SJOUFEJO4XFEFO(zUFCPSH$PQZSJHIU©7PMWP$BS$PSQPSBUJPO

Volvo 2013 XC60 Owner's Manual Owners

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation